Home

OPERATION MANUAL

1. Characteristics Same as previous version The communications cycle time will be increased The cycle time will be the sum of the individual cycle times that would be required if the network was divided into separate networks with one Master each The cycle time of the PC will be increased Precautions 22 Same as previous version Refer to page 25 for precautions on using more than one Master in the same network Each Slave must belong to only one Master If there is more than one Master with the scan lists disabled in the same network communications can stop due to too much traffic on the network Bus Off Do not allocate the same PC memory area words to more than one Master Basic Operating Procedures Section 2 3 2 3 Basic Operating Procedures 2 3 1 Flowchart The following flowchart outlines the basic flow of operations for setting up the DeviceNet system Determine a suitable baud rate for the user s system Refer to Section 12 Communications Timing Determine the node arrangement the wiring configura Refer to Section 3 Network Configuration tion and the cable lengths and Specifications A Restrictions on lengths of trunk lines and drop lines and total drop line
2. Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes ClO TR CPU Bus Bit status 00 1 Link and Auxiliary Bit status with forced status 40 1 Word contents 80 2 Word contents with forced status Co 4 Timer Counter Completion Flag status 01 1 Completion Flag status with forced 41 1 status PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 Transition Flag status 03 1 Flag status with forced status 43 1 Step Flag status 04 1 Status 44 1 Step Timer PV 84 2 Forced Status Bit status 05 1 Word contents 85 2 Expansion DM Word contents specified bank 90 to 97 2 banks 0 to 7 Word contents current bank 98 2 Action Flag status 1B 1 Register Register contents 9C 2 Expansion DM current bank no Interrupt status Scheduled interrupt interval DD 4 Note Refer to 10 2 2 Data Configurations for the various data configurations 161 MEMORY AREA TRANSFER Section 10 8 10 8 MEMORY AREA TRANSFER Note Command Block Response Block Parameters Copies and transfers the contents of the specified number of consecutive memory area words to the specified memory area All source words must be in the same area and all designation words must be written to the same area here all memory areas with the same memory area code are considered as one area 1 The MEMORY AREA TRANSFER command can be executed regardless of the PC s mode It is the user s responsibility to program steps to prohi
3. The Master Unit is shipped with the node address to 0 Since the DIP switch is located on the back of the Master the Master must be removed from the PC in order to change the node address setting Be sure to set the node addresses before assembling the Network The Slaves node addresses can be set from 0 to 49 with C200HX C200HG and C200HE PCs or from 0 to 31 with C200HS PCs The Master s node address can be set from 0 to 63 because it doesn t use any words in the I O area Pins 7 and 8 are reserved for system use Leave these pins set to OFF 0 It won t be possible to start up the DeviceNet network if the same node address is used for the Master and another node node address duplication error Always turn OFF the PC before changing the DIP switch settings Front panel DIP Switch The DIP switch on the front of the Master Unit is used to set the communications baud rate and whether communications will be continued or stopped when a communications error occurs OO Reserved Always OFF CO Continue stop communications for communications error Om N Om 4 Baud rate gt NO The settings of the DIP switch pins are shown in the following table All pins are set to OFF at the factory CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs Note Note Memory Overlap with SYSMAC BUS Master Unit C200HX HG HE HS Note Memory Overlap with Actual I O
4. 283 Appendix C Multi vendor Applications This appendix provides precautions and reference material needed when using DeviceNet CompoBus D Units as DeviceNet components in a multi vendor environment Overview Connecting another Company s Slaves to an OMRON Master Refer to the Slave s manual when connecting another company s Slave to an OMRON Master Unit If a Slave has an EDS file it can be installed in OMRON s Configurator to enable handling it just like an OMRON Slave OMRON s Configurator already has installed all of the Slave EDS files currently registered with the ODVA In particular be sure to determine the number of words in the OMRON Master Unit that the Slave requires for input and output For Connection Object Interface 2 Polled I O Connection the number of I O words allocated in the OMRON Mas ter can be found from the Produced Connection Size and Consumed Connection Size as shown below Up to 32 words can be allocated to inputs and another 32 words to outputs Produced Connection Size This is the amount of memory usually in bytes allocated as input Consumed Connection Size This is the amount of memory usually in bytes allocated as output If the connection size is an even number of bytes the number of allocated words is bytes 2 If the connection size is an odd number of bytes the number of allocated words is bytes 1 2 For C
5. Characteristics Same as previous version The communications cycle time will be increased The cycle time will be the sum of the individual cycle times that would be required if the network was divided into separate networks with one master each The cycle time of the PC will be increased Precautions 88 Same as previous version Refer to page 104 for precautions on using more than one master in the same network Each slave must belong to only one master If there is more than one master with the scan list disabled in the same network communications can stop due to too much traffic on the network Bus Off Do not allocate the same PC memory area words to more than one master Overview Section 8 1 Remote I O Specifications Master model number CVM1 and CV Series CS1 Series CVv500 All others CVM1 CPU 01 CVM1 DRM21 V1 C200HW DRM21 V1 C200HX HG HE C200HE CPU All 11 Z others C200HS all models Max No Without of slaves Configu per Mas rator ter Unit With Con figurator 63 50 63 63 Max No of con trolled Without Configu rator 2 048 pts 64 input 64 output words 1 600 pts 50 input 50 output words 1 024 pts 32 input 32 output words points per Mas ter Unit With Con figurator 6 400 pts 100 words x 4 blocks Without messages 4
6. Memory area Data Data area address Address used in Memory No of communications area code bytes DM Area Word contents DM D00000 to D24575 000000 to 1FFFOO 82 2 Transition Area Flag status TN TNOO000 to TN1023 000000 to 03FF00 03 1 CVS00 only Flag status with TN TNO0000 to TN1023 1000000 to 03FF00 43 forced status Step Area Flag status ST ST0000 to ST1023 000000 to 03FF00 04 1 CV500 only Status ST ST0000 to ST1023 000000 to 03FF00 44 1 Step timer PV ST ST0000 to ST1023 000000 to 03FF00 84 2 Forced Status Bit status CIO 000000 to 25515 000000 to O9FBOF 05 1 G G00000 to G25515 0A0000 to OAFFOF Word contents CIO 0000 to 2555 000000 to 09FB00 85 2 G G000 to G255 0A0000 to OAFFOO Action Area Flag status AC AC0000 to AC2047 000000 to 07FF00 1B 1 CV500 only Register Area Register contents IR IRO to IR2 000000 to 000200 9C 2 DR DRO to DR2 000300 to 000500 Interrupt area Scheduled interrupt interval Not applicable 000200 DD 4 CV1000 CV2000 or CVM1 CPU11 E Memory area Data Data area address Address used in Memory No of communications area code bytes CIO TR CPU Bit status CIO 000000 to 255515 000000 to O9FBOF 00 1 Bus Link and TR TRO to TR7 09FF00 to 09FF07 Auxiliary Areas G G00000 to G25515 0A0000 to OAFFOF A A00000 to A51115 0B0000 to OCFFOF Bit status with forced CIO 000000 to 255515 000000 to O9FBOF 40 1 status G G00000 to G25515 0A0000 to OAFFOF Word co
7. Name Command PC mode Page code RUN MONITOR DEBUG PROGRAM FILE NAME READ 22 01 Valid Valid Valid Valid 186 SINGLE FILE READ 02 Valid Valid Valid Valid 187 SINGLE FILE WRITE 03 Valid Valid Valid Valid 188 MEMORY CARD FORMAT 04 Valid Valid Valid Valid 188 FILE DELETE 05 Valid Valid Valid Valid 189 VOLUME LABEL CREATE DELETE o6 Valid Valid Valid Valid 189 FILE COPY 07 Valid Valid Valid Valid 190 FILE NAME CHANGE 08 Valid Valid Valid Valid 190 FILE DATA CHECK 09 Valid Valid Valid Valid 191 MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER 0A Valid Valid Valid Valid 192 PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER 0B Valid Valid Valid Valid 193 PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER 0C see note Valid Valid Valid 194 FORCED SET RESET 23 01 Not valid Valid Valid Valid 195 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL 02 Not valid Valid Valid Valid 196 Note When the PC is in RUN mode data transfers from files to the program area are not possible but transfers from the program area to files are possible 10 2 Memory Area Designations The following table gives the addresses to use when reading or writing PC data The Data area address column gives the normal addresses used in the PC pro gram The Address used in communications column are the addresses used in CV mode commands and responses These addresses are combined with the memory area codes to specify PC memory locations These addresses are not the same as the
8. Note A node can be connected directly to the trunk line with the multi drop method but it is easier to connect a node to a drop line 29 Network Configuration Restrictions Section 3 2 Note 1 Multi drop connections with thick cables cannot be used with the connectors supplied with the Unit because the cables are too thick Use the following connectors for multi drop connections with thick cables For further details refer to Section 5 Connectable Devices XW4B 05C4 T D w o set screw made by OMRON TMSTB 2 5 5 ST 5 08 AU w o set screw made by Phoenix Contact The connector specifications are the same for both cables These connectors cannot be used with the Master Unit or CQM1 I O Link because they may come into contact with the Unit in the adjacent slot In this case use a T branch Tap 2 When using thick cable the cable may pull out of the connector depending on the strength of the cable Follow 7 3 Connecting Communications Cables when connecting communications cables 3 2 Network Configuration Restrictions 3 2 1 Maximum Network Length 30 Note The length of the network is longest at either the distance between the two most distant nodes or at the distance between the Terminating Resistors Longest distance is the maximum network length Terminal block Terminating Resistor oc T branch Tap with l rT rt Terminating Resistor
9. 22 02 12 bytes Command Disk no File name File position Data length code Response Block 22 02 12 bytes Command Response File capacity File position Data length Data code code Parameters Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file device memory card Beginning file name command The name of the file to be read refer to 10 3 Volume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the file name File position command and response The number of bytes from the start of the file from which to start reading files start at 00000000 Data length command and response The number of bytes of data to read File capacity response The capacity bytes of the file that was read Note Ifthe SINGLE FILE READ command is executed for a file with a file capacity of 0 bytes the data length will be returned as 0000 and no data will be read 187 SINGLE FILE WRITE Section 10 38 Data response The specified data in sequence starting from the specified byte 10 38 SINGLE FILE WRITE Command Block Note Writes a new file to the file device connected to the PC or appends overwrites an existing file stored in the file device Designation can be made to protect existing files if an attempt is made to create a new file of the same name as an existing file When a new file is written or an existing file is modified the file will record the clock data of the PC as the date of the file Writing a
10. 07 o Command code Response Block 07 o Command Response code code Year Month Date Hour Minute Second Day Parameters Year month date hour minute second day response Each value is ex pressed in BCD Year The rightmost two digits of the year Hour 00 to 23 Day As follows Value 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 Day Sun Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat 10 26 CLOCK WRITE Sets the clock Note 1 The PC automatically checks the range of the specified data If any portion of the data is incorrect the clock will not be set 2 If any other device holds the access right the clock will not be set Command Block 07 02 i Sa ne code Year Month Date Hour Minute Second Day Response Block 07 02 Command Response code code Parameters Year month date hour minute second day command Each specified value is expressed in BCD Year The rightmost two digits of the year Hour Specify 00 to 23 Day As follows Value 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 Day Sun Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat 178 MESSAGE READ Section 10 27 Note 1 If the second or day are not specified 00 will be set as the second and the previous value will be kept for the day 2 The PC does not check the day from the date This means that no error will occur even if the date and day do not agre
11. Memory area Data Data area address Address used in Memory No of communications area code bytes Action Area Flag status AC AC0000 to AC2047 000000 to 1FFF00 1B 1 CV1000 or CV2000 only Register Area Register contents IR IRO to IR2 000000 to 000200 9C 2 DR DRO to DR2 000300 to 000500 Expansion DM current bank no Not applicable 000600 2 CV1000 or CV2000 only Interrupt area Scheduled interrupt interval Not applicable 000200 DD 4 10 2 1 Word Bit Addresses Each word bit address specifies a specific bit or word The rightmost two digits of the address specify bit 00 to 15 or 00 if not required and leftmost four digits specify the word address IR Specify the the bit between 00 and OF 00 to 15 Set to 00 to specify word or flag data Specify the address of the word or flag To obtain the corresponding address of the desired word or bit add the data area word address hexadecimal to the first address of the range of addresses used for that data area in communications For example the address for word G134 is computed as follows First address for CPU Bus Link Area 0A00 OAO0 86 134 in BCD OA86 The word address for G134 would thus be 0A8600 the memory area code would specify this as a word and the address of bit 12 in C134 would be OA860C 10 2 2 Data Configurations Flag or Bit Status One Byte Flag or Bit Status with Forced Status One Byt
12. 21 02 10 bytes 10 bytes Command Response Max no of No of No of Errorlog Error log code code stored records stored records data data records 1 record 1 record 209 ERROR LOG CLEAR Section 12 6 Parameters Beginning record no command Designates the beginning record number in a range of 0000 to 0013 0 to 19 in decimal the first record is 0000 No of records command and response Designates the number of records to be read in a range of 0001 to 0014 1 to 20 in decimal If more than 20 records is specified all records through the last one will be returned along with a 110B error response code response too long Max no of stored records response The maximum number of stored re cords varies with the kind of Unit The DeviceNet Master Unit can store 20 re cords maximum No of stored records response The number of records that have been re corded Error log data response The specified error log records will be returned in sequence starting from the beginning record number The total number of bytes required is calculated as follows No of records x 10 bytes The configuration of each error record is as follows 1st byte 10th byte SaaS R eRe KON Date Hour Year Month econd Error code Details Minute S e Error Code and Details The error code and details vary with the kind of Unit e Minute Second Date Hour Year and Month Each record i
13. Communica gt Communica gt Same power a eee tions power Slave Unit a tions power Slave Unit supply for Slave Unit aad supply gt lt supply communications gt a i f and internal circuit i f nternal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit power supply power supply power supply Because the power supplies for the communications internal circuit and I O are individually insulated as shown below as a general rule each power supply should be connected separately Commu Internal I O circuit nications circuit circuit ij Insulation i Insulation Insulation Communications Internal circuit O power power supply power supply supply Because of space and cost difficulties involved in preparing individual power supplies sharing the same power supply may be unavoidable If this is the case take the following precautions e Be sure to keep the I O power supply separate e When the communications and internal circuit power supply is shared wiring the network as shown in configuration A is recommended Do not wire the net work as shown in configuration B because it will generate more noise than the network in configuration A Note The lower voltage boundary of the internal circuit power supply must be higher than that of the communications power supply To meet the voltage specifica 81 Operations Checklist Section 7 11 tions
14. External Power Supply Connectors Description Manufacturer Assembled female connector plug Crimped or soldered Cable with connector plug at one end Female plug to cable core wires I O Unit Connecting Cables for MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Units Specifications Manufacturer Provided with I O Units Cable length 40 mm Provided with Communications End connector Unit GCN1 100 Cable length 1 m 293 Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions Applicable Connectors for MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Units 294 Model number 52109 0390 51030 0330 See note 50083 8014 50084 8014 50083 8114 See note 50084 8114 57036 5000 57037 5000 See note Connector made by MOLEX Pressure welded Housing Appendix D Remarks For AWG 24 Crimp Housing Reeled con tacts For AWG 24 to 30 For AWG 22 to 24 Loose con tacts For AWG 24 to 30 For AWG 22 to 24 Crimping tool For AWG 22 to 26 For AWG 24 to 30 FCN361J024 AU FCN367J024 AU F FCN363J024 AU Connector made by FUJITSU for 16 point Units Soldered Crimped Crimp XW2S 2513 XW2A 2501 Recom mended D sub 25 pin connector made by OMRON Hood Plug FCN361J040 AU FCN367J040 AU F FCN363J040 AU Connector made by FUJITSU
15. Example Trunk line Smm A Trunk ine T branch Tap A to Node 1 5 m ee ee T branch Tap A to Node 2 6 m Drop line 6 m max T branch Tap A to Node 3 5 m 4m T branch Tap A to Node 4 6 m All cables must be 6 m or less 3 2 3 Total Drop Line Length This is the total sum length of all the drop lines Even when the length of each individual drop line is 6 m or less be sure not to exceed the maximum total drop line length The standard for the total drop line length varies with the baud rate 31 Network Configuration Restrictions Section 3 2 Configuration Example Terminating Terminating Resistor Resistor fo In the configuration example the length of each drop line is 6 m or less as de manded but the total sum length of all the drop lines is 40 m Set the baud rate at 250 kbps or 125 kbps because the total maximum length of drop lines at 500 kbps must not exceed 39 m 3 2 4 Baud Rate and Communications Distance The communications distance in a DeviceNet network is also restricted by the baud rate as shown in the following table Baud rate Maximum network length Drop line Total drop Thick cable Thin cable length line length 100 m m
16. 0 00000 75 7 5 Connecting Terminating Resistors 0 0 ee eee eee eee 76 7 6 Connecting Communications Cables to Nodes 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 76 7 7 Grounding the Network 0 2 eee cee eee teens 77 7 8 Noise Precautions 5 35 5s 3 0 AN ee SSS SUA eA a Bae See bias Se eis ee 79 7 9 Faulty Operation x sste anra etna Mabe eased Bea EE E BEN E E e WEN e 80 7 10 Sharing the Same Power Supply 02 0 cece cece eee 81 7 ld Operations Checklist sven cits eek ea keenest abe ses ae ei aaa aeas sles 82 69 Mounting Section 7 2 7 1 General Precautions e Confirm that one Terminating Resistor is attached to each end of the trunk line The DeviceNet does not have any built in Terminating Resistors e Do not insert arrestors or products other than DeviceNet products in the com munications line Doing so may cause signal reflection or attenuation disturb ing proper communications e Provide an appropriate distance between ducts and the Unit so as not to apply any tension to connectors Applying tension to communications connectors may disconnect them thus causing faulty operation Duct Duct Shon Provide approx 10 cm ode Node x Q e Confirm that communications connectors are securely attached during wiring Be sure to tighten set screws to an appropriate torque 0 25 to 0 3 N m Use the SZF 1 screwdriver for tightening DeviceNet connectors e When wiring the co
17. Output area Input area Node Outputs Inputs Output block 1 Input block 1 address 00 16pts Opts CIO 1950 Allocated 00 ClO 1900 Allocated 02 01 8 pts 8 pts CIO 1951 Allocated 01 Not used ClO 1901 Allocated 01 Allocated 03 02 16pts 16 pts CIO 1952 Allocated 02 03 Opts 8 pts CIO 1953 Allocated 10 10 32 pts Opts CIO 1954 Allocated 10 Node Input block 2 ddress Outputs Inputs Output block 2 04 Opts 48 pts D1000 Not used Allocated 12 Allocated 04 09 Opts 8pts Allocated 04 Allocated 04 12 8 pts 16 pts Not used Allocated 12 Not used Allocated 09 Setting I O Allocations on the Configurator 1 2 3 1 Delete the check marks from the Not Used setting for each of the blocks Input blocks 1 and 2 and output blocks 1 and 2 2 Edit each block and set the area start word and number of words allocated for each 3 Set the start word or start byte and the allocation size number of bytes for each node address in the current device setup table IN word OUT word Node address 1953 CM1000L Output area block 1 Area I O relay Start word 1950 No of words 5 Output area block 2 Area DM Area Start word 1000 No of words 1 Input area block 1 Area I O relay Start word 1900 No of words 2 Input area block 2 Area I O relay Start word 10 No of words 6 I O relay IR or CIO Area 8 4 2 Basic Applicati
18. 0 ccc eee n eee nne 159 10 4 MEMORY AREA READ 0 00 cc eee nett nen nene 160 10 5 MEMORY AREA WRITE a a a eee ene e a eeee 161 10 6 MEMORY AREA FILL 0 en een Rae neae 162 10 7 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ 0 ccc cent eennene 162 10 8 MEMORY AREA TRANSFER 0 0 0 00 ccc een eee n ene 164 10 9 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ 0 0 c ce nee nee 164 10 10 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ 0 0 0 neae 165 10 11 PARAMETER AREA READ 0 0 0 ccc etn tenn eens 166 T0712 PARAMETER AREA WRITE seeriad aa ta tetas ao cadre haan ea dae ae 167 10 13 PARAMETER AREA CLEAR 0 0 00 c ccc een tenn e 169 10 14 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT 0 0000 ennnen aneneen 170 10 15 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR peoo crana onean naa cee 170 10 16 PROGRAM AREA READ eop reinn ccc ene n tenn eens 171 10 17 PROGRAM AREA WRITE 2 0 0 0 000 ccc ene nen tenn eens 172 10 18 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR 0 0002 ccc ene ene n ene neee 173 TORTO RUN oe ck is a ee aa seh te ANS sed oaks edhe Sida ded ds abled te a ad tobe eet 173 TO220 STORE Treserien ki eneen rea tuted bec eel Sobel tire berth ble a a a Seach 174 10 21 CONTROLLER DATA READ 000 een n ene 174 10 22 CONNECTION DATA READ creer e aa tenn e nee n ene 177 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ 0 0 nene 177 10224 CYCLE TIME READ Soorte Pt teh be ee et K e A ea e E E a s 179 10 25 CLOCK READ orafa aa a A ees tate Sete Se
19. Length of drop line Node Length of drop line Node There are two types of cables Thick cables and thin cables The thick cables are relatively hard and inflexible but they protect against signal attenuation and can be used for relatively long communications distances The thin cables are soft and flexible but they do not protect as well against signal attenuation and are not suited to long communications distances The maximum length of a network thus depends on the type of cable that is used as shown in the following table Communications power supply Cable type Maximum network length Thick cables 5 wire 500 m Thin cables 5 wire 100m Note a Ifthe length of the network is 100 meters or less the thin cables can be used for the trunk line When using thin cables for the trunk line be sure that communications power supply conditions are met b The length of the network is also restricted by the baud rate used Even with thick cables the length of the network will be restricted if the baud rate is set to anything but 125 kbps Refer to 3 2 4 Baud Rate and Communications Distance Combining Thick and Thin Cables The most distant nodes can also be connected by a combination of thin and thick cables When these cables are combined the following conditions must be met and the maximum network length will be shorter than when only thick cables are used Also when comb
20. Error code and error node address alternate see diagram below Reading ase Flashing Registered 239 Indicators and Error Processing Section 15 1 The following diagram illustrates the alternating display of the error code and er ror node address OFF 0 1 s OFF 0 1 s OFF 0 3 s Slaves OFF 03s Slave s Error code node address Error coag node address gt Us 1s its 1s OFF 0 1 s OFF 0 3 Master s node Master s address 1 s error code 1 s OFF 0 3 s If there is an error at the Master Unit There is no priority in the error codes all errors that have occurred will be dis played in order All error codes begin with letters so they can be distinguished from node addresses immediately 15 1 3 Identifying Errors from the Indicators The indicators can be used to identify the cause of an error Normal Indications The following table shows the status of the MS and NS indicators and the 7 seg ment display during normal operation Display Indicator status Network Unit status Comments MS NS 7 segment ON Master Remote I O or message This is the normal display when remote I O green Units node communications in progress and or message communications are active address Flashing Master Remote I O communications Connection not established indicates that the green Unit s node stopped and message local node has not sent a message to anothe
21. sssssssssssssssssseccees 213 214 215 217 225 226 236 239 240 253 265 273 277 285 287 291 301 303 307 About this Manual This manual describes the installation and operation of the DeviceNet CompoBus D network and in cludes the sections described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate the DeviceNet Master and Slave Units Be sure to read the precautions provided in the first section Precautions provides precautions for the correct and safe application of the products Section 1 provides an overview of the DeviceNet network including features specifications and the sys tem configurations Section 2 provides a general overview of the DeviceNet network including basic operations and basic procedures for starting and running the network Section 3 explains the Network configuration and provides the specifications required for setting up the Network Section 4 provides Master Unit specifications and describes their components indicators switch set tings etc Section 5 provides specifications for the Cables and Connectors used in the DeviceNet network Section 6 explains the various considerations involved in providing a communications power supply Section 7 describes the methods used to mount and wire the components of a DeviceNet network Section 8 describes setting up and using remote I O commu
22. 0 0 0 0 2c 111 85 Overview Section 8 1 8 1 Overview The remote I O communications function enables automatic transfer of I O data CVM1 CV series PCs CIO 1900 CIO 1963 CIO 2000 CIO 2063 Output area ClO 1900 ClO 1901 CIO 1962 CIO 1963 ClO 2000 CIO 2001 ClO 2064 C200HX HG HE PCs CIO 2063 IR 50 IR 99 IR 350 IR 399 Output area IR 50 IR 51 IR 98 IR 99 M IR 350 IR 351 IR 398 86 IR 399 between Slaves and the CPU Unit of the PC to which the Master Unit is mounted without any special programming To achieve this each Slave is allocated words in the I O memory of the CPU Unit Words are allocated as described next Default Allocations Unless a Configurator is used to change the I O allocations words in the CPU Unit are allocated in the order of DeviceNet CompoBus D node addresses starting from node 00 The words are divided into an output area and an input area The specific words that are allocated depend on the model of PC that is being used Each node address is allocated one input and one output word If a Slave re quires more than one input or one output word then it is assigned more than one node address If a Slave requires less than one word it simply uses the right most bits in the word allocated to it Node 0 Node 1 Node 62 Node 63 Node 0 Node
23. 22 07 12 bytes 12 bytes Command Disk no File name Disk no File name code Source Destination 22 07 Command Response code code Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file devices memory cards File name command The file to be copied and a new name for the copied file refer to 10 3 Volume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the file name 1 The file will not be copied if an existing file name is given 2 The copied file is given the same date as the original file 10 43 FILE NAME CHANGE Command Block 190 Changes a file name 22 08 12 bytes 12 bytes Command Disk no Old file name New file name code FILE DATA CHECK Section 10 44 Response Block 22 08 A Command Response code code Parameters Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file device memory cards Old and new file names command The original file name and a new name for the file refer to 10 3 Volume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the file name Note 1 The file name will not be changed if an existing file name is given for the new file 2 The new file is given the same date as the original file 10 44 FILE DATA CHECK Does a data check on a file stored in the extended memory file device con nected to the PC by confirming the checksum at the beginning of the file Command Block 2 09 12 b
24. DRT1 AD04H Temperature Input Terminals DRT1 TSO4T DRT1 TSO4P See explanation following table 4 words 16 bits each allocated Analog Output Terminal 2 outputs DRT1 DA02 2 words 16 bits each allocated See explanation following table C200H 1 O Link Unit C200HW DRT21 32 words max 16 bits each allocated in 8 bit units 32 words max 16 bits each allocated in 8 bit units For the default allocations one word each in the input and output areas is allo cated to each node address The words that are allocated are determined by the node address If a Slave requires more than one input or output word it is allo cated the required number of words When this happens the node addresses normally used for the extra words cannot be used also these node address can be used if the Slaves they are used for are allocated words in the other area in put or output area Also any words that are not allocated to a Slave that are between allocated words in the input or output area cannot be used at all even as work bits 97 Default Remote I O Allocation Section 8 3 98 Address 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 The Master Units are not allocated any words regardless of the node address setting Output Area 15 0 Allocation not possible Allocation not possible Allocated Allocation possible Allocation not possi
25. In The consumption current required for the communications power supply and the internal circuit power supply for each node 0 005 Q The contact resistance of the taps 6 5 2 Countermeasures If the best locations cannot be determined using either the first or second formu lae follow the procedure as shown below e Locate the communications power supply in the center of the network and the nodes to both sides of it e If the nodes are already located at both sides of the power supply move the power supply in the direction that requires the larger current capacity e If thin cable is being used replace it with thick cable e Move the highest current consumption node nearer the power supply If the best locations still cannot be determined using the first and second formu lae even after carrying out the above procedure a single power supply will not be sufficient In that case proceed to Step 3 Configuration Example 1 Nodes Concentrated to One Side of the Power Supply Trunk Line Thick cable Drop Lines Thin cables Communications power supply 40m lt 30m gt 20m f SA cs Thick truck line Terminating j resistor Terminating resistor Thin drop line Master 6 Output points 2 Analog inputs Node 16 Input points Output points 2 Analog inputs Node 5 uni
26. TMSTBP 2 5 5 ST 5 08 AU Connector Screwdriver Model Specifications SZF 1 Special screwdriver for DeviceNet connectors _menulacturer Contact K K Terminating Resistors Model Specifications Manufacturer DRS1 T Terminal block Terminating Resistor 121 Q OMRON Note Also can be used as Terminating Resistor with T branch Tap T branch Tap Specifications Manufacturer 3 connectors provided When used on trunk line 1 drop line can be connected Terminating Resistor can be connected 5 connectors provided When used on trunk line 3 drop lines can be connected Terminating Resistor can be connected 292 Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions Appendix D Power Supply Tap Specifications 1485T P2T5 T5 Required when connecting more than one Allen Bradley power supply Ground terminal provided Cable Connectors for Sensor Terminals XS8A 0441 Connector marking XS8 1 Applicable cable wire size 0 3 to 0 5 mm XS8A 0442 Connector marking XS8 2 Applicable cable wire size 0 14 to 0 2 mm Connectors for Environment resistant Terminals I O Connectors Description Manufacturer XS2G D4 Assembled male connector plug Crimped or soldered XS2H D421 Cable with connector plug at one end Male plug to cable core wires XS2W D42 Cable with connector plug at both ends Male plug to female plug
27. Disconnect the Configurator from the network i e go off line Turn OFF the power supply to all the Slaves Turn ON the power supply to all the Masters Connect the Configurator to the network using the node address of one of the Slaves Read a Master parameter file from the Configurator Register the Master parameters read in step 9 in the corresponding Master Unit Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all Master Units Disconnect the Configurator from the network Turn ON the power supply to all the Slaves Start communications Setup When Not Using Remote I O Communications 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 Create an empty scan list Register the scan list in the Master Unit Confirm that the MS indictor is lit green and that the NS indicator is flashing green on the Master Unit Switch the PC to RUN mode Starting Remote I O Communications During Operation 26 1 2 3 1 2 Create a scan list From the Configurator set remote I O communications to be stopped at startup Register the scan list in the Master Unit Confirm that the MS indictor is lit green and that the NS indicator is flashing green on the Master Unit Switch the PC to RUN mode SECTION 3 Network Configuration and Specifications This section explains the Network configuration and provides the specifications required for setting up the Network 3 1 Network Configuration 6 00 rresd thei ee A eo ees 28 3
28. Never touch any of the terminals while power is being supplied Doing so may result in serious electrical shock or electrocution Operating Environment Precautions Do not operate the control system in the following places e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera ture e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to shock or vibration e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Application Precautions 5 Z N Caution e Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power supplies The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the lon gevity and reliability of the system Improper operating environments can lead to malfunction failure and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installa tion and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system 5 Applicat
29. 2 Use the Configurator to allocate node addresses within each block as shown below Output block 1 Node 00 Node 00 DRT1 OD16 Output Terminal 16 pts Node 0 Node 03 DRT1 DA02 Analog Output Terminal 2 pts Input block 1 Node 01 DRT1 ID08 Input Terminal 8 pts Node 01 Node 02 Node 00 DRT1 ID08 Input Terminal 8 pts Each node address must be allocated at least one byte rightmost or left most Note 1 Blocks can be in any order in memory Output block 1 Input block 2 Output block 2 Input block 1 2 Output blocks do not need to match input blocks in terms of node address settings For example the following type of correspondence is not neces sary Output block 1 Input block 1 Node 01 Node 01 4 This type of correspondence Node 02 Node 02 is not necessary Node 03 Node 03 105 User set Allocations Section 8 4 3 Each node address can be set only once in the output blocks and once in the input blocks The same node ad dress cannot be set twice Output block 1 Output block 2 4 I O can be allocated in either bytes or words but if the starting byte is a left most byte bits 07 to 15 then only one byte can be set Only one byte can be set if the first byte is a left Start byte most byte 15 0 wrone 9X EE 5 The same Slave cannot be a
30. ID content 1 MAC ID 2 Baud rate 3 BOI 4 Bus Off counter 5 Allocation information 6 MAC ID switch changed 7 Baud rate switch changed 8 MAC ID switch value 9 Baud rate switch value Get read Set write Attribute Object instance Service Object instance Connection Object 0x05 Attribute Service Max number of active connections OE Get_Attribute_Single Not supported Not supported 256 Object class ID content Attribute 1 State 2 Instance type 3 Transport class trigger 4 Produced connection ID 5 Consumed connection ID 6 Initial comm characteristics 7 Produced connection size 8 Consumed connection size 9 Expected packet rate 12 Watchdog time out action 13 Produced connection path length 14 Produced connection path 15 Consumed connection path length 16 Consumed connection path Communications Instance type Explicit messaging 00 hexadecimal 1 0 01 hexadecimal Connection Transport class trigger Object instance See table below See table below Object instance Poll client 22 hexadecimal Strobe client 22 hexadecimal Explicit client 23 hexadecimal Explicit server Service 05 Reset DeviceNet service 83 hexadecimal Parameter option OE Get_Attribute_Single 10 Set_Attribute_Single 287 Appendix D Connectab
31. Number of command bytes hex 0 to 160 Command data beginning with command code The destination information provides the destination unit number of the Special I O Unit and the number of words to be written as shown in the following dia gram wa coes SSS D Destination unit number of the Special I O Unit 0000 to 000F hex D 1 Number of words to write 0001 to 0080 hex C200HX HG HE Ladder Symbols Operands D Destination information C Control code Le S 18t source word S Local node Destination node E ee Ret ey Local ae Remote CPU Unit Master Unit i Master Unit CPU Unit a a ant aa 5 Interpretation Interpretation oO I 1st response word Response monitoring time i U I U j j j j Js i S ae No of command bytes I Command j I I 1 I j Q Q data Response Response Execution O Execution gt Response data 1 For commands addressed to Master Unit 2 For commands addressed to CPU Unit 133 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs Section 9 4 Description IOWR transfers data from the words beginning at S to the specified Special I O Unit The control code C specified parameters for the instruction as shown in the following illustration Destination unit address see following table Destination node address 00 to 3E indicate nodes 0 t
32. PREE vy Check the Communications Unit Status Area Error Processing 246 TS indicator Notit pINo 14 p p Litred iNo 15 a Flashing gt Iunie green No 16 A MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL status area is available in the first two words of the MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL input area in the Master The contents and causes of errors can be found by checking this area Status Area Configuration The status area is configured as shown in the following diagram 15 8 7 0 0 wd I O Unit connection information 1 wd Error I O Unit addresses Registered I O Unit addresses Indicators and Error Processing Section 15 1 1 0 Unit Connection Information Bit 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 wd 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 t_ 1 Error OR of bits 0 to 4 1 Refreshing I O Error content I O Unit error high den sity connector type _ 4 Special O Unit Error 1 Configuration Error 1 I O Unit Interface Error 1 I O Unit Power Supply Overload 1 I O Unit Error High density Connector Type Error and Registered I O Unit Addresses o Bit 1wd 7 6 5 4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 1 jo fo En O 4 4 NER o o Ola 8 2 0 The bits corresponding to registered I O Units are turned ON Bits 0 to 7 correspond to addresses 0
33. The MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL is not operating This section explains the causes of errors how to determine their locations and the actions to be taken when errors occur in a MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL When an error occurs in a MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL use the following flow chart to find the cause of the error determine its location and take the appropri ate action The numbers correspond to the numbers in the tables beginning on page 247 normally F if Input area 1 43210 Check the Communications Check the firstwordofthe ig THID Unit MS indicator 1 0 Unit interface status l fae Wt nee imme area First word 1 oo L j gt Not lit gt No 6 Bit4 aa ON i i ERES gt I O Unit error high density gt a 7 i connector type No 1 gt Litred gt No 7 Bits etae ree se ae Aa H Flashing No 8 ON p Communications power supply p re a overcurrent to I O Units No 2 he i L Lit green Bit2 La ON ae VO Unit interface error Lp No 3 Bee ee Check the Communications L 2 Unit NS indicator Bit 1 ON e ears gt Configuration error ob No 4 Me 6A eres p Litred p No 10 Bit 0 ON i ce Flashing Special I O Unit error gt gt No 11 m mra No 5 red Flashing i aa P green No 12 p Status not accessible pre L Lit green
34. The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement ma chines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for programming and operating OMRON PC Systems Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that a PC System and all PC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PC System to the abovementioned applications Safety Precautions N WARNING Z N WARNING Never attempt to disassemble any Units while power is being supplied Doing so may result in serious electrical shock or electrocution
35. below The number of words in the parentheses is specified as the number of words to clear Leoio ti tS 1 80 00 PC Setup 0100 1000 Peripheral Device settings eee ii ees I O table E io Routing tables Figo Unit No 0 80 02 CPU Bus Unit A 0840 settings Unit No 15 22222222L Sy aaa a E E 4 10 14PROGRAM AREA PROTECT Protects the program by making it read only Note 1 The program cannot be protected if any other device holds the access right 2 If memory is write protected via the key switch on the front panel of the PC the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT command will not be effective Command Block 03 04 00 OO 00 00 00 00 OO FF FF FF FF Command Program Beginning word Last word Password code no Protect code Response Block 03 04 Command Response code code Parameters The command will be executed normally even if the beginning word and last word are set to values other than those shown below Program no command Set to 0000 Protect code command Set to 00 Beginning word command Set to 00000000 Last word command Set to FFFFFFFF Password command Set any four ASCII characters The password is used with the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR command refer to 10 15 PRO GRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR 10 15 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR Restores write and read access rights so that
36. D000 Rest of first response word DM 1002 0064 Response monitoring time DM 1003 0009 No of command bytes DM 1004 2801 Command code DM 1005 020E Slave node address 02 Service code 0E DM 1006 0001 Class ID 0001 DM 1007 0001 Instance ID 0001 DM 1008 0100 Attribute ID 01 D 0009 Destination information Destination unit number 00 hex No of words to transfer 09 BCD 147 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 5 25315 Sets 0000 in DM 0000 to DM 2999 S Par Sets 0001 in IR 000 25315 MOV 21 Place control data into control data word to specify f response destination node address 05 and destina AR 05FE tion unit address FE Flag DM 0000 MOV 21 8207 DM 1000 MOV 21 D000 DM 1001 Sets the first response storage word DM 2000 to DM 1000 and DM 1001 depending on the desig nation of the memory area response monitor time 10 0 s No of command bytes 9 MOV 21 0064 DM 1002 MOV 21 0009 DM 1003 MOV 21 2801 DM 1004 MOV 21 020E DM 1005 o een Place the command data for EXPLICIT MESSAGE 0001 SEND into DM 1004 to DM 1008 DM 1006 MOV 21 0001 DM 1007 MOV 21 0100 DM 1008 148 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 5 Message Communications Enabled Flag ON after re sponse received for mes sages communications 00002 10112 executed a previous cycle I CMP 20 0000 DM 0006 Equals Flag Exec
37. DRT1 DA02 DIN track or screws 1to5V 0to5V 0to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA input switchable Resolution 1 6 000 1to5V 0to5V 0to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA input switchable Resolution 1 30 000 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA output switchable Resolution 1 6 000 C200H I O Link Unit Special 1 O Units 512 inputs max 32 words 512 outputs max 32 words C200HW DRT21 Assembled with C200HX HG H E Up to 16 Units mountable to C200HX HG HE RS 232C Unit 16 inputs 1 word DRT1 232C2 DIN track or screws Two RS 232C ports Explicit messages used for settings and control RS 232C port status reflected in inputs Note For details on Slaves refer to the CompoBus DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D Section 1 1 MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Units Words allocated in PC memory Communications Unit 1 0 points Input Status two words Output 0 words 1 0 con nections None Basic I O Units Input Units Transistor 1 word 0 words M3 terminal block 1 word 0 words Connector made by MOLEX 1 word 0 words Connector made by FUJITSU 1 word 0 words Connector D sub 25 pin 2 words 0 words High densi ty connec tor made by FUJIT SU Output U
38. DeviceNet CompoBus D CVM1 DRM21 V1 C200HW DRM21 V1 DeviceNet CompoBus D Operation Manual Revised October 2000 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Z N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Z N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any thing else Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the man
39. Error History Section 15 2 25315 BSET 71 Sets 0000 in DM 0000 to DM 2999 be 0000 Flag Sets the contents of IR 000 to 0001 25315 wl Place data into control data words to specify reading First 20 records from the error history from the Master Unit Scan 05FE at node 05 of network 01 Flag MOV 21 MOV 21 MOV 21 Place the command data for ERROR HISTORY READ into DM 1004 to DM 1006 25315 MOV 21 is 8 iS First 8207 Scan Flag MOV 21 DM 0000 DM 1011 MOV 21 0064 DM 1012 MOV 21 0002 DM 1013 MOV 21 2103 DM 1014 Place data into control data words to specify clearing the error history from the Master Unit at node 05 of network 01 Places the command data for ERROR HISTORY CLEAR into DM 1013 and DM 1014 259 Error History Section 15 2 25315 First Scan 00002 m 260 Flag 10112 Message Commu nications Enabled Flag ON if re sponse received previous cycle Equals Flag 25506 Equals Flag Equals Flag Equals Flag DM 2001 DM 0006 DM 2004 Place 2005 0100 and 0199 into DM 0097 DM 0098 and DM 0099 to use DM 2005 DM 0100 and DM 0199 as the initial addresses for indirectly addressing storing the response code the first error history data word and the last error history data word respectively Transfer the contents of DM 0097 and DM 0098 to DM 0095 and DM 0096 Compares th
40. Flashing red Setup error Slave not supported Section 15 1 Probable cause and remedy The number of I O points Slave has exceeded 64 bytes The Master Unit will attempt to reconnect to the Slaves with the error Bits 04 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Correct the Slave node address Flashing red Verification error Slave doesn t exist A Slave registered in the scan list doesn t exist in the network The Master Unit will attempt to reconnect to the Slaves with the error Bits 07 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Check the Master Slave baud rates for loose or broken cables for noise cable lengths and Terminating Resistors Flashing red Verification error Slave I O size differs The I O size of a Slave registered in the scan list doesn t match the actual Slave in the network The Master Unit will attempt to reconnect to the Slaves with the error Bits 07 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Check the Slave and create the scan list again d9 Snn Flashing red Communications error Remote I O communications timeout A response from a Slave timed out 6 times or a fragmentation occurred 3 time The Master Unit will attempt to reconnect to the Slaves with the error Bits 07 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Check the Master Slave baud rates for loose or broken cables for noise cable lengths and Terminating Resistors Send error
41. Twin Tin Tat in 2 X Tpco Trt out Tout 1 Refer to the CompoBus D DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 for details on the Input and Output Slaves delay times 2 Refer to Refresh Time on page 225 and to the PC s Operation Manual for details on the PC s cycle time Remote I O Communications Characteristics Section 14 1 Maximum I O Response Time The maximum I O response time occurs with the I O timing shown in the follow ing diagram Cycle time P Program Program Program Program execution execution execution execution Peripheral Peripheral servicing servicing Master Unit processing Input Output TIN TrM Tpco Terco Terco TRM Tout Tin The Input Slave s ON OFF delay Tout The Output Slave s ON OFF delay Tru Master Unit s communications cycle time See page 224 Tpco The PC s cycle time program execution peripheral servicing The maximum I O response time Tmax is the total of the following terms Tmax Tin 2 x Tam 3 x Tpco Tout Note 1 Refer to the CompoBus D DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 for details on the Input and Output Slaves delay times 2 Refer to Refresh Time on page 225 and to the PC s Operation Manual for details on the PC s peripheral servicing cycle time 229 Remote I O Communications Characteristics Section 14 1 CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs 230 Note The following timecha
42. ble for spreading DeviceNet The size in bytes of the data sent through a connection A logical communications channel created to communicate between two nodes Connections are established and maintained between masters and slaves A description of the structure and behavior of a device giving the minimum data configurations and operations that the device must support Device profiles en able common device models and are also called device models Device profiles are being studied for sensors valves displays encoders and other devices A node that controls the collection and distribution of data With the DeviceNet the predefined master slave connection set defines the functions provided by all masters A node that provides data in response to requests from masters With the Devi ceNet the predefined master slave connection set defines the functions pro vided by all slaves 299 Numbers 7 segment display meaning 241 A access right acquiring 183 184 releasing 185 allocations I O 95 Analog Input Units troubleshooting 270 AR area reading 202 204 writing 203 Auxiliary Area reading 160 162 164 165 204 205 writing 161 162 B C bits controlling 197 198 C200H T O Link Unit troubleshooting 271 cables specifications 46 checklists operation 82 CIO Area reading 162 164 165 204 205 cleaning 273 Clear Communications Error Stoppage Bit 217 Clear Scan List Bit 216 clock rea
43. s instruction execution cycle time Tpc2 The PC s peripheral servicing cycle time The maximum I O response time Tmax is the total of the following terms Tmax Tin 2 Tam Tpc1 2 x Tpc2 Tout Note 1 Refer to the CompoBus D DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 for details on the Input and Output Slaves delay times 2 Refer to Refresh Time on page 225 and to the PC s Operation Manual for details on the PC s peripheral servicing cycle time 227 Remote I O Communications Characteristics Section 14 1 CVM1 and CV series PCs Synchronous Mode 228 Master Unit processing Note The following timecharts show the minimum and maximum I O response times of the DeviceNet network for a CVM1 or CV series PC operating in synchronous mode Minimum I O Response Time The minimum I O response time occurs with the I O timing shown in the following diagram _ Cycle time s ep aee py Program Program Program execution execution execution Peripheral Peripheral servicing servicing Meee TIN Trrin Tpco Teco Trr our Tour TIN The Input Slave s ON OFF delay Tout The Output Slave s ON OFF delay Trt in Input Slave s communications time Slave See page 224 Trt out Output Slave s communications time Slave See page 224 Tpco The PC s cycle time program execution peripheral servicing The minimum I O response time Tmin is the total of the following terms
44. 0 0 00 eee eee 49 5 1 4 Tbranch Taps ss 33 st eke sas eke sete aid ales etal sabe nate es 49 5 1 5 Power Supply Tap ips resesi men eg eo ag eben ta poet a kiei hg o 52 5 1 6 Terminating Resistors 0 0 cece 52 5 1 7 Communications Power Supply 0 0 0 eee 53 45 Cables and Connectors Section 5 1 5 1 Cables and Connectors 5 1 1 Communications Cables In the DeviceNet CompoBus D system special 5 wire cable that conforms to DeviceNet specifications must be used Cable properties affect DeviceNet com munications and non specified cable cannot be used There are two kinds of special cable Thick cable and thin cable Select the cable using following the instructions in Section 2 Application Overview and Section 3 Network Configuration and Specifications Contact the following offices for sales and marketing inquiries Sales Office for U S Markets SHOWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC 235 Montgomery Street Suite 1142 San Francisco CA 94104 Tel No 1 415 781 5885 Fax No 1 415 781 1561 Sales Office for Asian Markets SWCC SHOWA S PTE LTD 65 Chulia Street 25 05 OCBC Centre Singapore 049513 Tel No 65 5380525 Fax No 65 5380565 Liaison Office for European Markets SHOWA ELECTRIC WIRE amp CABLE CO LTD Dusseldorf Office Am Wehrhahn 33 Wehrhahn Center 40211 Dusseldorf F R Germany Tel No 49 211 350493 Fax No 49 211 356651 Thick cable Thin cable 11 2 mm to 12 1 mm 6 9 mm outside diam
45. 0 0 0 L 1 Momentary power interruption L 1 CPU Bus Unit setting error 1 t 1 Battery error i N EE ee 1 SYSMAC BUS error E E Seen SEE 1 SYSMAC BUS 2 error E E 1 CPU Bus Unit error Ese its A gs pe So D SA n gto E 1 I O verification error ey Sc aera Si epee ere ns Bnd Aver A ENEAN 1 CPU bus error UA eS A Eee Be os SA ANS Bathe Sk Se aie Oe 1 Non fatal SFC error 0 EDE Sue Sytem ea Rae Set E Ee Sy Es Spade 1 JMP error fis Seneca DOS ees oe Ego ghee Late ee She eke 1g seas ee ol we 1 FAL error 176 CYCLE TIME READ Section 10 24 Message yes no response If MSG 195 has been executed the bit corre sponding to the message number will be ON 1 as shown below To read the messages generated by MSG 195 execute the MESSAGE READ command refer to 10 27 MESSAGE READ First byte Second byte Bt 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ol fo E A Set to 0 t Message no 0 0 no 1 Yes i i L Message no 1 0 no 1 Yes S A RO Bee zed Message no 2 0 no 1 Yes i i bo 2 22 27 Message no 3 0 no 1 yes eter eta eee eB eS Message no 4 0 no 1 yes bb ee ee ee ee ee eee Message no 5 0 no 1 yes Pra TE O E est EN iii ats Message no 6 0 no 1 yes acana ae ese Snel aah eyet ss ore ee Message no 7 0 no 1 yes FAL FALS no response The highest priority FAL or FALS
46. 04 03 RESET 208 05 01 CONTROLLER DATA READ 208 08 01 LOOP BACK TEST 209 21 02 ERROR LOG READ 209 03 ERROR LOG CLEAR 210 12 2 RESET Resets the DeviceNet Master Unit 1 2 3 1 No response will be returned for this command 2 Communications errors may occur for Slaves or timeouts may occur for re mote nodes with which message communications are in progress when the Master Unit is reset but normal communications will be possible again as soon as the Master Unit restarts Command Block 04 03 Command code 12 3 CONTROLLER DATA READ Reads the model and version of the DeviceNet Master Unit Command Block o5 01 Command code Response Block 05 01 20 bytes 20 bytes Command Response Model Version code code Parameters Model and Version response Both are read in ASCII 20 bytes i e 20 ASCII characters max each If the model or version information does not require 20 bytes the remainder of the 20 bytes will be filled with spaces ASCII 20 The Master Unit version will be 0200 for all PCs The following model data will be returned 208 ECHOBACK TEST Section 12 4 CVM1 and C series PCs CVM1 DRM21 V1 CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs C200HW DRM21 V1 12 4 ECHOBACK TEST Executes an echo test between the local node and a destination node Note 1 The destination node is designated in the control data of the CMND 194
47. 2 3 24 Write the master parameters 25 Turn off the power supply to the PC i e the Master Unit and the Slaves 26 Repeat the above steps beginning at step 6 for all Master Units 27 Turn on the power supply to all Masters and Slaves 28 Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled Commu nications will not start if they have been set to be stopped at startup from the Configurator Use the software switches or Configurator to start and stop remote I O communications 29 Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit 30 Read the network configuration from the Configurator 31 Save the network configuration in a file from the Configurator 32 Switch the PC to RUN mode When there are no available node addresses for the Configurator as is the case when a total of 64 Master Units and Slave Units are used set up communica tions based on user set allocations according to the following procedure 1 Turn ON the communications power supply 2 Turn ON the power supply to all the Slaves Turn OFF the power supply to all the Masters 3 Connect the Configurator to the network using the node address of one of the Masters 4 Create the Master parameters for each Master Unit and save the parame ters in files Disconnect the Configurator from the network i e go off line Turn OFF the power supply to all the Slaves Turn ON the power supply to all th
48. 230 I O size mismatch CVM1 and CV series PCs 97 T O Units connecting cable 9 Incorrect Switch Setting Non volatile Memory Error 218 indicators errors Master Unit 242 Index Slave Unit 247 Master Units CS 1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 40 CVM and CV series PCs 36 meaning 240 inspection 273 installation network ground wires connection 77 nodes connection 76 T branch Taps connection 75 Terminators connection 76 instruction sets CMND 194 127 RECV 193 126 SEND 192 125 IOWR instruction 137 IR area reading 202 204 M maintenance 273 Master status area 218 221 Master Unit 217 status flags 217 Master Units components CS 1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 40 CVM and CV series PCs 36 dimensions CS1 series and C2Q00HX HG HE HS PCs 44 CVM and CV series PCs 39 DIP switch CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 42 CVM1 and CV series PCs 37 indicators CS 1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 40 CVM and CV series PCs 36 mounting 70 rotary switch CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 41 CVM and CV series PCs 37 specifications CS 1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 40 CVM and CV series PCs 35 troubleshooting 265 memory areas comparing transferring 194 designating addresses 156 200 reading 160 162 164 165 202 204 205 reading contents 160 reading contents of Memory Area words 204 transferring data 164 writing 161 162 203 Memory Cards formatt
49. 7 6 Connecting Communications Cables to Nodes 0 0 00 0c eee ee eee eee 76 7 7 Grounding the Network 0 0 cece eee eee eens 77 758 Noise Precautions 03h ket ete he een eek he aon E 79 7 9 Faulty Operations ss ssi ikl sae she ee RG ba i SA we haa ede 80 7 10 Sharing the Same Power Supply 00 0 c eee eee eee eee eee 81 7 11 Operations Checklist sa05 sig eee eae ewe Re FE aoe ek eR eee we 82 SECTION 8 Remote I O Communications 0 2008 85 Sel OVERVIEW a5 esters ei neh nde RE EAE EE E E aati ea tera SEARES 86 8 2 SCAM EISS aces Aisa ek hee A ae Ae AE WN dBA ARN SG Red SOL AAS BG Ac Se 92 8 3 Default Remote I O Allocation 0 0 cece eee eeee 95 8 4 User set Allocations cssa c4 eu envetna eee Sars Gee n Pekar shes Fete sok ted ates 105 SECTION 9 Message Communications e0eeeeeeeeeeee H5 921 OVELVIEW 06 cack a eg oes Ga SOs Beek 6 HOG ey oe Sew eed 116 9 2 FINS Commands Responses 00 0 0 eee eee teenies 120 9 3 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs 00000 124 9 4 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs 134 9 5 Sending Explicit Messages 0 0 eee eee eee eee eee 143 SECTION 10 FINS Commands to CVM1 and CV series CPU Units 153 10 1 Command List 03534 hailed ee RT eat eel eae 155 10 2 Memory Area Designations 0 0 0b eee eens 156 10 3 Volume Labels and File
50. C200HS PC C200HX PC and restart the PC Internal non volatile memory data error 1 Set the Read Write Area settings using bit 00 of the software switches 2 Restart the Unit 3 Ifthe error is not cleared replace the Unit Duplicate node address error Reset the node address to a number that is not used by another Unit and restart the Unit Bus Off error 1 Check that the DeviceNet communications cables are wired connected and that noise preventative measures have been taken 2 Restart the Unit Master Unit baud rate setting error Make sure that the baud rate settings match and restart the Unit 269 Troubleshooting Display Probable cause Front rear panel DIP switch setting error e Pin 4 of front panel DIP switch is ON e Pins 1 and 2 of front panel DIP switch are ON e Pin 7 or 8 on rear panel DIP switch is ON Section 15 3 Possible remedy e Make sure pin 4 on the front panel and pins 7 and 8 on the rear panel are turned OFF e Turn ON or OFF pins 1 and 2 according to the correct baud rate setting CPU Unit interface error from noise Remove cause of noise and restart the Unit If the error is not cleared replace the C200H I O Link Unit or the CPU Unit Hardware error Identifying Errors from Symptoms Symptom The power is ON but the Slave Unit s indicators are all OFF interference Probable Cause CPU Unit error caused by noise 1 Resta
51. CS1 Series Section 4 3 Function Setting Baud rate See the next table OFF ON Continue stop remote I O Continue communications communications for communication errors Reserved Stop communications Leave this pin set to OFF Baud rate 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps Not allowed This setting causes an incorrect switch setting error Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes Master and Slaves in the Network Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master s rate won t be able to par ticipate in communications Pin 3 is used to set the whether or not communications will stop after a commu nications error Pins ooo yS OFF Continue communications ON Stop communications If pin 3 is ON communications will be stopped if a transfer error transmission timeout or Network power supply error occurs Communications will remain stopped even if the error is cleared until the Clear Communications Error Stop page Bit is turned ON Refer to page 214 for details If pin 3 is OFF communications will stop if a transmission timeout or Network power supply error occurs but will restart automatically when the cause of the error is cleared Always turn OFF the PC before changing the DIP switch settings If a Configurator is not used to change the I O allocations the data area allo cated to DeviceNet Master Units in C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs will be the sam
52. CS1 Series 50 nodes 63 nodes C200HZ HX HG HE C200HS 32 nodes 63 nodes Max No of CVM1 CV Series 2 048 pts 6 400 pts control points per 64 input 64 100 words x Master output words 4 blocks C200HZ HX HG HE 1 600 pts Without messages 50 input 50 4 800 pts output words With messages 1 600 pts C200HS 1 024 pts 1 280 pts 32 input 32 output words Max No of I O CVM1 CV Series 32 input 32 output words points per Slave CS1 Series Su ha by C200HZ HX HG HE C200HS Remote I O CVM1 CV Series Fixed words in IR Any area allocation areas CS1 Series Area or CIO area C200HZ HX HG HE_ for CS1 series P C200HS oe 10 Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D Section 1 1 Message Communications RS 232C Interface Unit Available soon Communications Instructions Master Unit model FINS commands CMND 194 IOWR Receive CVM1 CV Series CS1 Series C200HZ HX HG HE C200HS SEND 192 None RECV 193 None Master Unit model CVM1 CV Series Capacity Max No of nodes per Master 8 nodes Unit for message communications using FINS commands CS1 Series C200HZ HX HG HE 8 nodes C200HS Not supported Max No of nodes per Master Unit for message communications using explicit messages CVM1 CV Series 63 nodes CS1 Series C200HZ HX HG HE 63 nodes C200HS Not supported Max
53. CVM1 CV series PC Command to Master Unit Command CS1 series C200HX HG HE or CVM1 CV series PC Command to CPU Unit Command prt TORR J OND PC to OMRON Slave CS1 series C200HX HG HE or CVM1 CV series PC Data CVM1 158 bytes max SEND 192 76 words 158 bytes max length CV Series RECV 193 78 words excluding c51 Not supported 158 bytes max command Series code C200HX HG HE Note 1 The DeviceNet Master Unit must be registered in the local network routing table of the CVM1 or CV series PC to execute SEND 192 RECV 193 or CMND 194 instructions from a CVM1 or CV series PC The commands will not be sent and cannot be received from other CVM1 or CV series PCs if the Master Unit is not registered in the routing tables Commands can be re ceived from C200HX HG HE PCs without the routing table 2 The FINS command code can be set to 28 01 to send explicit DeviceNet messages to DeviceNet nodes for OMRON Special Slaves or devices by other manufacturers 115 Overview Section 9 1 9 1 1 Message Communications Specifications Master Unit model number CVM1 and CV Series CVM1 DRM21 V1 CS1 Series C200HZ HX HG HE C200HW DRM21 V1 C200HS Max No FINS of commu messages nications 8 8 Not supported nodes per Master Unit Explicit messages 63 63 63 Data send receive Commu nicatio
54. For details on the Input Unit input delay time and the Output Unit output delay time see information on the I O Units in DeviceNet CompoBus D MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Operation Manual W348 for details on the De viceNet I O response times see the explanation of the remote I O commu nications performance 2 Refer to the PC s Operation Manual for details on the PC s cycle time Maximum I O Response Time The maximum I O response time occurs with the I O timing shown in the follow ing diagram Peripheral servic Instruction execu Peripheral serv PC ing cycle time i tion cycle time __ icing cycle time _ DeviceNet Master Unit TRT_N DeviceNet I O response time DRT1 COM j t Communications Unit Input Unit TIN Input Unit ON OFF delay time Tour Output Unit ON OFF delay time Tcycig I O Unit interface cycle time Trrtif I O Unit interface communications time 1 5 ms Tru The communications cycle time for the total Network See page 224 The maximum I O response time Tmax is the total of the following terms Tmax TIN TRT IF X 2 DeviceNet 1 O response time TRT IFX 2 TouT Note For details on the Input Unit input delay time the Output Unit output delay time and the I O Unit interface cycle time see information on the I O Units and on communications timing in DeviceNet CompoBus D MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Operation Manual W348 For details on the DeviceNet I O respons
55. Observe the following points when writing application programs e The simultaneity of node units of data is ensured between the PC and Master Unit e In OMRON Slaves the simultaneity of word units of data is ensured e If another company s Slave is being used refer to that Slave s user s manual for details At startup OFF outputs are output from the When the Master is operating with the scan list disabled and the PC is Slaves set to maintain the status of I O area bits those held output points will be output from the Output Slaves at startup Be sure to perform the Create Scan List operation and operate the Master with the scan list enabled Refer to the PC s Operation Manual for details on the IOM Hold Bit CS1 Series CVM1 and CV Series or I O Status Hold Bit C200H Communications Error Use the following table to correct problems with the Continue Stop Commu Setting Problems nications for Error DIP switch setting Error Probable cause Communications are stopped even though When the DIP switch s Continue Stop Communications for Error pin there is no communications error is ON communications will be stopped if a communications error transmission timeout or network power supply error occurs While communications are stopped the 7 segment displays will alternately display error code AO and the error code of the communications error that caused the stoppage After a network power
56. PC cycle Instruction instruction execution cycle execution PC cycle peripheral servicing cycle Peripheral servicing cycle time Master Unit processing Output n Tin TRT IN TPc2 Trr out Tout TIN The Input Slave s ON OFF delay Tour The Output Slave s ON OFF delay Trin Input Slave s communications time Slave See page 224 Trt out Output Slave s communications time Slave See page 224 Tpc2 The PC s peripheral servicing cycle time The minimum I O response time Tmin is the total of the following terms Twin Tin Trt in Tpc2 Tout Trt out 1 Refer to the CompoBus D DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 for details on the Input and Output Slaves delay times 2 Refer to Refresh Time on page 225 and to the PC s Operation Manual for details on the PC s peripheral servicing cycle time Remote I O Communications Characteristics Section 14 1 Maximum I O Response Time The maximum I O response time occurs with the I O timing shown in the follow ing diagram Instruction execution cycle time PC cycle Instruction instruction execution cycle execution PC cycle peripheral servicing cycle Peripheral servicing cycle time Master Unit processing Output TIN TRM TPc2 TPc1 TPc2 TRM Tout TIN The Input Slave s ON OFF delay Tout The Output Slave s ON OFF delay Tru Master Unit s communications cycle time See page 224 Tpci The PC
57. The I O table can be cleared only when the PC is in Command Block Response Block Parameters Note PROGRAM mode Always clear the entire range of the specified parameter area 1 The PARAMETER AREA CLEAR command can be executed regardless of the PC s mode It is the user s responsibility to program steps to prohibit this command from being executed when the PC is in the RUN mode if such protection is necessary Execute the CONTROLLER STATUS READ com mand refer to 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ to read the PC s mode 2 If any other device holds the access right nothing can be written to the spe cified parameter area 3 If memory is write protected via the key switch on the front panel of the PC nothing can be written to the specified parameter area 02 03 00 00 00 00 Command Parameter Beginning No of code area code word words 02 03 Command Response code code Parameter area code command The parameter area to clear Beginning word command Fixed at 0000 Data No of words command The number of words to clear see diagram below Data command Set to 0000 The number of word addresses where the data 0000 should be written is specified by the number of words in the command block Parameters Areas The available parameter areas and the number of words in each are as shown 167 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT Section 10 14
58. The actual destination of the explicit message is given in the com mand data as described above 3 If the DeviceNet Master Unit receives an explicit message it will automati cally return a response 4 Refer to the DeviceNet Specification for details on parameters for explicit messages 5 Contact the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA at 8222 Wiles Road Suite 287 Coral Springs FL 33067 USA phone 954 340 5412 fax 954 340 5413 email billmoss ix netcom com Home Page http Awww odva org to obtain copies of the specification 6 For details on explicit messages to OMRON Special I O Slaves refer to the CompoBus D DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 Section 9 5 Sending Explicit Messages 9 5 2 Programming Examples Example 1 Sending an Explicit Message Using CMND 194 Explicit message toi Unit unit No 0 a a CPU ro Unit ie address 05 Unit address FE or 10 hex va as Slave node 06 Operation The vendor code is read from a slave OMRON vendor code 002F hex using the EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command 28 01 The command data is written starting at DM01000 and the response data is stored starting at D02000 When execution of CMND 194 has been completed the completion code is stored in D00006 and the instruction is executed again Command Details The following command is used CMND 194 S D C S D01000 First command word at local node Settings hex
59. The following data can be written refer to 10 2 Memory Area Designations for memory area designations Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes ClO TR CPU Bus Word contents 80 2 Link and Auxiliary Timer Counter PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 Expansion DM Word contents specified bank 90 to 97 2 banks 0 to 7 Current bank 98 2 Note Refer to 10 2 2 Data Configurations for the various data configurations 10 7 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ Reads the contents of the specified number of non consecutive memory area words starting from the specified word Note lf there is an error in the command code or a read address no data will be read 160 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ Section 10 7 Command Block Response Block Parameters 01 04 Command code Memory area code Read address Ni a Read address Memory area code 39 items max 01 04 Command Response Data Data code code Memory area code Memory area code Memory area code command The data area to read Read address command The first word bit flag to read Data response The data in the specified memory area s will be returned in sequence starting from the read address Memory Areas The following data can be written refer to 10 2 Memory Area Designations for memory area designations
60. This flag will be ON 1 when the Master Unit is operating with the scan list dis abled and OFF when operating with the scan list enabled The dots in the Master Unit s 7 segment display will be lit when the scan list is disabled Error Communications Stopped Flag Bit 14 This flag is turned ON 1 when any of the bits 00 to 06 in Master Status Area 1 are ON It can be used as an execution condition for processing errors This flag will remain ON if communications were stopped due to a communica tions error network power supply error or transmission timeout error but re mained stopped even though the cause of the error has been cleared Remote I O Communications Flag Bit 15 This flag is turned ON 1 when remote I O communications are being executed Status Area Section 13 3 It can be used as an execution condition for processing errors Refer to 14 1 4 System Startup Time for details 13 3 2 Master Status Area 2 The following diagram shows the structure of Master Status Area 2 CVM1 and CV series PCs CIO 1510 25 x unit No CS1 series PCs D06032 2 x unit No C200HX HG HE HS PCs DM 6032 2 x unit No Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Not used Configurator Scan List Flag Error History Flag Error History Flag Bit 00 This flag is turned ON 1 when there is an error history recorded in the Master Uni
61. allocated When user set allocations are used the remote I O areas consist of input blocks 1 and 2 which input Slave data to the PC and output blocks 1 and 2 which out put data from the PC to the Slaves These four blocks can be allocated as de sired using the following words Each block however must consist of continu ous words within one data area CVM1 CV series PCs CV500 CVM1 CPU01 E CIO 0000 to ClO 2427 All other models CIO 0000 to CIO 2555 CS1 series PCs CIO 0000 to ClO 0235 CIO 0300 to CIO 0511 C200HX HG HE PCs C200HE CPU11 E All other models IR 000 to IR 235 IR 300 to IR 511 C200HS PCs all models G008 to 255 H000 to HR099 CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 See note HR 00 to HR 99 LR 00 to LR 63 D00000 to D08191 D00000 to D24575 D00000 to D05999 DM 0000 to DM 4095 DM 0000 to DM 5999 DM 0000 to DM 5999 104 Each block can be up to 100 words including unused areas Each block can be up to 100 words including unused areas The total number of words in all four blocks must be 300 words or less including unused areas If message communications are used the total number of words in all four blocks must be 100 words or less The total number of words in all four blocks must be 80 words or less including unused areas Note If words in the range LR 00 to LR 63 are allocated with the Configu
62. e Make sure that the Unit is connected properly e Check the I O table with the I O Table Verification operation and correct it if necessary After correcting it perform the I O Table Create operation A CPU Bus Unit setting error occurred e Make sure that the Master s unit number setting is correct The acceptable unit number range is 00 to 15 e Check the I O table with the I O Table Verification operation and correct it if necessary After correcting it perform the I O Table Create operation A CPU Bus Unit error occurred e Make sure that the Unit is connected properly e Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart A CPU Bus error occurred PC Error C200HW DRM21 V1 e Make sure that the Unit is connected properly Use the following table to troubleshoot errors in a PC that has a C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Unit installed Refer to the CS1 Series Operation Manual C200HX C200HG and C200HE Operation Manual or C200HS Operation Manual for more details Error Probable cause An I O verification error occurred e Check the I O table with the I O Table Verification operation and correct it if necessary After correcting it perform the I O Table Create operation An I O set error occurred e Check the I O table with the I O Table Verification operation and correct it if necessary After correcting it perform the I O Table Create operation An I O unit over error occurred e Mak
63. ms Sout2 The number of Mixed I O Slave output words Sno The number of Mixed I O Slave input words Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 Slaves with More Than 8 Bytes of Input or Output Trt Tou Teyte in X Bin Teyte out X Bout ms Tou Protocol overhead TeByYTE IN The input byte transmission time Bin The number of input words Tpyte ouT The output byte transmission time Bout The number of output words Baud rate 0 306 ms TBYTE IN 0 040 ms TBYTE OUT 0 036 ms 0 542 ms 0 073 ms 0 069 ms 1 014 ms 0 139 ms 0 135 ms For Input Slaves take Boyt to be 0 and for Output Slaves take B y to be 0 The refresh time is the time required for I O data to be exchanged between the PC s CPU and the DeviceNet Master Unit The PC s cycle time is increased when a Master Unit is mounted as shown below Refer to the PC s Operation Manual for more details on the refresh time and the PC s cycle time Master Unit for CVM1 and CV series PCs CVM1 DRM21 The PC s cycle time is increased by 1 1 ms This is the extra time required for CPU Bus Unit servicing DeviceNet Master Unit refreshing Master Unit for CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs C200HW DRM21 The PC s cycle time is increased by the amount shown below The extra time is required for I O refreshing DeviceNet Unit I O refreshing time ms CS1 Series
64. transmission timeout or Network power supply error occurs Remote I O com munications will remain stopped even if the error is cleared until the Clear Com munications Error Stoppage Bit is turned ON Message communications will continue Refer to page 214 for details If pin 3 is OFF remote I O communications will stop if a transmission timeout or Network power supply error occurs but will restart automatically when the cause of the error is cleared 1 Always turn OFF the PC before changing the DIP switch settings 2 The 7 segment display will show AO when remote I O communications stop The CVM1 C V series DeviceNet Master Units are classified as CPU Bus Units When using a CVM1 BC053 BC103 Backplane be sure to mount the Unit ina slot that can be used for CPU Bus Units CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 4 2 Note CVM1 C V series DeviceNet Master Units can be used at the same time as SYS MAC BUS and SYSMAC BUS 2 Master Units without using a Configurator Dimensions The following diagram shows the dimensions of the CVM1 CV series Master Unit Refer to the CV series PCs Installation Guide for the dimensions of the Unit when it is mounted to the Backplane All dimensions are in mm 39 CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs Section 4 3 4 3 CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs specications Master Unit model number C200HW DRM21 V1 Communications power 11
65. white Red black Blue white Red black Impedance 120 Q 10 120 Q 10 Propagation delay 1 36 ns ft 1 36 ns ft Attenuation factor 500 kHz 0 25 dB ft 125 kHz 0 13 dB ft 500 kHz 0 50 dB ft 125 kHz 0 29 dB ft Conductor resistance 6 9 Q 1 000 ft 22 6 Q 1 000 m 3 6 Q 1 000 ft 11 8 Q 1 000 m 28 Q 1 000 ft 91 9 1 000 m 17 5 Q 1 000 ft 57 4 Q 1 000 m Maximum current 8A 3A Finished outer diameter 11 2 to 12 1 mm 6 9 mm 47 Cables and Connectors Section 5 1 5 1 2 Connectors When connecting cables to the Unit or a T branch Tap use a removable connec tor OMRON cables are provided with connectors Depending on the connector it may or may not be equipped with connector set screws Also there is a multi drop wiring connector on the market that facilitates multi drop wiring The multi drop wiring connector cannot be used with Master Units CVM1 DRM21 V1 and C200HW DRM21 V1 the CQM1 I O Link Unit CQM1 DRT21 and T branch Taps because they may come into contact with the Unit in the adjacent slot Appearance Model Commenis Manufacturer COMBICON Plug MSTB For node connection no Phoenix Contact K K 2 5 5 ST 5 08 AU connector set screws COMBICON MSTBP For node connection and Phoenix Contact K K Plug with Screw Flange vo 2 5 5 STF 5 08 T branch Tap connection AB AU SO with connector set screws COMBICON Plug TMSTBP Used t
66. 0 8001 Forced status released and bit turned ON 1 FFFF Forced status released Memory area code command The memory area of the bit or flag to be con trolled Bit Flag command The bit or flag to be controlled Memory Areas The bits flags in the following memory areas can be forced set reset or re leased refer to 10 2 Memory Area Designations for memory area designa tions Memory area Data Memory area code CIO TR and CPU Bus _ Bits status 00 Link see note Timer Counter Completion Flag status 01 Transition Flag status 03 Note FORCED SET RESET cannot be used for the Auxiliary Area 10 49 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL Cancels all bits flags that have been forced ON or forced OFF Command Block 23 02 Command code Response Block 23 02 Command Response code code Note The bits flags in the following memory areas can be forced set or forced reset and cancelled Memory area Data Memory code CIO TR CPU Bus Link Bits status 00 and Auxiliary Timer Counter Completion Flag status 01 Transition Flag status 03 196 This section provides information on the FINS commands that can be addressed to the CPU Units of CS 1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs 11 1 Command List SECTION 11 FINS Commands to CS1 series and C200HX HG HE CPU Units 11 2 Memory Area Designations 0
67. 04 and 14 turn ON Stop Stop Stop d5 lt Master node address d6 lt gt Master node address Bits 07 and 14 turn ON Stop Stop d9 lt gt Master node address Bits 06 and 14 turn ON Continue Send error Network power error Send time out No change Not lit EO lt gt Master node address E2 lt Master node address Bits 05 and 14 turn ON Continue Continue Configuration error PC error Configuration data error Flashing red No change E4 lt Master node address E8 lt gt Master node address Bits 03 and 14 turn ON Stop Stop Node address duplication Bus off detected No change Lit red FO lt gt Master node address F1 lt Master node address Bits 01 and 14 turn ON Stop Stop 91 Scan Lists Illegal switch setting MS NS indicators Flashing red Not lit Initialization error with PC PC interface error 7 segment display F3 lt Master node address Master status area 1 Bits 00 and 14 turn ON Section 8 2 Communica tions during error F5 Master node address F6 lt Master node address Memory error EEPROM error Lit red Not lit RAM error F8 Master node address Bits 00 and 14 turn ON F9 lt Master node address AO Master node address Remot
68. 0c eee ect beeen teens 11 2 1 Word Bit Addresses 3 5 5 2 se qed beg ee dg bb hei e e eee dee Grete ees 11 2 2 Data Configuration sss csn ia soe sed costa ga ena soled eee ad a ola det hd 11 3 MEMORY AREA READ anae cae a E eh bo Nees tM beta ee tN eae ea ed eee 11 4 MEMORY AREA WRITE 0 0 00 cen ee ene 11 5 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ 0 000000 Ee N eee ee 11 6 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ 0 00 00 eee eee eee 11 7 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ 0 00 00 eee ee eens 11 8 CONTROLLER DATA READ 0 000 c eee ene 11 9 CONTROLLER STATUS READ oeaan cenone sha es e pA E EE a 11 10 CLOCK READ 200 200 201 202 202 203 204 204 205 206 206 207 197 Command List Section 11 1 11 1 Command List The beginning portions of the command and response block up to the command codes and the FCS and terminator have been omitted for simplicity but must be added for actual transmission if not automatically generated for the transmission method being used In the illustrations of command and response blocks in this section each box represents one byte i e two hexadecimal or BCD digits Be careful when ad ding the header where each box represents one digit i e four bits The following table lists the FINS commands supported by C200HX HG HE CPU Units and the PC operating modes during which they are enabled Command Name PC mode Page code R
69. 1 15 1 2 Seven Segment Display Dot Indicators Seven segment Display In addition to the MS and NS indicators Master Units have a 2 digit 7 segment display that normally indicates the Master s node address When an error oc curs the display will alternate between the error code and the node address of the faulty Slave Normal Master Unit s node address ey Error Error code and faulty node address Scan list enabled disabled The dots at the lower right corner of each digit show whether the scan list is en abled or disabled for DeviceNet remote I O communications The dots are ON when the scan list is disabled and OFF when the scan list is enabled The 7 segment digits themselves show the Master s node address during nor mal operation but indicate the error code and faulty Slave node address when an error occurs The following table outlines the operation of the display Status Display Remote I O communications active and Master Unit s node Lit normal address 00 to 63 From power ON to Remote I O start of remote I O communications communications automatically started at startup Remote I O communications stopped at startup Flashing Flashing until end of node address duplication check At startup of remote I O communications Flashing until remote I O communications start Watchdog timer No lit Memory or system Error code only Lit error Other errors
70. 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used 4 Connect a Programming Device to the PC and turn on the power supply to the PC 5 Generate the I O table 6 Go to step 7 if only one Master Unit is being used and to step 14 if more than one Master Unit is being used in the same Network 7 Connect a Configurator to the network 8 Turn on the power supply to all nodes 9 Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode 10 Get the device list and create the master parameters with the Configurator 11 If more than one Master Unit is mounted to the same PC use the Configura tor to check for duplication in the master parameter settings 12 Register the master parameters in the Master Unit s 13 Go to step 28 14 Connect a Configurator to the network 15 Turn on the power supply to all the Slaves 16 Read the network configuration from the Configurator 17 Turn off the power supply to all the Slaves 18 Create the master parameters for each Master Unit and save the parame ters in files 19 Turn on the power supply to one PC i e to one of the Master Units 20 Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode 21 Read the network configuration from the Configurator 22 Read the master parameter file for the Master Unit that has been turned on from the master parameter editing screen 23 Use the Configurator to check for duplication in the master parameter set tings 108 Section 8 4 User set Allocations Note 1
71. 15 1 3 Identifying Errors from the Indicators e Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart The Master s MS and NS indicators are ON and green but the 7 segment display continues to flash the Master s node address The node address normally stops flashing within 8 s after the NS lights 264 e Check that the Master s baud rate matches the baud rates set on all of the Slaves If they don t match set all of the baud rates to the same val ue e Make sure that there are121 Q terminators connected at both ends of the trunk line Connect 121 Q terminators if the wrong resistance is be ing used e Check whether all of the Slaves settings are correct See 7 11 Operations Checklist for details e Check whether the communications cables are wired correctly See 7 11 Operations Checklist for details e Check whether the power supply is set correctly See 7 11 Operations Checklist for details e Check for broken wires in the communications and power supply cables attached to the connectors e Check whether the Slaves are operating properly When an OMRON Slave is being used refer to the troubleshooting tables in 15 3 2 Slave Unit Troubleshooting If another company s Slave is being used refer to that Slave s user s manual Troubleshooting Section 15 3 O Link Problems Use the following table to troubleshoot I O Link problems Error Probable cause The I O isn t simultaneous
72. 16 transistor outputs NPN OMRON GT1 OD16ML 1 Transistor Output Unit FUJITSU connector 16 transistor outputs PNP OMRON GT1 OD16DS available soon Transistor Output Unit D sub 25 pin connector 16 transistor outputs NPN OMRON GT1 OD16DS 1 Transistor Output Unit D sub 25 pin connector 16 transistor outputs PNP OMRON GT1 OD32ML Transistor Output Unit FUJITSU high density connector 32 transistor outputs NPN OMRON GT1 OD32ML 1 Transistor Output Unit FUJITSU high density connector 32 transistor outputs PNP OMRON GT1 ROP08 Relay Output Unit power relays 8 relay outputs allocated 1 word OMRON GT1 ROS16 Relay Output Unit miniature relays 16 relay outputs OMRON GT1 AD04 Analog Input Unit terminal block 4 inputs allocated 4 words OMRON GT1 ADO8MX Analog Input Unit MOLEX connector 8 inputs allocated 8 words or 4 inputs allocated 4 words Select using the DIP switch OMRON GT1 DA04 Analog Output Unit terminal block 4 outputs allocated 4 words GT1 DA04MX Analog Output Unit MOLEX connector 4 outputs allocated 4 words GT1 CT01 Counter Unit 1 encoder input A B Z 1 external input 2 external outputs allocated 3 words for input and 3 words for output 291 Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions Communications Cables Connectors DCA2 5C10 Speci
73. 2 3 List of Application Methods System Configurations Basic Operating Procedures Flowchart Hardware Preparations 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 Setting Up Communications 20 22 23 23 23 24 19 List of Application Methods 2 1 Customizing remote I O allocations Section List of Application Methods Method Allocate I O using the Configurator Easy customization of remote I O allocations Allocate I O using the Master parameter wizard in the Configurator Sending messages between PCs with Master Units Use communications instructions in the user program Using more than one Master Unit for the same PC Connect a Configurator to the Network and mount the Master Units to the PC Using more than one Master Unit in the same network Connect a Configurator to the network and connect the Master Units to the Network When setting the remote I O communications settings you must turn OFF the power supply to the Master Unit i e to the PC and to the device list with power supplied on to the Slaves Sending explicit DeviceNet messages Use FINS command code 28 01 Initial startup 20 Setting node addresses for Master Units Set the DIP switch on the back of the Master Unit Setting the baud rate for Master Units Set the DIP switch on the back of the Master Unit Stopping remote I O communications for communications errors Set the DIP switch o
74. 215 control bits 215 disabled mode 93 enabled mode 93 Scan List Disabled Mode Flag 220 Scan List Operation Completed Flag 220 Scan List Operation Error Flag 220 Slave Units troubleshooting 268 specifications cables 46 communications 16 connectable devices 45 connectors 48 DeviceNet Cable 46 Master Units CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 40 CVM and CV series PCs 35 T branch Taps 49 Terminators 52 status flags 217 allocation C200HX HG HE HS PCs 215 CS1 series PCs 214 CVM1 and CV series PCs 214 Communications Error Flag 219 Communications Stoppage Cleared Flag 220 Configuration Error Flag 219 Error Communications Stoppage Flag 220 T O Configuration Error Flag 219 T O Data Communications Flag 220 Master status area 218 221 304 Master Unit 217 network 217 Node Number Duplication Bus Off Error Detected 218 normal slave information area 222 registered slave information area 221 Scan List Disabled Mode Flag 220 Scan List Operation Completed Flag 220 Scan List Operation Error Flag 220 Transmission Error Flag 219 Verification Error Flag 219 SYSMAC NET Link Units reading controller data 210 resetting 210 system startup times 235 T V T branch Taps components 50 dimensions 51 installation connection 75 mounting 72 specifications 49 Temperature Input Terminals troubleshooting 271 Terminators dimensions 53 installation connection 76 mounting 72 sp
75. 25 0 5 2 85 A Total current consumption on right 0 25 0 25 0 85 1 35 A Maximum current for thick cable for 120 m see previous table approx 2 5 A using straight line approximation between 100 to 150 m Because the total current flow on the left side 2 85 A is greater than the maxi mum current on the left side 2 56 A the power supply cannot be placed at the center of the network and supply current to all nodes This problem can be corrected by moving the communications power supply as shown in the following diagram Trunk line Trunk line Terminating resistor 5 wire cable 5 wire cable 62 100 m 140 m eee Trunk line lt Power supply cable Total power supply length on left 100 m Total power supply length on right 140 m Total current consumption on left 1 1 1 25 2 35 A Total current consumption on right 0 5 0 25 0 25 0 85 1 85 A Maximum current for thick cable for 100 m see previous table 2 93 A Maximum current for thick cable for 140 m see previous table 2 1 A using straight line approximation between 100 to 150 m Because the total current flow on both the left and right sides is now less than the maximum current the power supply can be placed as shown in the diagram and supply current to all nodes Step 2 Calculating the Best Location of the Actual Nodes Section 6 5 6 5 Step 2 Calculating the Best Location of the Actual Nodes Go to Step 2 if
76. 3 218 Note The Error Remote I O Communications Stopped Flag bit 14 will turn ON when ever this flag turns ON Remote I O Communications Stopped Status Flag Bit 08 This flag is turned ON 1 when remote I O communications are stopped for an error It will be turned OFF 0 when remote I O communications are operating normally or when they have been stopped for an error which has already been cleared but the Communications Continue Stop for Communications setting has been set to stop communications This flag thus indicates the status of re mote I O communications in terms of the settings of the software switches and settings from the Configurator Scan List Operation Completed Flag Bit 09 This flag is turned ON 1 after the scan list is enabled or cleared it will be OFF 0 while these operations are being executed and will remain OFF if an error occurs during execution This flag is turned OFF when the Enable Scan List software switch or Clear Scan List software switch is turned OFF after execution of the corresponding opera tion Be sure this flag or the next flag is ON before turning OFF the Enable Scan List software switch or Clear Scan List software switch Scan List Operation Error Flag Bit 10 This flag is turned ON 1 when the create scan list or clear scan list operation couldn t be executed it will be OFF 0 while these operations are being executed and will remain OFF if the operation is executed normally
77. 381 8 3 2 I O Allocations and Errors Setup Error I O Area Overlap A setup error may occur when the scan list is disabled or a verification error may occur when the scan list is enabled if I O allocations are not correct A setup error I O Area Overlap will occur and it won t be possible to start Devi ceNet communications if the same word is used by more than one Slave con nected to a CVM1 CV series Master Unit This error will occur only when the scan list is disabled In the following example the Slave with node address 4 uses two input words but the Slave with node address 5 also uses an input word This creates an I O Area Overlap error Input area Node address Overlap 95 Default Remote I O Allocation Section 8 3 To eliminate the I O area overlap and clear this error change the node address setting on one of the Slaves as shown below and restart the Master by turning on the power again or restarting Setup Error I O Area This error will occur only for C200HX HG HE PCs Range Violation A setup error I O Area Range Violation will occur and it won t be possible to start DeviceNet communications if the allocations such as those shown in the following examples are used Setting Node Addresses Higher than 49 Going Beyond Area Boundaries i The following illegal allocations will occur if T
78. 8 to 15 first byte Data response The data in the specified parameter area will be returned in sequence starting from the beginning word The leftmost bits bits 8 to 15 of each word are read first followed by the rightmost bits bits O to 7 The required number of bytes in total for each read is calculated as follows No of words x 2 each word consists of two bytes Parameter Areas There are five parameter areas each of which has consecutive word addresses beginning from 0000 The following data can be read The word ranges in paren theses show the possible values for the beginning word Leoio o o l 80 00 PC Setup 0000 to 00FF 0000 to OFFF i L 8011 8001 Peripheral Device settings 0000 to 00BF 0000 to 06BF l 8012 VO table 0000 to 03FF 3 A l 8013 Routing tables 0000 to 01FF Unit No 0 8002 CPU Bus Unit 0000 to 083F settings Unit No 15 l Although the routing tables have a 512 word area 0000 to 01FF only a 48 word area 0000 to 002F of it can be read 10 12 PARAMETER AREA WRITE Note Writes data to the specified number of consecutive parameter area words start ing from the specified word All words in the specified parameter area must be written at the same time to ensure complete data A maximum of 76 words can be written with each command To write larger parameter areas use multiple commands and specify the beginning word for each Data
79. 800 pts With messages 1 600 pts See note 1 1 280 pts Without Configu rator Alloca tion words OUT CIO 1900 to CIO 1963 IN 2063 CIO 2000 to ClO OUT CIO 0050 to ClO 0099 IN 0399 CIO 0350 to ClO OUT IN IR 50 to IR 99 IR 350 to IR 399 OUT IN IR 50 to IR 81 IR 350 to IR 381 With Con figurator CIO 0000 to ClO 2427 CIO 000 to ClO2555 CIO 0000 to CIO 0235 CIO 0300 to CIO 0511 IR 000 to IR 235 IR 300 to IR 511 G008 to G255 H000 to H099 CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 See note 2 HR 00 to HR 99 LR 00 to LR 63 D00000 to D08191 D00000 to D24575 D00000 to D05999 DM 0000 to DM 4095 DM 0000 to DM 5999 DM 0000 to DM 5999 Up to two output blocks an d two input blocks can be set in the above areas for allocation Each block can be up to 100 words including unused areas Each block can be up to 100 words including unused areas The total number of words in all four blocks must be 300 words or less including unused areas If message communications are used the total number of words in all four blocks must be 100 words or less The total number of words in all four blocks must be 80 words or less including unused areas Without Configu rator Alloca tion methods Words in the default allocation areas are allocated in order of node address 1 word per node address for nodes 0 to 63 are
80. A to F E h a IR 401 10 x unit No 10 Operating Operating status status Error Data F wa f Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Not used Incorrect Switch Settings EEPROM Error Node Address Duplication Bus Off Error Detected Configuration Error Flag Setup Error Flag Transmission Error Flag Communications Error Flag Verification Error Flag Remote I O Communications Stopped Status Flag Scan List Operation Completed Flag Scan List Operation Error Flag Communications Stoppage Cleared Flag Message Communications Enabled Flag Scan List Disabled Flag Error Remote I O Communications Stopped Flag 216 Remote I O Communications Flag Incorrect Switch Setting EEPROM Error Flag Bit 00 This flag is turned ON 1 when there is an incorrect switch setting or an error in EEPROM The incorrect switch setting error occurs when an invalid setting has been made for the Master Unit s baud rate Pins 1 and 2 of the front DIP switch are both ON An EEPROM error occurs when an error is detected in the initialization check as the scan list or other data is written to EEPROM The Error Remote I O Communications Stopped Flag bit 14 will turn ON when ever this flag turns ON Node Address Duplication Bus Off Error Detected Flag Bit 01 This flag is turned ON 1 when the same node address is set for more than one Status Area Section 1
81. Audience rronin ne teak eed CEE Se Ae Th Rae tek Bae La Ree xiv 2 General Precautions 60 143 dates aeea a a its Aa ane ni AS eat WS xiv 3 Satety Precautions sisian Sg ache SRE KES MARR ASE REO ESE SORES E a a ai aa xiv 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 0 eee eects xiv 3 Application Precautions sranna n era wt a ce E a E se nahh aS XV GEC DIt Ctives sorne bees Sai CEs ete he be beens ae oh mele ieee Ban eee bees betes xvi SECTION 1 Features and System Configuration 1 1 1 Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D 0 0 0 cece eee eens 2 F2 DeviceNet Features so clea Ss eS es EERE SOs Oe Pe A Ge es 12 1 3 DeviceNet Master Unit Version Comparison 0 0 02 eee eee eee eee 15 1 4 Communications Specifications 00 cece eee eens 16 1 5 Outline of Configurator 0 0 2 eee 17 SECTION 2 Application Overview iiciien edt ie ew Bae aed be 19 2 1 List of Application Methods 0 0 00 ee cee eee 20 2 2 System Configurations erea eek Ye SG toe ee ee Pea Sie 8 E Ok Rae OO RT Ge 22 2 3 Basic Operating Procedures 0 0 ee ccc eens 23 SECTION 3 Network Configuration and Specifications 27 3 1 Network Configuration 0 n a EE ERE AEE AA EESE 28 3 2 Network Configuration Restrictions 0 0 0 eee ee eee 30 SECTION 4 Master Unit Specifications ccc cece ewes 33 4 1 Overall Specifications sr erei ese eee eas SR
82. CIO 2001 10 words unit No CIO 2010 Unit No 01 Status flags 9 words CIO 2009 CIO 2159 Unit No 15 DM Area For unit No 0 D06032 Unit number 00 D06032 Status flags 2 words 7 First word D06032 2 x unit No D06034 Unit number 01 D06033 D06062 Unit number 15 212 Software Switches Section 13 2 C200HX C200HG C200HE The Special I O Unit Area is divided into sixteen 10 word groups These groups and C200HS PCs are allocated to the Special I O Units according to their unit number settings as shown in the following diagram Master Unit CPU Unit Special I O Unit Area For unit No 0 IR 100 Unit number 08 IR 100 Software switches 1 word First word for unit No 0 to 9 1 IR 101 10 words 100 10 x unit No IR 190 Unit number 9 A Status flags 9 words First word for unit No A to F i i 09 400 10 x unit No 10 IR 400 Unit number A IR 450 Unit number F DM Area For unit No 0 DM 6032 Unit number 00 DM 6032 Status flags 2 words First word DM 6032 2 x unit No DM 6034 Unit number 01 DM 6033 DM 6062 Unit number F 13 2 Software Switches The software switches are used to control the scan list and restart communica tions that have been stopped due to communications errors The scan list is a list which contains data on the nodes participating in
83. Cc ja Instructions to Message read response Communications Enabled Flag Execution Message condition Communications Enabled Flag A 25506 138 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs Section 9 4 9 4 3 C200HX HG HE Programming Example Sending a FINS Command Master Unit IOWR unit number 0 e a Master Unit CPU Unit Unit ad dress 00 Network 01 meee nS MEMORY AREA READ command Operation The data in the 5 words DM 1000 to DM 1004 are read from the PC with the Mas ter Unit with node address 06 and transferred to the PC of the Master Unit with node address 05 where IOWR is executed The command data is written start ing at DM 1000 of the PC with node address 05 and the response data is stored in words beginning with DM 2000 The completion code is stored in DM 00006 when execution of IOWR has been completed and then the command is executed again Command Details The following command is used IOWR C S D C DM 0000 Control word Settings hex DM 0000 0600 Response Destination node address 06 Destination unit address 00 CPU Unit S DM 1000 First source word Settings hex DM 1000 8207 First response word DM 2000 DM 1001 D000 Rest of first response word DM 1002 0064 Response monitoring time DM 1003 0008 No of command bytes DM 1004 0101 Command code DM 1005 8203 Command parameters DM 1006 E800 Command parameters DM
84. D01000 2801 D01001 OBOE D01002 0001 D01003 0001 D01004 0100 Command Code Slave node address 11 Service code 0E Class ID 0001 Instance ID 0001 Attribute ID 01 D D02000 First response word at local node C D00000 First control word Settings hex D00000 0009 D00001 000A D00002 0001 D00003 05FE D00004 0000 D00005 0064 Number of command bytes Number of response bytes Destination network address 1 Destination node address 05 Destination unit address FE or 10 Response communications port 0 no retries Response monitoring time 145 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 5 A500 15 041 BSET 0000 D00000 First Scan Flag 030 MOV 0009 030 MOV 000A 030 MOV 0001 030 MOV 05FE 030 MOV 0000 030 MOV 0064 030 MOV 2801 030 MOV 0B0E 030 MOV 0001 030 MOV 0001 030 MOV 0100 030 MOV 0001 Execution condition 0000 A502 1501 00 00 12 194 CMND D01000 D02000 Port Message Enabled Commu Flag nications oe Enabled Flag 0000 A502 A502 1501 01 00 08 12 030 t _ KS x MOV A503 Port Port Message 061 Enabled Execution Commu ASR Flag Error Flag nications Enabled Flag D02999 D00000 D00001 D00002 D00003 D00004 D00005 D01000 D01001 D01002 D01003 D01004 0000 D00000 0000 D00006 0000 Sets 0000 in D00000 to D02999 Place data into control data words to sp
85. Data Configurations for the various data configurations 11 4 MEMORY AREA WRITE Command Block Response Block Parameters Writes data to the specified number of consecutive words starting from the spe cified word All words must be in the same memory area here all memory areas with the the same memory area code are considered as one area When data is written to the Timer Counter PV Area the Completion Flags will be turned OFF 0 01 02 00 Command Beginning address No of items Data code Memory area code Command Response code code Memory area code command The data area to write Beginning address command The first word value to write Specify 00 for the 3rd byte No of items command The number of items to be written Specify 0000 to 03E5 0 to 997 decimal The command can complete normally even if zero items are specified When writing through a DeviceNet network however the total number of bytes in one write must be 152 or less Adjust the number of items according to the number of bytes required per item so that the total number of bytes being written does not exceed 152 Data command The data to be written PVs for timers and counters are writ ten as BCD The required number of bytes in total is calculated as follows 2 bytes x No of items The following data can be written refer to 11 2 Memory Area Designations for the word bit address designati
86. Each time a communications error occurs and error code is placed in an error record in the error history kept in the RAM of the Master Unit Up to 20 records can be stored in the error history For CVM1 CV series Master Units the record is also time stamped Time stamps are not provided with the other Master Units The error history can be read or cleared from the CPU Unit by sending an FINS command to the Master Unit Error History Read Clear The contents of the er ror history can also be monitored from the Configurator _Code Code 20 records _ Code iia FINS command Read out L_CPU Unit ____ Monitor Configurator Overview Section 9 1 The MS and NS indicators and the 7 segment display on the front panel of the Master Unit can be used together with the Master Status Area 1 inside the CPU Unit to obtain information on a communications error that has occurred This in formation can be used as the basis for troubleshooting Message Communications Errors Send error Network power error Send time out Master CPU Unit Unit MS NS indicators No change Not lit Example Routing table error Flashing red Not relevant Master Status Area 1 oe n 7 segment display E0 lt Master node address E2 lt Master node address Master status area 1 Bit 05 turns ON Configuration
87. I 51 Cables and Connectors Section 5 1 5 1 5 Power Supply Tap In the DeviceNet system a communications power supply must be supplied to the Network When there is one power supply to the Network and the total cur rent consumption is less than 5 A the communications power supply can be connected by using a general purpose T branch Tap instead of a Power Supply Tap When there is more than one power supply connected to the Network and the total current consumption exceeds 5 A the communications power supply must be connected with a Power Supply Tap Modea e Specifications 1485T P2T5 T5 PowerTap Allen Bradley Countercurrent preventive function ground terminal provided 565 O 7 l hs 0 T o io LT o o D 5 N ea Pet dj o o ia B OV JO _ 67 2 625 gt lt 98 04 3 86 gt All dimensions are in mm 5 1 6 Terminating Resistors In DeviceNet a Terminating Resistor must be connected to each end of the trunk line Be sure to connect two Terminating Resistors because the Unit does not have terminal resistors built in There are two methods for connecting a Terminating Resistor one using a spe cial Terminal block Terminating Resistor and the other installing a resistor on the Terminating
88. Master Unit operation will stop Bits 01 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Change the node address settings to eliminate the duplication and restart the Master F1 lt Mnn Bus Off error detected A Bus Off status was detected Communications were stopped because of the occurrence of a number of data errors Master Unit operation will stop Bits 01 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Check the Master Slave baud rates for loose or broken cables for noise cable lengths and Terminating Resistors F3 lt Mnn Flashing green Incorrect switch settings A mistake has been made in the DIP switch settings Master Unit operation will stop Bits 00 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Check the settings and restart the Master Unit 243 Indicators and Error Processing Section 15 1 Display Indicator status Probable cause and remedy 7 segment MS NS F4 lt Mnn Flashing Configuration error One of the following errors has occurred when using a green PC mounting error VO C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Master Units only e A SYSMAC BUS Master is connected too e Two or more Master Units are connected Master Unit operation will stop Change the configuration and restart the PC F5 amp Mnn Flashing Initialization error with An error occurred during initialization with the PC green PC Master Unit operation will stop Check the following items and restart the P
89. Message no 7 10 29 FAL FALS READ Reads FAL FALS messages Note The MESSAGE READ refer to 10 27 MESSAGE READ MESSAGE CLEAR Command Block Response Block 180 refer to 10 28 MESSAGE CLEAR and FAL FALS READ commands refer to 10 29 FAL FALS READ share the same command code They are distin guished by bits 14 and 15 of the two byte parameter after the command code To read FAL FALS messages bit 14 must be OFF 0 and bit 15 must be ON 1 09 20 Command FAL FALS No code 09 20 16 bytes Command Response FAL FALS Error message code code No ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE Section 10 30 Parameters FAL FALS no command and response In the command block specify in hexadecimal in bits 0 to 13 the FAL or FALS number to be read as shown below In the response block the FAL or FALS number is returned First byte Second byte Bit 15 14 13 8 7 0 T T T P T 110 l A FAL or FALS no 10 FAL FALS READ Error message response The error message specified in the FAL 006 or FALS 007 instruction If there is no error 16 spaces ASCII 20 will be returned 10 30 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE Command Block Note Acquires the access right as long as no other device holds it Execute the AC CESS RIGHT ACQUIRE command when you need to execute commands con tinuously without being interrupted by other devices As soon as the executi
90. NPN Appendix D Manufacturer DRT1 ID16X 1 Remote Adapter 16 transistor inputs PNP DRT1 OD16X Remote Adapter 16 transistor outputs NPN DRT1 OD16X 1 Remote Adapter 16 transistor outputs PNP DRT1 HD16S Sensor Terminal 8 sensor inputs NPN 2 inputs per sensor DRT1 ND16S Sensor Terminal 8 sensor inputs NPN 1 input and 1 output per sensor DRT1 AD04 Analog Input Terminal 4 analog inputs allocated 4 words or 2 analog inputs allocated 2 words Switchable DRT1 DA02 Analog Output Terminal 2 analog outputs allocated 2 words DRT1 TSO4T Temperature Input Terminal Thermocouple input 4 inputs allocated 4 words DRT1 TSO4P C200HW DRT21 Temperature Input Terminal Temperature resistance thermometer input 4 inputs allocated 4 words Specifications I O Link Unit for C200HE C200HG C200HX PCs User set allocations possible 512 inputs max 512 outputs max Read Write area can be user set using explicit DeviceNet messages Manufacturer DRT1 232C2 MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Units 290 DRT1 COM RS 232C Unit with 2 RS 232C ports 16 inputs communications status RS 232C ports parameters can be set and data can be transmitted to and from external devices using explicit DeviceNet messages Specifications Communications Unit Two input words status Manufacturer GT1 ID16 Transistor Input Unit termi
91. Names 0 00 eee ccc eee 159 10 4 MEMORY AREA READ 0 c cece cece eet eee AE EDANE SEG 160 10 5 MEMORY AREA WRITE 00 cece cece eee tence een ences 161 10 6 MEMORY AREA FILL 00 eee ccc teen nent ene E ees 162 10 7 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ 00 0 c cece eee ene eee 162 10 8 MEMORY AREA TRANSFER 00 cece cect e ene n ene ee 164 10 9 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ 0 0 0 0 cece 164 10 10 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ 00 ccc eee eee 165 10 11 PARAMETER AREA READ 0 eee e eect eee ence enees 166 10 12 PARAMETER AREA WRITE 00 cece cece tee een ene nee 167 10 13 PARAMETER AREA CLEAR 00 cece eect errereen 169 10 14 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT 00 cece cent ence een eee 170 10 15 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR 0 c cece eee ence ene 170 10 16 PROGRAM AREA READ 0 cece cece eee e nent e nee nees 171 10 17 PROGRAM AREA WRITE 0 eee cette nent nen eee 172 10 18 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR 0 0 c cece cece e erenneren 173 10219 RUIN 235 eal Hes weitere Wie aie Aedes od eae adel ae aes 173 TO220 STOP e a a a a N aeath Sanh tat Tarleton 174 10 21 CONTROLLER DATA READ paaa a a a T a a ao 174 TABLE OF CONTENTS 10 22 CONNECTION DATA READ 0 0 cc eee eee 177 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ 00 0 ES nR eee 177 10 24 CY CLE TIME READ 2 9254 d505 et ats hie bh a AEE ae
92. Network power supply error The communications power supply isn t being supplied from the communications connector The Master Unit will be waiting for power supply Bits 05 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Check the power supply and connecting cables 242 Send error Send timeout A transmission couldn t be completed successfully for one of the following reasons e There are no Slaves in the network e There is another Master in the Network e There is an error in the CAN controller The Master Unit will retry Bits 05 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Check the Master Slave baud rates for loose or broken cables for noise cable lengths and Terminating Resistors Display Indicator status 7 segment MS Flashing red Indicators and Error Processing PC mounting error for V1 Master Units only see note 1 at end of table Section 15 1 Probable cause and remedy C200HX HG HE PCs Either the Master Unit is mounted to a Slave Rack or two Master Units are mounted without using a Configurator to enable them CVM1 and CV series PCs Two Master Units are mounted without using a Configurator to enable them Operation will continue from where remote I O communications stopped including I O refresh Bits 03 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Create a scan list using the configurator V1 Master Units When a PC mounting error occurs remote I O co
93. Network to addresses beginning at D at the local node The possible values for S depend on the Unit being transmitted from The control words beginning with C specify the number of words to be received the source node and other parameters Some control data parameters depend on the Unit being transmitted from Normally a response is required with RECV 193 so set C 3 bit 15 to OFF RECV 193 only starts the transmission Verify that the transmission has been completed with the Network Status Flags in A502 The control data depends on the source node The following information is for DeviceNet Networks Bits 00 to 07 Bits 08 to 15 Number of words 1 to 78 i e 0001 Source network address 0 to 127 i e 00 to 7F Source unit address Bits 00 to 03 No of retries 0 to 15 in hexadecimal i e 0 to F Bits 04 to 07 Set to 0 to 004E Set to 0 Source node address Bits 08 to 11 Transmission port number 0 to 7 Bit 12 to 14 Set to 0 ON No response OFF Response returned Response monitoring time 0001 to FFFF 0 1 to 6553 5 seconds 4 Bit 15 Note 1 Set the source network address to 00 when transmitting within the same network The network of the Unit with the lowest unit number will be selected if the PC belongs to more than one network Indicates a Unit as shown in the following table CPU Unit 00 01 10 to 1F Unit numbers 0 to 15 FE The
94. No Unit 04 Not executable 24 Start stop not possible 05 Routing error 25 Unit error 10 Command format error 26 Command error 11 Parameter error 30 Access right error 40 Abort 9 2 2 Units Supporting FINS Communications Note The parameters used for FINS commands depend on the Unit that is processing the command Command details are provided in other sections for the following Units e CVM1 and CV series CPU Units See Section 10 e CS1 series and C200HX HG HE CPU Units See Section 11 e DeviceNet Master Units See Section 12 Although CS1 series and C200HX HG HE CPU Units cannot directly process FINS commands the DeviceNet Master Unit will convert the FINS commands into a form that CS1 series and C200HX HG HE CPU Units can process Re sponses from CS1 series and C200HX HG HE CPU Units are also converted into the proper form for FINS communications by the DeviceNet Master Unit and then returned to the source of the command 9 2 3 FINS Command Lists Refer to Sections 10 11 and 12 for details on the following commands Commands Addressed to CVM1 and CV series CPU Units Function Name Command Page code Manipulating data in data areas and MEMORY AREA READ 01 01 158 force setting resetting bits MEMORY AREA WRITE 02 159 ne Area DM Area EM Area Timer Counter Area MEMORY AREA FILL 03 160 ransition
95. O Unit TS indicators are lit green The end connector is not connected After turning OFF the power supply to the Communications Unit and all I O Units attach the end connector to the I O Unit interface connector 2 of the terminal I O Unit The cable connected to the Remote Terminal Unit I O interface connector 1 is broken After turning OFF the power supply to the Communications Unit and all I O Units perform a continuity test on the cable and replace the broken cable The TS indicators on the Units closer to the Communications Unit are flashing green and the indicators on the rest of the Units are not lit The I O Unit configuration changed after the Unit where the TS indicator display changed After turning OFF the power supply to the Communications Unit and all I O Units return to the correct I O Unit configuration and restart the Communications Unit At the last Unit where the green light is flashing one of the cables is broken After turning OFF the power supply to the Communications Unit and all I O Units check the connection status of the cable If the problem persists replace the cable after turning OFF the power supply to the Communications Unit and all I O Units I O Unit interface connector 2 are connected at the Unit where the TS indicator display changed After turning OFF the power supply to the Communications Unit and all I O Units correctly reconnect the cable
96. Resistor socket of a T branch Tap If a resistor is to be installed on a T branch Tap be sure to use the Terminating Resistor provided with the T branch Tap Modei Comments Terminal block Terminating Resistor 121 Q 1 1 4 W Terminating Resistor provided with T branch Taps 121 Q 1 1 4 W 52 Cables and Connectors Section 5 1 DRS1 T Terminating All dimensions are in mm Resistor Dimensions 21 max 20 max Mounting holes Two 4 2 dia or M4 po a Note A Terminating Resistor like the one shown below is included with T branch Taps 5 1 7 Communications Power Supply In the DeviceNet system a communications power supply must be supplied to the Network that provides an output voltage of 24 VDC 1 and the AC inputs and DC outputs should be insulated OMRON S82H series and S82J series Power Supply Units are recommended Select a Power Supply Unit with a per missible current capacity greater than the total power consumption of all nodes to be connected 53 Cables and Connectors Section 5 1 Communications Power The communications power supply must meet the following specifications Supply Specifications Output voltage 24 VDC 1 Output current 16 A max Input fluctuation 0 3 max Load fluctuation 0 3 max Effect of ambient temperature 0 03 C max Input voltage 100 to 1 200 V Input frequency 47 to 450 Hz Output ripple 250 MVp p Output capacity 7 000 u F max Ambient
97. Section 8 4 User set Allocations e Master Unit B Means oe e a Sis 5 DM0100 400 ie 401 04 402 Output area block 1 Output area block 2 Input area block 1 Input area block 2 Area DM Area Area Area VO relay Area Start word 100 Start word Start word 4000 Start word No of words 1 No of words No of words 6 No of words 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I O relay IR or CIO Area Turn off power to all Slaves Turn on power to Master Unit A 12 Read the network configuration from the Configurator The device list for Master Unit A will be displayed Edit the device parameters for Master Unit A with the Configurator by read ing the master parameter file created in step 9 and then writing the parame ters to Master Unit A Turn off power to Master Unit A and turn on power to Master Unit B Repeat steps 12 and 13 for Master Unit B Turn on power to all Slaves Read the network configuration from the Configurator Confirm that all nodes are displayed at the Configurator and that the master parameters for Master Units A and B are set correctly Save the master parameters in network files Check the two master parameter files in the network files that have been saved using the Configurator s master parameter file duplication check to be sure that there are no parameter settings that have been duplicated If there are no duplicated settings in the master parameters sta
98. T branch Tap There are two kinds of T branch Taps one makes a single branch and the other makes three branches but the cable connections are the same for both The connectors indicated by asterisks in the following diagrams have the least resistance and these connectors should be used for the trunk line connections When using a T branch Tap on a drop line we recommend connecting the long est drop line to these connectors DCN1 1C Use for trunk line of longest drop line DCN1 3C Use for trunk line of longest drop line Align the cable connector with the socket on the T branch Tap as shown in the following diagram and fully insert the connector into the socket Tighten the set 75 Connecting Communications Cables to Nodes Section 7 6 Note screws to secure the connection Tighten the screws to a torque of between 0 25 and 0 3 Nim TR FNS To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires don t pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when connecting it to the T branch Tap Also never put heavy ob jects on top of the cable 7 5 Connecting Terminating Resistors T branch Tap Terminating Resistor Terminal block Terminating Resistor Note Terminating Resistors must be connected at each end of the trunk line This sec tion shows how to connect the Terminating Resistors A term
99. T branch connection M Multi drop connection DeviceNet cables 5 wire cables are used for the trunk lines and drop lines 3 1 1 Network Components Nodes Trunk Drop Lines Connection Methods Terminating Resistors Communications Power Supplies Note 28 There are two kinds of nodes in a DeviceNet network The Slaves connect to external I O and the Master administers the Network and manages the external I O of the Slaves The Master and Slaves can be connected at any location in the Network as shown in the preceding diagram The trunk line refers to the cable that has Terminating Resistors on both ends Cables branching from the trunk line are known as drop lines The trunk line length does not necessarily coincide with the maximum length of the Network DeviceNet communications are transmitted through 5 wire cables The cables come in thick or thin versions Two methods can be used to connect DeviceNet nodes The T branch method and the multi drop method With the T branch method the node is connected to a drop line created with a T branch Tap With the multi drop method the node is directly connected to the trunk line or the drop line Secondary branches can be made from a drop line Both of these connection methods can be used in the same Network as shown in the example Terminating Resistors are connected at each end of the trunk line to reduce sig nal reflection and stabilize communications There are two kind
100. WRITE 03 188 MEMORY CARD FORMAT 04 188 FILE DELETE 05 189 VOLUME LABEL CREATE DELETE 06 189 FILE COPY 07 190 FILE NAME CHANGE 08 190 FILE DATA CHECK 09 191 MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER OA 192 PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER OB 193 PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER oC 194 Force setting resetting bits FORCED SET RESET 23 01 195 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL 02 196 Commands Addressed to CS1 series and C200HX HG HE CPU Units Function Name Command Page code Manipulating data in data areas and MEMORY AREA READ 01 01 200 force setting resetting bits MEMORY AREA WRITE 02 201 IR Area DM Area EM Area Timer Counter Area MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ 04 202 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ 10 202 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ 11 203 Reading PC model information CONTROLLER DATA READ 05 01 204 Reading PC status CONTROLLER STATUS READ o6 01 204 Manipulating the PC clock CLOCK READ 07 01 205 Note Although CS1 series CPU Units support other commands only the ones listed above can be made via DeviceNet Commands Addressed to DeviceNet Master Units Name Command Page code RESET 04 03 208 CONTROLLER DATA READ 05 01 208 ECHOBACK TEST 08 01 209 ERROR LOG READ 21 02 209 ERROR LOG CLEAR 03 210 Command to Send Explicit DeviceNet Messages Name Command Page code EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND 28 01 143 121 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 9 3 9 3 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV
101. a single Slave refer to page 224 E Communications time per Slave represents the total of the Commu nications time per Slave for all the Slaves in the network High density Unit Processing Time 3 5 ms This is added if there are any Slaves in the network that use at least 8 bytes for input output or both Explicit Message Processing Time 0 11 x Tg 0 6 ms Only added when explicit communications are performed Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tg 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 N Number of Slaves The communications time per Slave is the communications time required for a single Slave The communications time per Slave is used to calculate the mini mum I O response time The following equations show the communications time Slave Trt for each kind of Slave Unit Remote I O Communications Characteristics Section 14 1 Refresh Time Note Output Slaves with Less Than 8 Bytes of Output Trt 0 016 xTp x SouTi 0 11 x Tg 0 07 ms Souti The number of Output Slave output words Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 Input Slaves with Less Than 8 Bytes of Input Trt 0 016 xTp x Sint 0 06 x Tp 0 05 ms Sint The number of Input Slave input words Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 Mixed I O Slaves with Less Than 8 Bytes of Input or Output Trt 0 016 x Tp x Sout2 Sino 0 11 x Tp 0 07
102. aS 179 10225 CLOCK READ ee scogacs hah end nae tee tid bd ae et dts eb ea Meee do 180 10 26 CLOCK WRITE if n0s fk ibe PASS GRE Mee be RED MESSE Saas Ree Ea SSE Ses 180 10227 MESSAGE READ vesn Gobo GRATES Sha Vo Rte Ce ee ees 181 10228 MESSAGE CLEAR sirno cave bb tae 5 Beg BER oe Hoa CAR Bae bb eee 181 10 29 FAL FAES READS 3 2 0 y8 8 at nit A Ades ld eb ihe ts Meee bbs Baha ee 182 10 30 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE 0 0 sde AVE cence ene 183 10 31 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE 0 0 0 eee 184 10 32 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE 0 00 0 eee cee eee 185 10233 ERROR CLEAR Gaeta desta hea hoa e Ree Re pie eee pak Mae ota Be area 185 10 34 ERROR LOG READ 0 0 occ e A eee eee 186 10 35 ERROR LOG CLEARS sags g 2 5 Sah shot erste A E siensa er SSE Hera EN Rash ates ae oe 187 10 36 FILE NAME READ crins ni nedan ep i S Ae OAS SERS as eae BESO 188 10 37 SINGLE FILE READ noc Sh 4 SRS Sh SS BE Ce Se ees 189 10 38 SINGLE FILE WRITE co 0 006054 soho e a eee Shee eee eee ewe Sea oes 190 10 39 MEMORY CARD FORMAT 00 0 0 190 10 40 FILE DELETE aicins santas slag tips ad Seas SRF ee Det oes eae eae eh tease 191 10 41 VOLUME LABEL CREATE DELETE 00 00 191 10 42 FILE CORY sorire Geile let Deseo cla ctoh Pae ates eet eet 192 10 43 FILE NAME CHANGE cpe cepo erpa ee cee eee ence eens 192 10 44 FILE DATA CHECK o ionit ese e tied eee ee Od i tee ecb ad Sie ad aes 193 10 45 MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER 0 00000 c cec
103. actually pro cessed by the DeviceNet CompoBus D Master Unit The command will REGISTER COMPOSITE READ Section 10 10 thus result in an error if it is not sent to a CPU Unit through a DeviceNet net work 2 If there is an error in the command code or a read address no data will be read Command Block 01 10 Ne 24 a Command code Response Block 01 10 wiy Command Response Data Data code code Memory area code Memory area code Parameters Memory area code response The data area to read Data response The data in the specified with the COMPOSITE READ REG ISTRATION command will be returned in sequence The number of bytes re turned for each item depends on the item that is specified 10 10 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ Registers the contents to be read with the COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ command 01 10 Up to 100 items can be registered for reading for 2 by tes data up to 50 items for 4 byte data i e up to 200 bytes of data can be read The contents registered with this command is effective until the power supply to the PC is turned OFF or until the Master Unit is reset This enables executing the COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ command consecutively without having to specify the contents to be read again Note 1 Although this command is addressed to the CPU Unit it is actually pro cessed by the DeviceNet Master Unit The command will thus result in an error if it is
104. allocations software switch All Slaves participating normally in the network Scan list Slave O allocations Communications pa rameters User set allocations Set as required using the Configurator Registered as scan list in the Master Unit 92 Scan Lists Section 8 2 Using Scan Lists Note Note Note The scan lists created with the Configurator will be required again for registration in the Master Unit if the Master Unit is ever set to disable the scan list or if the Master Unit is replaced Be sure to save any scan lists you create with the Confi gurator as network files or master parameter files Enabling Disabling a Scan List To enable a scan list turn ON the Enable Scan List software switch or use the Configurator To disable a scan list turn ON the Clear Scan List software switch 1 Scan lists cannot be disabled from the Configurator The scan list will always be enabled when created on the Configurator and registered in a Master Unit 2 Always enable the scan list during actual system operation Although opera tion is possible with the scan list disabled when the default allocations are used communications will continue even if Slaves fail creating the possibil ity of undetected errors in system operation Scan List Enabled When a scan list is enabled communications are performed according to the scan list stored in the Ma
105. are not 20 records in the Master Unit when ERROR HISTORY READ is executed a 11 04 response code will be returned In this case the response code is not treated as an error and normal processing contin ues The following command is used IOWR C S D Reading the Error History C DM 0000 Control word Settings hex DM 0000 O5FE Response Destination node address 05 Destination FINS unit address FE Master Unit S DM 1000 First source word Settings hex DM 1000 8207 First response word DM 2000 DM 1001 D000 Rest of first response word DM 1002 0064 Response monitoring time DM 1003 0006 No of command bytes DM 1004 2102 Command code DM 1005 0000 Command parameters DM 1006 0014 Command parameters to read 20 records D 0007 Destination information Destination machine number 00 hex 257 Error History Section 15 2 No of words to transfer 07 BCD Clearing the Error History C DM 0000 Control word Settings hex DM 0000 05FE Response Destination node address 05 Destination FINS unit address FE Master Unit S DM 1010 First source word Settings hex DM 1010 8207 First response word DM 2000 DM 1011 D000 Rest of first response word DM 1012 0064 Response monitoring time DM 1013 0002 No of command bytes DM 1014 2103 Command code D 0005 Destination information Destination machine number 00 hex No of words to transfer 05 BCD 258
106. baud rate of the RS 232C Unit Framing Error Flag bit 06 or 14 in communications status word is ON The character block settings data length parity and stop bits do not match those in the RS 232C Unit Reset the RS 232C port s character block data length parity and stop bits to match the character block of the RS 232C Unit Receive Buffer Error Flag bit 07 or 15 in communications status word is ON 15 4 Maintenance The receive buffer has overflowed The receive buffer for each of the RS 232C Unit s ports is 1 024 bytes Increase the reading frequency so that the receive buffer does not overflow If the receive buffer has overflown execute the RS 232C PORT RESET command or restart the RS 232C Unit This section describes the routine cleaning and inspection recommended as regular maintenance 15 4 1 Cleaning Clean the DeviceNet Units regularly as described below in order to keep it in its optimal operating condition e Wipe the Unit with a dry soft cloth for regular cleaning e When a spot can t be removed with a dry cloth dampen the cloth with a neutral cleanser wring out the cloth and wipe the Unit e A smudge may remain on the Unit from gum vinyl or tape that was left on for a long time Remove the smudge when cleaning N Caution Never use volatile solvents such as paint thinner or benzene or chemical wipes These substances could damage the surface of the Unit 15
107. be the cause of a malfunction in the DeviceNet net work the following measures may be effective Suspend the communications cable shielding wire without grounding it This will filter the noise that flows from the ground to the communications cable and will filter the noise current that flows in the shielding wire Suspend the communications power supply without grounding it This will also filter the noise that flows from the communications power supply ground to the communications cable or the noise current that flows in the shielding wire The switching power supply is usually connected to the case and the capacitor as shown below The FG terminal must be suspended and the control board for the power supply itself must be insulated Switching Power Supply Configuration Switching power supply Power AC power supply AC input supply circuit DC output Casing Sharing the Same Power Supply Section 7 10 Suspending the Communications Power Supply S82J power supply x 4 DC power supply 82Y LICIN Mounting Tool lt Insulating material such as baked board or acrylic board When using S82J power supply When using other power supplies 7 10 Sharing the Same Power Supply Slave Units in the DeviceNet network can be classified into three types accord ing to how the power is supplied as shown below
108. can be written to the I O table only when the PC is in PROGRAM mode 1 The PARAMETER AREA WRITE command can be executed regardless of the PC s mode It is the user s responsibility to program steps to prohibit this command from being executed when the PC is in the RUN mode if such protection is necessary Execute the CONTROLLER STATUS READ com mand refer to 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ to read the PC s mode 2 If any other device has the access right nothing will be written to the speci fied parameter area 165 PARAMETER AREA WRITE Section 10 12 Command Block Response Block Parameters 166 3 If memory is write protected via the key switch on the front panel of the PC nothing will be written to the specified parameter area 02 02 Command Parameter Beginning No of words Data code area code word 02 02 x Command Response code code Parameter area code command The parameter area to write Beginning word command The first word to write No of words command Bits 0 to 14 are used to specify the number of words to be written each word consists of two bytes Bit 15 must be ON 1 when data is written to the last word in the specified parameter area or no data will be writ ten If the number of write words is set to 0000 no words will be written anda normal response code will be returned Bit 15 OFF 0 Data not w
109. com mand refer to 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ to read the PC s Command Block Response Block Parameters mode 2 When data is written to the Timer Counter PV Area the Completion Flags will be turned OFF 0 01 02 Command code Beginning address No of items Memory area code 01 02 Command Response code code Memory area code command The data area to write Beginning address command The first word value to write No of items command The number of items to be written If the number of items is set to 0000 nothing will be written and a normal end response code will be returned Set the number of items to 0001 when writing a step timer PV regis ter value or interrupt status Data command The data to be written The required number of bytes in total is calculated as fo No of bytes required by each item x No of items llows The following data can be written refer to 10 2 Memory Area Designations for the word bit address designations Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes CIO TR CPU Bus Word contents 80 2 Link and Auxiliary Timer Counter PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 Step Flag ON OFF 04 1 Expansion DM Word contents specified bank 90 to 97 2 banks 0 to 7 Word contents current bank 98 2 Register Register contents 9C 2 Current bank no of expansion
110. deleted 10 41 VOLUME LABEL CREATE DELETE Creates a volume label on the file device connected to the PC or deletes an ex isting volume label from the file device Only one volume label can be created for a single memory card When a volume label is generated the clock data of the PC will be recorded as the date of the volume label Command Block The command format for creating a volume label is as follows 22 06 12 bytes Command Disk no Parameter Volume label code code 189 FILE COPY Section 10 42 Response Block Parameters 10 42 FILE COPY Command Block Response Block Parameters Note The command format for deleting a volume label is as follows 22 06 Command Disk no Parameter code code 22 06 Command Response code code Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file device memory card Parameter code command and response As follows 0000 Creates a new volume label If a label already exists nothing will be executed 0001 Creates a volume label If a label already exists it will be overwritten 0002 Deletes an existing volume label Volume label command The volume label to be written refer to 10 3 Volume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the volume label Copies a file from one file device to another file device connected to the same PC
111. e Always disconnect the LG terminal when performing withstand voltage tests e Install all Units according to instructions in the operation manuals Improper installation may cause faulty operation e Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations e Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation e Locations near to power supply lines XV EC Directives 6 e Be sure to tighten Backplane screws terminal screws and cable connector screws securely e Do not attempt to take any Units apart to repair any Units or to modify any Units in any way N Caution The following precautions are necessary to ensure the general safety of the sys tem Always heed these precautions e Provide double safety mechanisms to handle incorrect signals that can be generated by broken signal lines or momentary power interruptions e Provide external interlock circuits limit circuits and other safety circuits in addition to any provided within the PC System to ensure safety 6 EC Directives DeviceNet CompoBus D products that meet EC directives must be installed as follows 1 2 3 1 DeviceNet Units are designed for installation inside control panels All Devi ceNet Units must be installed within control panels 2 Used reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supplies use
112. eee eee eee 222 211 Software Switch Status Area Section 13 1 13 1 Software Switch Status Area CVM1 and CV series PCs Master Unit The software switch status flag area contains the software switches required to control the network and the status flags that indicate the status of the network and Slaves In CVM1 and CV series PCs the statuses of software switches and status flags are stored in the CPU Bus Unit Area and in CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs they are stored in the Special I O Unit Area The CPU Bus Unit Area is divided into sixteen 25 word groups These groups are allocated to the CPU Bus Units according to their unit number settings as shown in the following diagram CPU e Soag For unit No 0 CIO 1500 Unit No 00 CIO 1500 Software switches 1 word First word CIO 1500 25 x unit No CIO 1525 Unit No 01 CIO 1501 Status flags 11 words CIO 1511 25 words CIO 1875 Unit No 15 CIO 1512 Reserved 13 words CIO 1524 CS1 series PCs The Special I O Unit Area is divided into sixteen 10 word groups These groups are allocated to the Special I O Units according to their unit number settings as shown in the following diagram Master Unit CPU Unit i Special I O Unit Area For unit No 0 ClO 2000 Software switches 1 word First word CIO 2000 10 x CIO 2000 Unit No 00
113. following diagram Up to 20 records can be stored in the DeviceNet Master Unit If more than 20 errors occur the newest records are stored and the oldest ones are deleted E 1st byte 10th byte I C o ye Error code Error details j i j min s day hr yr mo L The time stamp is provided in the CVM1 DRM1 V1 Master Unit only These bytes will be all zeros for the C200HW DRM1 V1 Master Unit The program can be used to manually attach a time stamp to the error history records by using the clock in the CPU Unit for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs Note The time stamp is not provided for any error that occurs during initialization with the PC 251 Error History Section 15 2 15 2 2 Error Codes The error codes used in the error history are described in the following table The error codes cover errors such as destroyed responses for messages commu nications which are not displayed on the front panel indicators Error details Code from 7 segment display on Master Unit Error node address PC interface error Meaning Error occurred in PC interface 7 seg ment display Initialization error with PC Error occurred in initialization with PC Routing table error Error in routing table data Destination node address Source node address Destination node address Frame discriminator automatically set by system when FINS command is set Send Not in response n
114. follows 0001 DEBUG mode 0002 MONITOR mode 0004 RUN mode 171 STOP Section 10 20 Note If the mode is not specified the PC will go to MONITOR mode 10 20 STOP Changes the PC to PROGRAM mode stopping program execution Note If any other device holds the access right nothing will be executed Command Block 04 02 Ls Command code Response Block 04 02 Command Response code code 10 21 CONTROLLER DATA READ Reads the following data e Controller model and version e Area data e CPU Bus Unit configuration e Remote I O data e PC status Command Block 05 01 Command lz Data to be read 00 or 01 code Response Block The format is as follows if 00 is specified as the data to be read 05 01 20 bytes 20 bytes 40 bytes 12 bytes Command Response Controller Controller For system Area data code code model version use The format is as follows if 01 is specified as the data to be read 64 bytes 05 01 Command Response CPU Bus Unit code code configuration L_ PC status Remote I O data 172 CONTROLLER DATA READ Section 10 21 The format is as follows when the data to be read is omitted 05 01 20 bytes 20 bytes 40 bytes 12 bytes 64 bytes Command Response Controller Controller For system Are
115. local Unit User program in FA computer CPU Bus Unit 3 Values of 01 to 3E indicate nodes 1 to 63 4 Designates the length of time that the PC retries transmission when bit 15 of C 3 is OFF and no response is received The default value is 0000 which indicates 2 seconds Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 9 3 9 3 2 Sending FINS Commands DELIVER COMMAND CMND 194 CMND 194 can be used to send FINS commands to read write I O memory read status data change the operating mode and perform other functions at other nodes Ladder Symbol 194 CMND S D c Operands Variations S 18t command word j CMND 194 D 1St response word C 1St control word Description Local node source Destination node Command Z Response CMND 194 transmits the command beginning at word S to the designated Unit at the destination node address in the designated network and receives the re sponse beginning at word D Normally a response is required with CMND 194 and C 3 bit 15 is turned OFF Control Data The control words beginning with C specify the number of bytes of control data to be sent the number of bytes of response data to be received the destination node and other parameters Some control data parameters depend on the des tination Bits 00 to 07 Bits 08 to 15 Number of command bytes to send 0 to 160 i e 0000 to 00A0 Number of re
116. message length CVM1 CV Series SEND 192 152 bytes RECV 193 156 bytes CMND 194 160 bytes starting with command code CS1 Series C200HZ HX HG HE IOWR 160 bytes starting with command code Communications Software Switches and Communications Status Words in dedicated areas of the CPU Unit are allocated for DeviceNet commu nications software switches and status Master Unit Software switches Status area data etc Controls scan list registration clearing remote I O communications start stop and other parameters Enables monitoring communications errors communications status of Master Units registered Slave data normal Slave 11 DeviceNet Features Section 1 2 Configurators Model number 3G8F5 DRM21 Components Dedicated ISA Board and Installation Disk Network connection to personal computer Dedicated ISA Board 3G8E2 DRM21 Dedicated PCMCIA Card and Installation Dedicated PCMCIA Card Applicable personal computers IBM AT PC or compatible Windows 95 or Windows NT 3 5 4 0 Windows 95 Disk 1 2 DeviceNet Features The DeviceNet conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification which means that devices Masters and Slaves produced by other manufactur ers can also be connected to the Network A wide range of field level applica tions can thus be supported by combining valve devices sensors and othe
117. new file or modifying an existing file must be done within the capacity of the file device or the SINGLE FILE WRITE command cannot be executed 22 03 12 fan 12 ied Command Disk no Parameter File name File position Data length File data code code Response Block 22 03 Parameters Command Response code code Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file device memory card Parameter code command As follows 0000 Writes a new file If a file with the same name already exists the new file will not be created 0001 Writes a new file If a file with the same name already exists it will be overwritten 0002 Add data to an existing file 0003 Overwrite an existing file File name command The name of the file to be written refer to 10 3 Volume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the file name File position command The number of bytes from the start of the file from which to start writing files start at 00000000 To create a new file or add data to an existing file specify 00000000 as the file position Data length command and response The number of bytes to be written Note A new file with a file capacity of O no data will be created if SINGLE FILE WRITE is executed with 0000 as the data length File data response The data to be written to the file 10 39 MEMORY CARD FORMAT 188 Formats a memory card Always execu
118. nodes at intervals less than the message communications time Be sure that the interval between sending messages i e the interval for execut ing communications instructions from the PC and the interval for receiving mes sages at any one node are longer than the message communications time Re fer to 14 2 Message Communications Time for details on the message commu nications time 9 2 FINS Commands Responses 118 Note The FINS communication protocol was developed by OMRON for use with fac tory automation control devices FINS communications enable reading writing PC memory and controlling operation without extensive programming in the user program in the PC FINS communications use an independent system of addresses that does not rely on the addresses used in the DeviceNet Network This enables communications not only with nodes on the DeviceNet Network but also with devices and PCs connected via other FA networks such as the SYSMAC NET and SYSMAC LINK Networks Although FINS communications enable communications between different net works they can be used for communications only within one DeviceNet Net work FINS Commands Responses Section 9 2 9 2 1 Sending Receiving FINS Command Responses Finsheader O Olofolojo _ _ UJ FINS commands are sent using the CMND 194 instruction for CVM1 and CV series PCs and the IOWR instructions for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs Sending receiving FINS commands respon
119. not be mounted to the same PC 15 Communications Specifications Section 1 4 1 4 Communications Specifications 16 Note Communications protocol DeviceNet Supported connections communications Master Slave Remote I O and explicit messages Peer to peer FINS commands Both conform to DeviceNet specifications Connection forms Combination of multi drop and T branch connections for trunk or drop lines Baud rate 500 kbps 250 kbps or 125 kbps switchable Communications media Special 5 wire cables 2 signal lines 2 power lines 1 shield line Communications 500 kbps distances Network length 100 m max Drop line length 6 m max Total drop line length 39 m max 250 kbps Network length 250 m max see note 1 Drop line length 6 m max Total drop line length 78 m max 125 kbps Network length 500 m max see note 1 Drop line length 6 m max Total drop line length 156 m max Communications power supply 24 VDC supplied externally Max number of nodes 64 nodes including Configurator when used Max number of Masters Without Configurator 1 With Configurator 63 Max number of Slaves 63 Slaves Communications cycle time see note 2 Without Configurator Calculated from conditions Ex Input Slaves 16 pt 16 Output Slaves 16 pt 16 Cycle time at 500 kbps 9 7 ms With Configurator Set between 2 and 500 ms Calculated
120. not treated as an error and normal processing contin ues The following commands are used CMND 194 S D C Reading the Error History S D01000 First command word at local node Settings hex D01000 2102 Command Code D01001 0000 Command parameters D01002 0014 Command parameters to read 20 records D D02000 First response word at local node C D00000 First control word Settings hex D00000 0006 Number of command bytes D00001 00D2 Number of response bytes D00002 0001 Destination network address 01 D00003 05FE Destination node address 05 Destination FINS unit address FE Master Unit D00004 0000 Response communications port 0 no retries D00005 0064 Response monitoring time Clearing the Error History S D01003 First command word at local node Settings hex D010003 2103 Command Code D D02000 First response word at local node C D00006 First control word Settings hex D00006 0002 Number of command bytes D00007 0004 Number of response bytes D00008 0001 Destination network address 01 D00009 O5FE Destination node address 05 Destination FINS unit address FE Master Unit D00010 0000 Response communications port 0 no retries D00011 0064 Response monitoring time Error History Section 15 2 A50015 041 BSET 0000 D00000 D02999 Sets 0000 in D00000 to D02999 FirstScan Flag 030 Mov 0006 D00000 Place data into control data words to sp
121. number Each message consists of 32 ASCII characters 32 by tes The total number of bytes of the messages is calculated as follows The number of messages 32 bytes If no message has been registered for a message number that has been re quested 32 spaces ASCII 20 will be returned 10 28 MESSAGE CLEAR Clears messages generated with MSG 195 179 FAL FALS READ Section 10 29 Note Command Block Response Block Parameters 1 The MESSAGE READ MESSAGE CLEAR refer to 10 27 MESSAGE CLEAR and FAL FALS READ commands refer to 10 29 FAL FALS READ share the same command code They are distinguished by bits 14 and 15 of the two byte parameter following the command code To clear messages bit 14 must be ON 0 and bit 15 must be OFF 0 2 If any other device holds the access right messages will not be cleared 09 20 Command Message no code 09 20 Command Response code code Message no command Turn ON the bits of the messages to be cleared First byte Second byte Bit 15 14 13 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 10 0 f LY ry LY i i ry ry LY Set to 0 Message no 0 t Message no 1 01 Message clear Message no 2 m fh zits Fader aa Message no 3 iasa egal a ea a a Pat Message no 4 IS 23 oye A nE Message no 5 iad Sy po ye ve oe Ayal cag a Message no 6 na nn Slag de sina Sue eng a as
122. operation if necessary 7 segment displays still display Replace the Master Unit if this doesn t correct the problem The display usually lasts for 1 s after the create scan list operation or 0 1 s after the clear scan list operation 265 Troubleshooting Section 15 3 15 3 2 Slave Unit Troubleshooting Red Indicator Use the following table to troubleshoot problems in a Slave that has a red indica ON or Flashing tor that is ON or flashing Error Probable cause The MS indicator is a constant red The Slave Unit is faulty Replace the Unit The MS indicator is flashing red e Check that the Slave s baud rate setting is correct The setting must be 125 kbps 250 kbps or 500 kbps Restart the Unit after changing the baud rate e Replace the Unit if the MS indicator continues to flash red even though the baud rate setting is correct After the MS indicator turns green the NS indicator doesn t flash green it turns red immediately Restart the faulty Slave Unit after checking the following points e Make sure that the Master and Slaves baud rate settings all match If they don t match set all of the baud rates to the same value e Check for a node address duplication If necessary change the node address settings so that each node has a unique number e See the troubleshooting steps below under the error heading The NS indicator lights green but turns re
123. series PCs Routing Tables 122 There are two instructions that can be executed to send and receive data from CVM1 and CV series PCs SEND 192 and RECV 193 There is another instruction that can be executed to send any FINS command CMND 194 The DeviceNet Master Unit must be registered in the local network table of the CVM1 or CV series PC to execute SEND 192 RECV 193 or CMND 194 instructions from a CVM1 or CV series PCs The commands will not be sent and cannot be received from other CVM1 or CV series PCs if the Master Unit is not registered in the routing table Commands can be received from CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs without the routing table The local network table of the routing tables lists the unit numbers of the Com munications Units mounted to the PC and the addresses of the Networks to which each Unit belongs An example local network table is shown below Unit 04 Unit 05 Unit 06 Ve Unit 07 Network 1 Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 Address of local CPU Bus Unit s network unit number The unit number of the DeviceNet Master Unit as a CPU Bus Unit is the number set on the rotary switches on the front panel The network address is the address of the Network to which the CPU Bus Unit is connected Routing tables are set from the Support Software using the following display to input the settings Local Metwork Table ee a a S
124. specified words is returned in sequence starting from the beginning address The required number of bytes in total is cal culated as follows No of bytes required by each item x No of items Memory Areas The following data can be read refer to 10 2 Memory Area Designations for PC word bit address designations Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes CIO TR CPU Bus Bit status 00 1 Link and Auxiliary Word contents 80 2 Timer Counter Completion Flag status 01 1 PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 Transition Flag status 03 1 Step Flag status 04 1 Forced status Bit status 05 1 Word contents 85 2 Expansion DM Word contents specified bank 90 to 97 2 banks 0 to 7 Word contents current bank 98 2 Action Flag status 1B e Note Refer to 10 2 2 Data Configurations for the various data configurations MEMORY AREA WRITE Section 10 5 10 5 MEMORY AREA WRITE Writes data to the specified number of consecutive words starting from the spe cified word All words must be in the same memory area here all memory areas with the same memory area code are considered as one area Note 1 The MEMORY AREA WRITE command can be executed regardless of the PC s operating mode It is the user s responsibility to program steps to pro hibit this command from being executed when the PC is in RUN mode if such protection is necessary Execute the CONTROLLER STATUS READ
125. supply error or transmission timeout is corrected the indicators will show just the communications stoppage code A0 Communications are stopped by the DIP switch When communications can t be restarted with Slaves that were setting but don t resume after toggling the communicating normally before the stoppage stop the Clear Communications Error Stoppage Bit communications again Check that the Slave has started up and perform the clear communications error stoppage operation It may be necessary to perform the operation twice if the network contains another company s Slave that takes a long time to join the network Scan List Problems Use the following table to troubleshoot scan list problems Error Probable cause A scan list couldn t be created by the create Neither the create scan list nor clear scan list operations can be scan list operation performed until the I O Data Communications flag goes ON There is a delay after the power is first turned ON and after the scan list clear A scan list couldn t be cleared by the clear ae operation is executed scan list operation Make sure that the I O Data Communications flag is ON before attempting to execute the create scan list or clear scan list operations The create scan list or clear scan list Restart the Master Unit execute the clear scan list operation and operation was executed but the Master s then the create scan list
126. temperature Operating 0 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Max instantaneous output Less than 65 A peak current Overvoltage protection Must be provided Overcurrent protection Must be provided max current 125 Startup time Must reach 5 of final output voltage within 250 ms Startup overshoot 0 2 max Insulation Between output and AC power and between output and chassis ground Standards Required UL Recommended FCC Class B CSA TUV and VDE Ambient humidity 30 to 90 with no condensation Surge current capacity 10 max 54 SECTION 6 Communications Power Supply This section explains the various considerations involved in providing a communications power supply 621 Basic Concept wich wide wid kbd ee a ea eet ge ied ed 56 6 2 FloW Ghart 3 00 unin nna aka thas whi SAA Mar iin whi shee hee tee a a ee 57 6 2 1 Determining the Communications Power Supply 005 57 6 3 Locating the Power Supply 0 0 eee eee eee 58 6 3 1 Power Supply Location Patterns 0 0 eee eee eee eee 58 6 3 2 Setting the Location of the Power Supply 00 00 0 0005 59 6 3 3 Calculating the Location of the Power Supply 0 0000 59 6 4 Step 1 Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply from a Graph 59 6 4 1 Determining the Best Location of the Power Supply from a Graph 60
127. the relevant explanation in the CompoBus DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 for details Is the baud rate the same on all of the nodes Has the hold clear outputs for communications error setting DIP switch pin 10 been set on Output Slaves Refer to the relevant explanation in the CompoBus DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 for details Protective sheet Was the protective sheet removed after mounting and wiring Master Are the connectors and cables to the Master connected correctly Are the connectors and cables to the Slaves connected correctly Terminating Resistors Have Terminating Resistors been connected at both ends of the trunk line Has a resistance of 121 Q been used Max network length Is the length of the network within specifications Refer to 3 2 1 Maximum Network Length for details Drop line length Are all drop lines 6 m or shorter Is the total length of all of the drop lines within specifications Refer to 3 2 3 Total Drop Line Length for details Cables Does the cable meet the required specifications Are the cables separated from any power or high voltage lines Have the cables been handled carefully without excessive force Communications power supply Power supply capacity Has the power supply requirement been calculated using each node s current consumption Refer to 7 6 Supplying Communications Pow
128. the MRES classification If bit 7 of the first byte is ON a network relay error has occurred Refer to Network Relay Errors in this appendix for details on troubleshooting the error If bit 6 or 7 of the second byte is ON an error has occurred in the PC or computer returning the response Refer to the operation manual for the device returning the response for details when troubleshooting the error Response Codes and Troubleshooting The table below lists response codes main and sub codes returned after execution of the FINS commands the probable cause of errors and recommended remedies Upon receipt of some commands the destination node will issue a request to another node the other node is referred to as the third node Main code Sub Probable cause Check point Remedy code 00 Normal 00 sR _ completion 01 Service was interrupted Check the contents of the destination transmission area of third node Data link status Check the data link status 01 Local node error 01 Local node not part of Local node status in Add to Network Network network 02 Token time out node Max node address Set the local node s node address address too large below the maximum node address 03 Transmission failed Node Check communications with missing send buffer internode echo test If the test insufficient other problem fails check network 04 Maximum number of Number of frames Ei
129. the best location for the power supply cannot be determined from the graphs The second method calculates the best location for each actual node and does not estimate the worst possible configuration for the power sup ply Basically in the DeviceNet CompoBus D network the permissible maximum voltage drop within the system can be specified at 5 V for a power supply line V or V by calculating the specifications for the voltage of the communications power supply 24 VDC and the input voltage of the communications power sup ply of each device 11 to 25 VDC Of the permissible maximum voltage drop within the system 5 V the permissi ble voltage drop in the trunk lines and drop lines are 4 65 V and 0 35 V respec tively Voltage Drop In the DeviceNet network the voltage drop at the communications cables taking the allowance into consideration is 5 V or less according to the spec ifications for the communications power supply device 24 VDC and com munications power supply for each node 11 to 25 VDC e V Voltage drop Va V4 V2 Voltage supplied Sy to each node V Voltage drop Vg Voltage supplied to communications power supply device V4 Voltage supplied to the communications power supply device Con sider the ambient variations of the power supply voltage and take V1 to be 23 V Vo Voltage supplied to each node Consider the allowance and take Vo to be 13 V or greater Va Voltage drop at the power suppl
130. to 25 VDC supply voltage Supplied from the communications connector Current consumption Communications power 45 mA max 24 VDC Internal circuits 250 mA max 5 VDC Supplied from the PC Weight 250g General specifications Conform to C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS specifications Master Unit Components The following diagram shows the main components of the Master Unit The func tions of these components are described below EC oT Indicators EVEN O Rear panel DIP switch These pins have the following functions Pins 1 to 6 Node address Pins 7 and 8 Reserved Always OFF Rotary switch This switch sets the Master s single digit hexade cimal unit number Front panel DIP switch These pins have the following functions Pins 1 and 2 Baud rate Pin 3 Continue stop communications for error Pin 4 Reserved Always OFF Communications connector Connect the Network communications cable to this connector The communications power is also supplied through this connector Indicators The indicators indicate the status of the Master Unit and Network When the Network is operating normally the 7 segment display shows the Mas ter Unit s node address when an error has occurred it shows an error code or the faulty node s node address 40 CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs Section 4 3 Note The indicators and 7 segment display can be used
131. to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below 3 2 mA The converted data is set to FFFF when the open circuit detection function is activated The disconnection indicator will be lit at the same time Check the Analog input s cables for broken wires or incorrect wiring When the input signal rises above 0 8 V or 3 2 mA the converted data will automatically return to its normal range The disconnection indicator will go out at the same time 268 Troubleshooting Section 15 3 15 3 4 Temperature Input Terminal Troubleshooting Use the following table to troubleshoot problems in the Temperature Input Termi nal eS o Probable cause The temperature data is 7FFF when the Check the temperature sensor cables for broken wires or incorrect wiring disconnection indicator is lit Check that input cables are wired properly Check that the cold junction compensator is connected properly applicable to the DRT1 TSO4T only 15 3 5 C200H I O Link Unit Troubleshooting When an error occurs in the C200H I O Link Unit and the error code is displayed by the 7 segment display use the following table to troubleshoot the problem If the error code is not shown on the 7 segment display use the table under the heading dentifying Errors from Symptoms to troubleshoot the problem Identifying Errors from Seven segment Display Display Probable cause Possible remedy Attempt was made to set the Link Area when Turn OFF bit 00 of the software sw
132. to 7 1 Registered 0 Not registered The bits corresponding to I O Unit with errors are turned ON Bits 8 to 15 correspond to addresses 0 to 7 1 Error 0 No error or not part of network Probable Causes of Errors and Countermeasures Use the status area to determine the error content and the I O Unit address where the error occurred and then take action according to the following table Probable cause A hardware error has occurred in an I O Unit Countermeasure Replace the I O Unit in which the hardware error has occurred Communications power supply overcurrent to an I O Unit The power supply to the I O Unit interface has shorted The current consumption of the I O Unit interface exceeds 0 4 A Check that the I O Unit communications cable has not shorted Check that the total current consumption of the communications power supply for the I O Units does not exceed 0 4 A After taking the above measures restart the Communications Unit If the problem persists replace the Communications Unit I O Unit interface error The end connector is not con nected The I O Unit Connecting Cable is broken There is a lot of noise Too many I O Units are con nected After turning OFF the power supply to the Com munications Unit and all I O Units attach the end connector to the I O Unit interface connector 2 on the terminal I O Unit Replace the broken cable Remove the source of t
133. value takes priority if longer Max communications cycle time with multiple Masters see note 3 Calculated from conditions Ex Input Slaves 16 pt 16 Output Slaves 16 pt 16 Max cycle time at 500 kbps 18 ms Error control checks CRC error check Terminating Resistors Required at both ends of trunk line 1 Indicates the length when thick cables are used Reduce the network length to 100 m max when using thin cables When using both thick and thin cables together refer to Combining Thick and Thin Cables in 3 2 1 Maximum Net work Length 2 Indicates the maximum time for remote I O communications from a Master to a specific Slave until remote I O communications are conducted again for the same Slave 3 The communications cycle time when more than one Master is present on a single network Outline of Configurator Section 1 5 1 5 Outline of Configurator The Configurator is required to use any of the following functions e User set remote I O allocations e More than one Master Unit per PC i e per CPU Unit e More than one Master Unit per network e Setting communications parameters The Configurator is run on an IBM PC AT or compatible computer connected to the network as a DeviceNet node Connection is made either through an ISA Board or PCMCIA Card as shown in the following diagrams Configurators Model number 3G8F5 DRM21 Components Dedicated ISA Board and Configurato
134. 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 words 4 words Connector GT1 DA04MX Outputs made by Oto 5V MOLEX 1to5V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V Counter 3 words 3 words M3 terminal GT1 CT01 1 external Unit block input 2 external outputs Note The front panel indicators and other parts of Analog Input Units Analog Output Units and Counter Units differ from those of other I O Units These Units belong to a group called Special I O Units One I O Unit Connecting Cable cable length 40 mm is included with each I O Unit One end connector is attached to the Communications Unit An I O Unit Connecting Cable with a cable length of 1 m GCN1 100 is sold separately see below Note For details on MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Units refer to the CompoBus D Devi ceNet MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Operation Manual W348 Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D Section 1 1 Features Remote I O Communications Master Unit Output area Input area B Allocated in I O memory e g IR CIO Area Automatically input output Note Input and output areas are automatically allocated in fixed areas unless a Confi gurator is used A Configurator can be used to freely allocate input blocks 1 and 2 and output blocks 1 and 2 anywhere in I O memory Master Unit model Without With Configurator Configurator Max No of Slave CVM1 CV Series 63 nodes nodes per Master
135. 0 to CIO 0099 and so in systems with a large number of I O points be sure to edit I O tables using CX Programmer I O tables cannot be edited with a Programming Console For details refer to the CX Programmer Operation Manual Using the Configurator By performing user set allocation using the Configurator it is possible to change the position of areas used for DeviceNet output For details refer to 8 4 User set Allocations and the CompoBus D Configurator Operation manual W328 Attempting to use DeviceNet remote communications I O functions with the same areas allocated to actual I O for Basic I O Units and to DeviceNet Slaves may cause I O Units the CPU Unit program or Slaves to malfunction The following diagram shows the dimensions of the Master Unit Refer to the PC s Installation Guide for the dimensions of the Unit when it is mounted to the Backplane All dimensions are in mm Boe fap Macuuine No Hi K Pretty gt ON a sv 3 este 2 or HCH SECTION 5 Specifications for Connectable Devices This section provides specifications for the Cables and Connectors used in the DeviceNet network 5 1 Cables and Connectors 3 469360 Gobi ed eee Se Se Ct oe Rae Wee ee wee 46 5 1 1 Communications Cables 0 0 e ee ee ce eee 46 D122 gt SCONNECOS neons as cee teach ebastaaine she ae Haake AEH RE Bee 48 5 1 3 Special Connector Screwdriver
136. 0001 if the Equals Hli 0001 F Flag is ON Equals Flag 005 JME 0002 000002 040 TER XFER 0005 D00097 D00098 Uses indirect addressing with D00097 and D00098 to store 5 words of data in consecutive words removing the error history data from the response data 074 ADDL 00050005 D00097 D00097 Adds the contents of D00097 to 00050005 and stores the results in D00097 and D00098 028 CMP D00098 D00099 Compares the contents of D00098 and D00099 and A50207 030 moves the contents of D00096 to D00098 if the results MOV 00096 D00098 IS less than Less Than Flag 081 SBB D02004 0001 D02004 _ Subtracts 0001 from the contents of D02004 A50006 004 Hir 0002 F Jumps to JME 0002 if contents of D02004 is 0000 Equals Flag 005 JME 0001 000002 D00097 Moves the contents of D00095 to D00097 Shifts 0000 one bit to the left to turn ON CIO 000003 Clears the error history from node 05 in network 01 and stores the response data beginning at D02000 Control data is specified starting at D00006 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the left Stores the completion code in D00006 Shifts 0000 one bit to the right to turn ON CIO 000003 to retry the command Sets 0001 to CIO 0000 to read the contents of the data history again Error History Section 15 2 C200HX HG HE PCs Using lOWR Command Details The following explanation also applies to CS1 seri
137. 01 When this is done set the response monitoring time in C 5 to at least 0014 hex 2 s If it is set to less than 2 s communications may be busy even if the next command is executed after the first one times out 9 4 2 Using IOWR The Message Communications Enabled Flag for the Master Unit is used as an execution condition for IOWR Be sure this Flag is ON before executing IOWR If this Flag is OFF an error may occur in the Special I O Unit 135 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs Section 9 4 The Equals Flag is used to execute the instruction again when IOWR execution ends in an error The status of the Equals Flag can be changed by other instruc tions be careful of its location in the program Execution condition Message Communications Enabled Flag A 25506 Equals Flag Communications Flags Equals Flag Address C200HX HG HE SR 25506 CS1 Series Set by system Functions The Equals Flag turns OFF when an error occurs in writing a command from the CPU Unit to the Master Unit This Flag turns ON after a command has been written normally from the CPU Unit to the Master Unit C200HX HG HE SR25503 CS1 Series Set by system The Error Flag is OFF when all operands and the control code are legal This Flag turns ON when an illegal operand or control code is set or when there is an error in instruction execution such as the following The number of words to wr
138. 0E7 I O verification error This error occurs if the I O table differs from the actual I O points in the System 00F4 Non fatal SFC error This error occurs when there is an error while the PC is executing an SFC program 00F7 Battery error 00F8 rea DM error This error occurs when a mistake has occurred in indirectly addressing the DM rea 00F9 JMP error This error occurs when a jump has been specified without a destination 0200 to 0215 CPU Bus Unit error the rightmost two digits are the unit number in BCD of the Unit that has the error This error occurs if there is a parity error at the time of data transfer between the CPU Bus Unit and CPU or if the CPU Bus Unit has a watchdog timer error 0400 to 0415 CPU Bus Unit setting error the rightmost two digits are the unit number in BCD of the Unit that has the error 4101 to 42FF FAL 006 executed in the user program The following codes can be used only when the PC is in PROGRAM mode Error code Meaning FFFF All errors cleared 809F Cycle time too long 80C0 to 80C7 I O bus error This error occurs when there is an error in an I O bus check or a Unit has been removed or added when power is turned on to the PC 80E0 I O setting error This error occurs if the I O table differs from actual I O points in the System 80E1 I O points overflow 80E9 Duplication error This error occurs if the same unit number is assig
139. 1 Node 63 Node 62 To Slaves From Slaves Node 0 Node 1 To Slaves Node 62 Node 63 Node 0 Node 1 1 From Slaves Node 63 Node 62 CS1 series PCs IR 50 IR 50 Output IR 51 IR 99 a IR 98 IR 99 IR 350 IR 350 ae IR 351 IR 399 IR 398 IR 399 C200HS PCs IR 50 IR 50 Output IR 51 IR 81 ae IR 80 IR 81 IR350 H IR 350 st IR 351 IR 381 IR 380 IR 381 Node 0 Node 1 To Slaves Node 48 Node 49 Node 0 Node 1 1 From Slaves Node 49 Node 48 Node 0 Node 1 To Slaves Node 62 Vode 63 Node 0 Node 1 From Slaves Node 62 Node 63 Note With the CS1 Series the DeviceNet Output Area CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 is con tained inside the I O Area CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 For this reason in systems with a large number of I O points edit the I O table with the CX programmer so that there is no overlap of area allocation Overview Section 8 1 User set Allocations A Configurator can be used to allocate blocks 1 and 2 in the output area and in put blocks 1 and 2 in the input area in any order to the node addresses Each node is allocated at least one byte leftmost or rightmost If a Slave re quires more than one input or one
140. 1 if the last file is included L Bits 0 to 7 second byte Bits 8 to 15 first byte File data response Each file data consists of 20 bytes The specified files will be transmitted in sequence starting from the first file The total number of bytes required is calculated as follows No of read files x 20 bytes Bit 15 OFF 0 Without last file Bit 15 ON 1 With last word file Bits 0 to 14 No of files read SINGLE FILE READ Section 10 37 The configuration for each file data is as follows 1st byte 20th byte 12 bytes File name Date time File capacity File Name The name of the file refer to 10 3 Volume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the file name Date Time The date and time that the file was created see below File Capacity The capacity bytes of the file Date Time The configuration of the clock data four bytes or 32 bits is as follows 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte Bit31 31 to 2524 to 2120 to 1615 to 1110 o 54 to 0 7 bits 4 bits 5 bits 5 bits 6 bits 5 bits Year Month Day Hour Minute Second 0 to 119 1t012 1to31 0 to 23 0 to 59 0 to 29 All data values are in BCD Year Add 1980 Second Multiply by two 10 37 SINGLE FILE READ Reads the contents of a file stored in the file device connected to the PC Command Block
141. 1 1 PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 EM Word contents 90 to 97 98 2 A8 to AF Note Refer to 11 2 2 Data Configurations for the various data configurations 11 6 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ Reads the memory areas according to the addresses specified with the COM POSITE READ REGISTRATION command 01 11 Note 1 Although this command is addressed to the CPU Unit it is actually pro cessed by the DeviceNet Master Unit The command will thus result in an error if it is not sent to a CPU Unit through a DeviceNet network 2 If there is an error in the command code or a read address no data will be read 202 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ Section 11 7 Command Block Response Block Parameters 01 10 e Sf Command code 01 10 Me af Command Response Data Data code code Memory area code Memory area code Memory area code response The data area to read Data response The data in the specified with the COMPOSITE READ REG ISTRATION command will be returned in sequence The number of bytes re turned for each item depends on the item that is specified 11 7 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ Command Block Response Block Parameters Note Registers the contents to be read with the COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ command 01 10 Up to 100 items can be registered for reading for 2 by tes data up to 50 items for 4 byte data i e up to 200 bytes of data can be
142. 1 1 Network Components ssas serer ska e dae eset da nda sede ne bee 28 321 2 Connections 2A ren ek Eee ei es tae See Ee ee PER et ease 29 3 2 Network Configuration Restrictions 0 0 cece eee eee 30 3 2 1 Maximum Network Length 000 30 3 2 2 Drop Line Lengths 2 064 pike bee yee Boe ee Soa pa Ede Sacks 31 3 2 3 Total Drop Line Length 0 0 eee eee 31 3 2 4 Baud Rate and Communications Distance 0 00 02 e eee eee ee 32 3 2 5 Locating Terminating Resistors 0 0 00 cece eee eee 32 27 Network Configuration Section 3 1 3 1 Network Configuration Terminating Resistors are connected at each end of the trunk line Trunk line The following diagram shows the configuration of a DeviceNet CompoBus D network Terminating Resistors DeviceNet are connected at each cables are used end of the trunk line Communications power supply DC24 ower Supply Tap Trunk or T branch Tap M Trunk line M Trunk line T Trunk line Trunk line 7 line T branch DeviceNet Cables are used Drop line Drop line T branch A A rs i T branch Tap Tap Tap Drop line T branch Tap Tap Drop line Drop line Node Node Node T
143. 1 72 0 022 x the number of words refreshed C200HX C200HG and C200HE C200HS 2 27 0 077 x the number of words refreshed The number of words refreshed is the total number of words in the I O area that are used by the Slaves including any unused words between words actually used by the Slaves For example if there are only two Input Slaves with node addresses 1 and 5 the 5 input words for nodes 1 through 5 would be refreshed even though the input words for nodes 2 3 and 4 are unused If message communications are being performed just add the number of words used in message communications to the above number of words for whenever messages are being processed 225 Remote I O Communications Characteristics Section 14 1 14 1 2 I O Response Time CVM1 and CV series PCs Asynchronous Mode 226 Note The I O response time is the time it takes from the reception of an input signal at an Input Slave to the output of the corresponding output signal at an Output Slave The following timecharts show the minimum and maximum I O response times of the DeviceNet network for a CVM1 or CV series PC operating in asynchro nous mode Minimum I O Response Time The minimum I O response time occurs when the DeviceNet Master Unit re freshing is executed just after the input signal is received by the Master and instruction execution is completed within one peripheral servicing cycle Instruction execution cycle time
144. 1007 0005 Command parameters D 0008 Destination information Destination unit number 00 hex No of words to transfer 08 BCD Assume that IOWR has been allocated a function code e g 18 139 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs Section 9 4 25315 BSET 71 First Scan Flag 0000 DM 0000 DM 2999 MOV 21 0001 25315 MOV 21 First 0600 Scan Flag DM 0000 MOV 21 8207 DM 1000 MOV 21 D000 DM 1001 MOV 21 0064 DM 1002 MOV 21 0008 DM 1003 MOV 21 0101 DM 1004 MOV 21 8203 DM 1005 MOV 21 E800 DM 1006 MOV 21 Message Communications Enabled Flag ON after re 0005 sponse received for mes sages communications DM 1007 00002 10112 executed a previous cycle i CMP 20 0000 DM 2001 MOV 21 Equals Flag 2001 DM 0006 ASR 26 ASR 26 140 Sets 0000 in DM 0000 to DM 2999 Sets 0001 in IR 000 Place data into control data word to specify re sponse destination node address 06 and destination unit address 00 Place data into source words to specify first response word DM 2000 using variable area specification response monitor time 10 0 s No of command by tes 8 Sets the MEMORY AREA READ command into DM 1004 to DM 1007 Compares contents of DM 2001 to 0000 after IOWR execution and response reception have been completed the previous cycle Places the contents of DM 2001 into DM 0006 if the comparis
145. 12 bytes as follows 2E Nice 28 of Volume Label File Name Extension Period Volume Label File Name Each volume label or file name must have eight ASCII characters with or without spaces ASCII 20 If less than eight letters are used add spaces to the end of the label name Extension An extension can be added to each volume label file name so that the files can be classified Each extension must have three ASCII characters with or without spaces If less than three letters are used add spaces to the end of the exten sion Period Add a period ASCII 2E between the volume label file name and extension 157 MEMORY AREA READ Section 10 4 10 4 MEMORY AREA READ Reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive memory area words starting from the specified word All words must be in the same memory area here all memory areas with the same memory area code are considered as one Command Block Response Block Parameters 158 area 01 01 Mae ey Command code Memory area code Beginning address No of items 01 01 Command Response Data code code Memory area code command The data area to read Beginning address command The address of the first word bit flag to read from memory No of items command The number of items to be read Data response The data from the
146. 20 bytes A E E Moo ooy Command Response Model number f Model number code code Unit address Unit address No of Units Data Parameters Unit address command and response The unit address of the first Unit whose model number is to be read If the specified Unit does not exist the CON TROLLER DATA READ command is executed from the next Unit Specify the following for the unit address CPU 00 CPU Bus Unit 1046 unit number in hexadecimal No of Data Units command The number of data units for which the model number is to be read A number between 01 and 19 hexadecimal can be speci fied If the number of data units is not specified 19 25 data units will be used No of Units response The number of Units for which a model number is be ing returned If bit 7 is ON 1 the model number of the last Unit is being returned Unit address and model number response The unit address and model number The model number is provided in up to 20 ASCII characters 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ Reads the status of the Controller Note To read the error log read the appropriate Auxiliary Area words or execute the ERROR LOG READ command refer to 10 34 ERROR LOG READ Command Block o6 0i Command code Response Block o6 0i 16 bytes Command Response Fatal error Non fatal Message FAL Error cod
147. 204 205 writing 161 162 203 E error logs clearing 212 reading 211 error messages 179 Error Communications Stoppage Flag 220 errors 96 97 215 clearing 185 187 212 communications control bits 215 indicators Master Unit 242 302 Slave Unit 247 reading 182 186 response codes 277 setup CVM1 and CV series PCs 96 97 verification CVM1 and CV series PCs 97 explicit messages sending 143 F FAL FALS messages 182 FAL FALS no 179 fatal error data 178 files changing file names 192 checking data 193 comparing 194 195 196 copying 192 creating deleting volume labels 191 deleting 191 file names 159 reading 188 189 transferring 194 195 196 writing 190 FINS commands CS1 series and C200HX HG HE CPU Units 199 CVM1 and CV series CPU Units 153 errors 277 Master Units 209 response codes errors 277 G grounding network connection 77 T O allocation C200HS PCs 96 C200HX HG HE PCs 96 CS1 series PCs 95 CVM1 and CV series PCs 95 T O area overlap error CVM1 and CV series PCs 96 97 T O Configuration Error Flag 219 T O Data Communications Flag 220 T O response times 228 maximum CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 233 234 CVM1 and CV series PCs in asynchronous mode 229 CVM1 and CV series PCs in synchronous mode 231 minimum CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 232 CVM1 and CV series PCs in asynchronous mode 228 CVM1 and CV series PCs in synchronous mode
148. 3 3 Unit or a Bus Off error is detected A Bus Off error occurs when an unacceptably high error rate is detected through the communications cable The Error Remote I O Communications Stopped Flag bit 14 will turn ON when ever this flag turns ON Configuration Error Flag Bit 03 This flag is turned ON 1 when a configuration error occurs A configuration er ror will occur in the following cases e A data error occurred in the configuration data for the scan list or other data Configuration data error e A PC mounting error occurred for a C200HX C200HG C200HE or C200HS PC e A routing table error occurred for a CVM1 or CV series PC The Error Remote I O Communications Stopped Flag bit 14 will turn ON when ever this flag turns ON Setup Error Flag Bit 04 This flag is turned ON 1 when a setup error occurs A setup error will occur in the following cases e The same remote I O words are allocated to more than one Slave I O area overlap e The I O area range has been exceeded I O area range over e A Slave that is not supported has been mounted The Error Remote I O Communications Stopped Flag bit 14 will turn ON when ever this flag turns ON Transmission Error Flag Bit 05 This flag is turned ON 1 when a transmission error occurs A transmission error will occur in the following cases e The communications power supply to the Master Unit isn t ON Network power supply error e There is no response from a Slav
149. 4 2 Inspection Be sure to inspect the system periodically to keep it in its optimal operating condition In general inspect the system once every 6 to 12 months but inspect more frequently if the system is used with high temperature or humidity or under dirty dusty conditions Inspection Equipment Prepare the following equipment before inspecting the system Required Equipment Have a standard and phillips head screwdriver multimeter alcohol and a clean cloth 271 Maintenance Section 15 4 Equipment that could be needed Depending on the system conditions a synchroscope oscilloscope thermome ter or hygrometer to measure humidity might be needed Inspection Procedure Check the items in the following table and correct any items that are below stan dard Standard Equipment Environmental Ambient and cabinet temperature See below Thermometer Ambient and cabinet humidity See below Dust dirt accumulation None Installation Are the Units installed securely No looseness conditions Hygrometer Are the communications No looseness connectors fully inserted Are the external wiring screws tight Are the connecting cables undamaged No looseness No damage The following table shows the acceptable temperature and humidity ranges for DeviceNet Units Acceptable temperature Acceptable humidity Master Unit 0 C to 55 C 10 to 90 1 0 Link Unit Transistor Remote Ter
150. 41 BSET 1234 D01000 D01004 First Scan Flag 030 MOV 0005 D00000 030 MOV 0001 D00001 030 MOV 0600 D00002 030 MOV 0000 D00003 030 MOV 0064 D00004 030 MOV 0001 0000 Execution condition 0000 A502 1501 00 00 12 192 a f s SEND D01000 D03000 D00000 Port Message Enabled Commu Med 060 Flag nications Enabled ASLE 110009 Flag 0000 A502 A502 1501 01 00 08 12 030 H H H MOV A503 D00006 Port Port Message 061 Enabled Execution Commu ASR 0000 Flag Error Flag nications Enabled Flag The following command is used SEND 192 First source word at local source node First destination word at destination node First control word settings are given below hex S D C Number of words to send Destination network address Destination node address 06 Destination unit address 00 CPU Unit Response communications port 0 no retries Response monitoring time Sets 1234 in D01000 to D01004 Places data into control data words to specify the 5 words to be transmitted to the CPU Unit of node 06 of network 01 through port 0 with response 0 retries and a response monitoring time of 10 0 seconds Places 0001 into CIO 0000 Transfers 5 words of data from D01000 to D01004 from the PC of node 05 to D03000 to D03004 in the PC of node 06 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the left Stores the completion code in A503 to D00006 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the right to reset CI
151. 5 x 0 15 0 069 V Total voltage drop for System 2 0 0233 0 069 0 0923 V 4 65 V Thus the best location for the nodes can be determined by using the first formula e Calculate the voltage drop of each group in each system when the commu nications and the internal circuit power supplies are the same System 1 Group 1 20 x 0 015 2 x 0 005 x 0 885 0 2744 V Group 2 10 x 0 015 1 x 0 005 x 1 1 0 1705 V Total voltage drop for System 1 0 2744 0 1705 0 4449 V 0 65 V Thus the best location for the nodes can be determined by using the second formula System 2 Group 3 10 x 0 015 1 x 0 005 x 0 5 0 0775 V Dual Power Supply Section 6 7 Group 4 30 x 0 015 2 x 0 005 x 0 85 0 391 V Total voltage drop for System 2 0 0775 0 391 0 4685 V 0 65 V Thus the best location for the nodes can be determined by using the second formula 6 6 Step 3 Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies Go to Step 3 if the best location for the nodes cannot be calculated from the for mulae In the third step there are multiple power supplies and the power supply system is split Splitting the Power Supply System e Be sure to use a Power Supply Tap for each power supply when the network is supplied by two or more power supplies e Remove the fuses in the Power Supply Tap to split the power supply system Once the power supply system is split return to Step 1 or 2 and de
152. 500 kbps 101 Default Remote I O Allocation Section 8 3 DRT1 ID16X Remote Adapter 2 Allocated points pin 1 OFF and pin 2 ON and the setting to stop communications for communications errors pin 3 ON 21 234 A ov fp oF Make the initial settings for the Slaves Node address DIP switch settings Pins 9 and 10 Inputs Outputs pins 1 to 6 0 pins 1 to 6 OFF 500 kbps pin 7 OFF and Not used OFF Pee Lee 12345678 910 DRT1 OD08 Output Terminal pin 8 1 pin 1 ON at Pin 9 ON to hold lela cae outputs for comm errors Pin 10 not used OFF CQM1 DRT21 I O Link Unit Internal in CQM1 Pin 9 not used OFF Pin 10 ON to hold s1 2345678910 16 pts outputs for comm errors DRT1 AD04 Analog Input Unit 102 4 analog input pts Aa O Oo ON OO 10 Pin 9 OFF to use 4 inputs Pin 10 OFF to not use averaging 3 pins 1 and 2 ON 12345678 910 Mount and wire the Master Unit Connect a Programming Device to the PC turn on the PC and create the I O table Turn off power to the PC Master Unit Turn on power to all Slaves and turn on the communications power supply Turn on power to the PC Master Unit Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode Monitor the Registered Slave Data Area to see if all Slaves are communicat ing Turn ON the Enable Scan List software switch i e bit 00 of
153. 6 3 2 Setting the Location of the Power Supply Determine whether or not the current can be supplied normally by finding the current capacity required by each node and the voltage drop in the cables to be used to provide power Calculate the values below in advance e The current capacity required by each node e The distance between the power supply and each node 6 3 3 Calculating the Location of the Power Supply There are two methods to find the best location of the communications power supply on the trunk line e Simple calculation from a graph e Calculation by formula Calculating the voltage drop from resistance and cur rent consumption of the communications cables Each drop line must satisfy the equation on page 56 which represents the rela tionship between the drop line length and the current capacity for the drop line e From the graph a hypothetical power supply location can be determined if the conditions calculated in the graph are met by estimating the worst con figuration that has the maximum voltage drop as shown in the diagram below Communications power supply e Even if the power supply specifications cannot be met using the graph the conditions can be met and a hypothetical power supply location deter mined by using the formula Note When the communications power supply and the internal circuit sup ply are the same use the formula to calculate a hypothetical power supply location because it cannot be
154. 6 4 2 Countermeasutes s 80s suk ps k sist g saa E E ts LA eee 60 6 5 Step 2 Calculating the Best Location of the Actual Nodes 0000 0000 63 62521 Pormmulass tities heteanet ae Saat ea a etch aa ie ee A eee ee 64 6 5 2 Countermeasures pus eon vee ete web a hee bebo Ree ee ee SRE te pes 65 6 6 Step 3 Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies 0 67 6 7 Dual Power Supply ss cress baad ceils St ae sola da a aa a a ee ea ale 67 6 8 Configuration Design Checklist 0 0 0 ec eee eee 68 55 Basic Concept Section 6 1 6 1 Basic Concept e The communications power supply must be 24 VDC e Make sure that the power is supplied from the trunk line e When providing power to several nodes from one power supply if possible try to locate the nodes in both directions from the power supply e Provide power through Power Supply Taps It is however possible to use T branch Taps instead when there is one communications power supply in the system and the total current consumption is less than 5 A e The power supply capacity for cables is restricted to 8 A for thick cables and 3 A for thin cables e A single network is usually supplied by one power supply It is however pos sible to have more than one power supply when power supply specifications cannot be met with a single power supply See 6 6 Step 3 Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies e Fully consider the power supp
155. 65 mA max 11 mA max GT1 ROP08 40 mA max 350 mA max Inrush current 30 A max GT1 ROS16 50 mA max 250 mA max Inrush current 30 A max GT1 AD04 50 mA max Internal power supply 100 mA Inrush current 30 A max GT1 ADO08MX 50 mA max Internal power supply 100 mA Inrush current 30 A max GT1 DA04 50 mA max Internal power supply 100 mA Inrush current 30 A max GT1 DA04MX 50 mA max Internal power supply 100 mA Inrush current 30 A max GT1 CT01 90 mA max 9 mA max 1 1 1 1 297 Busoff CAN configurator consumed connection size ODVA produced connection size connection device profile master slave Glossary A Busoff error occurs when there is an unacceptably high error rate on the com munications bus This error is detected when the internal error counter exceeds a specified value The error counter is cleared whenever the Master Unit is started or reset Controller Area Network A communications protocol for a LAN developed for mounting in automobiles The DeviceNet uses CAN technology A device used to make system settings read IDs read write parameters read the network configuration etc OMRON provides a CompoBus D DeviceNet Configurator for OMRON Master Units The size in bytes of the data received through a connection Open DeviceNet Vendor Association A non profit vendor association responsi
156. AON AE Le AEE be 180 10 26 CLOCK WRITE e brate ttes eie n ay wa t nae nane ea Dhe nAn ee SiAn AS EER a 180 T02 MESSAGE READ eenaa a e See A e Se CE AVA 181 10 28 MESSAGE CLEAR oere see u e ee eee ee 181 10 29 FAL FALS READ ontara RA 08 588 habe R RAS eae dine ahd SORA GRACO Hg ioe Ries 182 10 30 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE 0 0 cee nent e en S aS 183 10 31 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE 0 ccc cee een eens 184 10 32 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE oo 505 kha SSS Rasa ae ha a eR ae eae A Re Rak Sh Ales 185 10 33 ERROR CLEAR spresti snan a ed ee ea ek os de oe et Aa ees Cie Eo es 185 10 34 ERROR LOG READ eedd ce nee n tence ete n een nens 186 10 35 ERROR LOG CLEAR ooreen seen ee ee ee a ee ae ee ale eee ee 187 10 36 FILE NAME READ resinae ee ede BW Bes UPR et AE ee hs SA ee 188 10 37 SINGLE FILE READ eedd Sod buat Sc bei di SA Ade a hd 189 10 38 SINGLE FILE WRITE 0 0 eai R eee ene EE nneee 190 10 39 MEMORY CARD FORMAT 0 a d ia a e nee neces 190 10 40 FILE DELETE cannu dsc 8 arnts Sod OR ORE A Ae Doo SEES ARE Gaede Aad Shiba Se 191 10 41 VOLUME LABEL CREATE DELETE 0 0 0 00 cee eee nee 191 10 42 PILE COPY ien a nadec cide eels od A a aa shila abatete eagle toate nes abd 192 10 43 FILE NAME CHANGE 0 0 cc nent teen teen eens 192 10 44 FILE DATA CHECK i e 23 45 2 beta cba ee RA Meee bt ee ee Sek eee ee 193 10 45 MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER 0 000 cece eee nen eee 194 151 152 10 46 P
157. AR 18 to AR 20 Shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit to the left Adds 0003 to the contents of DM 0098 to change to the address to the next word after the time stamp Compares the contents of DM 0098 an DM 0099 Moves the contents of DM 0096 to DM 0098 Not Less Than Flag Subtracts 0001 from the contents of DM 2004 25506 Moves the contents of DM 0095 to DM 0097 and shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit to the left to turn ON IR 00004 to turn ON the execution condition for clearing the error history 261 Error History Section 15 2 00000 Moves the contents of DM 6032 Master Status Area 2 Executi for Unit 00 to IR 001 conaion 10112 00100 naaa Shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit to the left to turn Message Error ON IR 000001 meins eet Enabled Eag Transfers seven words of command data from DM 1010 Flag at the local node to the Master Unit Unit 0 00001 25506 Shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit to the right to turn ON IR 000000 and retry the read command or shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit to the left to turn ON IR 000002 Equals Flag command failed 25506 Equals Flag execution normal o o o 00006 10112 _ Compares the contents of DM 2001 to 0000 Message Commu nications Enabled Flag Moves the contents of DM 2001 to DM 0006 Equal a Shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit to th
158. ARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER 00 00 0000 cece eee eee 10 47 PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER 0 0 0 eee eee eee 10 48 FORCED SET RESET 10 49 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL 195 196 197 198 Command List Section 10 1 10 1 Command List The beginning portions of the command and response blocks up to the com mand codes and the FCS and terminator have been omitted for simplicity but must be added for actual transmission if not automatically generated for the transmission method being used In the illustrations of command and response blocks in this section each box represents one byte i e two hexadecimal or BCD digits Be careful when ad ding the header where each box represents one digit i e four bits The following table lists the FINS commands supported by CVM1 and CV series CPU Units and the PC operating modes during which they are enabled Name Command PC mode Page code RUN MONITOR DEBUG PROGRAM MEMORY AREA READ 01 01 Valid Valid Valid Valid 158 MEMORY AREA WRITE 02 Valid Valid Valid Valid 159 MEMORY AREA FILL 03 Valid Valid Valid Valid 160 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ 04 Valid Valid Valid Valid 160 MEMORY AREA TRANSFER 05 Valid Valid Valid Valid 162 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ 10 Valid Valid Valid Valid 162 REGISTER
159. Area Step Area MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ 04 160 MEMORY AREA TRANSFER 05 162 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ 10 162 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ 11 163 Manipulating parameters PC Setups O tables PARAMETER AREA READ 02 01 164 routing tables etc PARAMETER AREA WRITE 02 165 PARAMETER AREA CLEAR 03 167 Manipulating program areas PROGRAM AREA PROTECT 03 04 168 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR 05 168 PROGRAM AREA READ 06 169 PROGRAM AREA WRITE 07 170 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR 08 171 Controlling operation RUN RUN DEBUG MONITOR modes 04 01 171 STOP PROGRAM mode 02 172 Reading PC model information CONTROLLER DATA READ 05 01 172 CONNECTION DATA READ 02 175 Reading PC status CONTROLLER STATUS READ 06 01 175 CYCLE TIME READ 20 177 120 FINS Commands Responses Section 9 2 Function Name Command Page code Manipulating the PC clock CLOCK READ 07 01 178 CLOCK WRITE 02 178 Manipulating messages MESSAGE READ 09 20 179 MESSAGE CLEAR 179 FAL FALS READ 180 Controlling access rights ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE oc 01 181 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE 02 182 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE 03 183 Manipulating error data ERROR CLEAR 21 01 183 ERROR LOG READ 02 184 ERROR LOG CLEAR 03 185 Manipulating File Memory FILE NAME READ 22 01 186 SINGLE FILE READ 02 187 SINGLE FILE
160. C e I O table in CPU Unit e Error log in CPU Unit e Unit number of Master Unit F6 amp Mnn Flashing PC interface error An error occurred in communications with the PC red Master Unit operation will stop Check the following items and restart the PC CVM1 and CV series PCs e CPU Unit status e IOSP instruction programming methods e CPU Bus Unit servicing setting A015 C200HX HG HE HS PCs e CPU Unit status e Noise interference If the problem cannot be fixed replace the CPU Unit or Master Unit Memory error Master parameters can t be read or written to EEPROM EEPROM error Master Unit operation will stop Bits 00 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Replace the Master Unit Memory error An error occurred during the RAM check in initialization RAM error Master Unit operation will stop Replace the Master Unit Note 1 With the VO original version of the Master Unit Master Unit operation would stop with an F4 error code displayed for a PC mounting error With V1 Master Units remote I O communications will stop for PC mounting errors but Master Unit operation will continue and message communications will be possible In this case remote I O will not be refreshed between the PC and the Master Unit but software switches and the status area will be re freshed 2 With the VO original version of the Master Unit remote I O communica tions would continue with the scan l
161. COMPOSITE READ 11 Valid Valid Valid Valid 163 PARAMETER AREA READ 02 01 Valid Valid Valid Valid 164 PARAMETER AREA WRITE 02 Valid Valid Valid Valid 165 PARAMETER AREA CLEAR 03 Valid Valid Valid Valid 167 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT 03 04 Valid Valid Valid Valid 168 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR 05 Valid Valid Valid Valid 168 PROGRAM AREA READ o6 Valid Valid Valid Valid 169 PROGRAM AREA WRITE 07 Not valid Valid Valid Valid 170 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR 08 Not valid Not valid Not valid Valid 171 RUN 04 01 Valid Valid Valid Valid 171 STOP 02 Valid Valid Valid Valid 172 CONTROLLER DATA READ 05 01 Valid Valid Valid Valid 172 CONNECTION DATA READ 02 Valid Valid Valid Valid 175 CONTROLLER STATUS READ o6 01 Valid Valid Valid Valid 175 CYCLE TIME READ 20 Valid Valid Not valid Not valid 177 CLOCK READ 07 01 Valid Valid Valid Valid 178 CLOCK WRITE 02 Valid Valid Valid Valid 178 MESSAGE READ 09 20 Valid Valid Valid Valid 179 MESSAGE CLEAR Valid Valid Valid Valid 179 FAL FALS READ Valid Valid Valid Valid 180 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE oc 101 Valid Valid Valid Valid 181 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE 02 Valid Valid Valid Valid 182 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE 03 Valid Valid Valid Valid 183 ERROR CLEAR 21 01 Valid Valid Valid Valid 183 ERROR LOG READ 02 Valid Valid Valid Valid 184 ERROR LOG CLEAR 03 Valid Valid Valid Valid 185 153 Memory Area Designations Section 10 2
162. CPU Unit function processing or wait until it because it is already being is completed and execute the executed command Data link tables Check the data link tables for duplicate node addresses 0B The response block is Number of items set Check the command format and longer than the max in command data set the number of items correctly permissible length 0C An incorrect parameter Parameters in Check the command data and reenter it correctly Data link table file Check the data link table file for corruption 277 FINS Command Response Codes Appendix A memory to be changed Main code Sub Probable cause Check point Remedy code 20 Read not 02 The data is protected mee Execute the instruction again after possible issuing the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR command An attempt was made to File name Check the file name and either download a file that is interrupt servicing or wait for being uploaded servicing to complete before re executing the command 03 The registered table does Relevant table Set or reset the registered table not exist or is incorrect Too many files open Number of files open Close open files and re execute the command 04 The corresponding search aes data does not exist 05 A non existing program no Program number in Check the program number and has been specified command data be sure that i
163. CPU8 C200HX CPU3 _1 E CPU4 1 E Z C200HG CPU3 E CPU4 E Z C200HE C200HS Any unit number in the setting range is allowed as long as it hasn t been set on another Special I O Unit connected to the PC Use a small flat blade screwdriver to turn the rotary switch be careful not to damage the switch Always turn OFF the PC before changing the unit number setting The Master Unit is shipped with the unit number set to 0 The unit number setting determines which words in the PC s CPU Bus Unit Area are allocated to the Master Unit If the same unit number is used for the Master and another Special I O Unit an I O Unit Over error will occur in the PC and it won t be possible to start up the DeviceNet network 41 CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs Section 4 3 42 Note Rear panel DIP Switch The Master Unit s node address setting is made in binary with pins 1 through 6 of the DIP switch on the rear of the Master Unit Node address setting MX Reserved Always OFF Pins 1 through 6 represent binary digits which are 1 when the pin is ON 0 when the pin is OFF Any node address from 0 through 63 can be set as long as it hasn t been set on another node Slave Refer to Appendix E Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of DIP switch settings DIP switch setting Node Pin5 Pin4 Pin3 Pin2 address
164. D Year The rightmost two digits of the year Hour 00 to 23 Day As follows Value 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 Day Sun Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat 205 SECTION 12 FINS Commands to Master Units This section provides information on the FINS commands that can be addressed to the DeviceNet CompoBus D Master Units 121 Command DSt s 4ceoch Seon ee ee ee en bee i dee et 210 1222s RESE TD 82d acct teneee E ae esa ote shee aver ane cael a aa a aaa te eee eara Genet teste 210 12 3 CONTROLLER DATA READ 0 0 ene n eee ene 210 12 4 EFCHOBACKS TEST oranana amp eb Sees Aa BR ra bag Aa ba a AEN EG ARE oR 211 12 5 ERROR LOG READ 025 5 c ee es ee i NN Ee a E 211 1226 ERROR LOG CLEAR 6524s gc0 e aac ais reese a 4 Gaeta ewe ai AK BRR LAS 212 207 Command List Section 12 1 12 1 Command List The beginning portions of the command and response block up to the command codes and the FCS and terminator have been omitted for simplicity but must be added for actual transmission if not automatically generated for the transmission method being used In the illustrations of command and response blocks in this section each box represents one byte i e two hexadecimal or BCD digits Be careful when ad ding the header where each box represents one digit i e four bits The following table lists the FINS commands supported by the DeviceNet Units Command Name Page code
165. D08 50 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 ID08 1 50 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 ID16 50 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 ID16 1 50 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 OD08 50 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 OD08 1 50 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 OD16 50 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 OD16 1 50 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 IDO8C 35 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 OD08C 45 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 MD16C 35 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 ID16X 70 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 ID16X 1 70 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 OD16X 50 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 OD16X 1 70 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 HD16S 60 mA max 40 mA max DRT1 ND16S 60 mA max 40 mA max DRT1 AD04 80 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 AD04H 130 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 DA02 140 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 TSO4T 130 mA max 30 mA max DRT1 TSO4P 130 mA max 30 mA max CQM1 DRT21 80 mA max 5 VDC supplied 40 mA max from the Backplane C200HW DRT21 250 mA max 5 VDC supplied 45 mA max from the Backplane DRT1 232C2 100 mA max 50 mA max 296 Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions Appendix D MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Units 1 0 Unit interface current Internal power supply and I O consumption power supply GT1 ID16 1 35 mA max GT1 ID16MX 1 35 mA max GT1 ID16ML 1 35 mA max GT1 ID16DS 1 35 mA max GT1 ID32ML 1 55 mA max GT1 OD16 1 35 mA max 9 mA max GT1 OD16MxX 35 mA max 9 mA max GT1 OD16ML 35 mA max 9 mA max GT1 OD16DS 35 mA max 9 mA max GT1 OD32ML
166. DM Interrupt status Scheduled interrupt interval DD 4 Note Refer to 10 2 2 Data Configurations for the various data configurations 159 MEMORY AREA FILL Section 10 6 10 6 MEMORY AREA FILL Writes the same data to the specified number of consecutive memory area words All words must be in the same memory area here all memory areas with the same memory area code are considered as one area Note 1 The MEMORY AREA FILL command can be executed regardless of the PC s mode It is the user s responsibility to program steps to prohibit this command from being executed when the PC is in the RUN mode if such protection is necessary Execute the CONTROLLER STATUS READ com mand refer to 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ to read the PC s mode 2 When data is written in the Timer Counter PV Area the Completion Flag will be turned OFF 0 Command Block Bons seneae Command Beginning address No of items Data code Memory area code Response Block Command Response code code Parameters Memory area code command The data area to write Beginning address command The first word values to write No of items command The number of items to write If the number of items is set to 0000 nothing will be written and a normal end response code will be re turned Data command The data to be written to the memory area starting from the Beginning address The data to be written should consist of two bytes
167. DeviceNet CompoBus D communications such as the node addresses and I O points for each node it is stored in the Master Unit s non volatile memory Refer to 8 2 Scan List for more details The following diagram shows the locations of the software switches Bit_15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 A 4 3 2 i 0 Not used Enable Scan List Clear Scan List Clear Communications Error Stoppage Start Remote I O Communications Stop Remote I O Communications 213 Software Switches CVM1 and CV series PCs Enable Scan CIO 1500 25 List x unit No Clear Scan List Clear Communications Error Stoppage Start Remote 1 0 Communications Stop Remote I O Communications Enable Scan List Clear Scan List Clear Communications Error Stoppage 214 Section 13 2 CS1 series C200HX HG HE HS i Function PCs ClO 2000 10 Unit No 0 to 9 Turn from OFF to ON when x unit No IR 100 10 x unit No operating with the scan list Unit No A to F disabled to register the Slaves IR 400 10 x unit No 10 currently participating in communications in the scan list and restart remote I O communications with the scan list enabled The PC must be in PROGRAM mode Turn from OFF to ON to clear the scan list restart communications with the scan list disabled The PC must be in PROGRAM mode Turn from OFF to ON when the Master Unit s DIP switch has been set to stop communications when a communications error occurs to re
168. E 172 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ 165 RUN 173 SINGLE FILE READ 189 SINGLE FILE WRITE 190 STOP 174 VOLUME LABEL CREATE DELETE 191 commands for Master Units CONTROLLER DATA READ 210 ERROR LOG CLEAR 212 ERROR LOG READ 211 LOOP BACK TEST 211 RESET 210 communications 226 cycle time 226 flags 138 testing 211 time Slave 226 Communications Error Flag 219 Communications Stoppage Cleared Flag 220 communications time Slave 226 Configuration Error Flag 219 301 Index connectable devices 291 specifications 45 connecting cable 9 connectors specifications 48 control bits 215 allocation C200HX HG HE HS PCs 215 CS1 series PCs 214 CVM1 and CV series PCs 214 Clear Communications Error Stoppage Bit 217 Clear Scan List Bit 216 Create Scan List Bit 216 counters changing PV 161 162 203 reading Completion Flag status 162 164 165 202 204 205 reading PV 160 162 164 165 202 204 205 CPU Bus Unit configuration 175 Create Scan List Bit 216 current consumptions 298 CVM and CV series PCs 95 cycle time 226 communications 226 reading 179 D data areas See Memory Areas DeviceNet Cable specifications 46 dimensions Master Units CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 44 CVM1 and CV series PCs 39 T branch Taps 51 Terminators 53 DIP switch Master Units CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 42 CVM1 and CV series PCs 37 DM Area reading 160 162 164 165 202
169. E HS PCs Unit No 0 to 9 IR 102 10 x unit No Unit No A to F IR 402 10 x unit No 10 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 First word 2 First word 3 21 20 19 18 17 First word 4 1371 36 35 34 33 First word 5 5352 51 50 49 When the Master is operating with the scan list enabled the flags of Slaves reg istered in the scan list will be ON 219 Status Area Section 13 3 When the Master is operating with the scan list disabled the flags of Slaves will be ON if the Master established a connection communications with the Slaves even one time If the default scan list is enabled using the software switch any Slave whose bit is ON will be in the scan list 13 3 5 Normal Slave Data First Words CVM1 and CV series PCs CIO 1506 25 x unit No CS1 series PCs CIO 2006 10 x unit No C200HX HG HE HS PCs Unit No 0 to 9 IR 106 10 x unit No Unit No A to F IR 406 10 x unit No 10 The bits in the Normal Slave Data Area correspond to the Slaves node address es as shown in the following diagram Bit_15 First word 6 15 19 16154 i First word 7 31 30 29 21 20 19 18 17 First word 8 47 46 45 i i 37 36 35 34 33 First word 9 63 62 61 i 53 52 51 50 49 A Slave s corresponding flag will be ON if the Master has established normal communications with the Slave The corresponding flag wil
170. ECV 193 As indicated the size of the area depends on the PC that is being used Note Do not cross the boundary of the data areas for the PC you are using Data area CV500 CVM1 CPU01 E1 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU11 21 E CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 2555 CPU Bus Link G000 to C255 G000 to G007 Read only Area Auxiliary Area A000 to A511 A256 to A511 Read only Timer Area T000 to T511 T0000 to T1023 Counter Area C000 to C511 C0000 to C1023 DM Area D0000 to D8191 D00000 to D24575 EM Area E00000 to E32765 See note Note EM Memory must be mounted to the CPU Unit to use the EM Area There can be up to 8 banks depending on the Memory that is mounted Refer to the PC s Installation Guide for more information 9 3 4 Programming Examples Example 1 Sending Data Using SEND 192 Master Unit Master Unit CVM1 CV series PC Unit address 00 Node Network 01 Node 06 SEND 192 Operation The data from the 5 words D01000 to D01004 from the PC with the Master Unit with node address 05 are sent to D03000 to D03004 in the PC with the Master Unit with node address 06 The completion code is stored in D00006 when execution of SEND 192 has been completed 128 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 9 3 Command Details S D01000 D D03000 C D00000 D00000 0005 D00001 0001 D00002 0600 D00003 0000 D00004 0064 A500 15 0
171. Flashing green Special I O Unit error 250 There is a Special I O Unit with the TS and U ERR indicators lit red A specific error such no operating power supply has occurred in a Special I O Unit Check the operating power supply and provide the correct power supply If the problem persists replace the Special I O Unit in which the error occurred Error History Section 15 2 15 2 Error History Up to 20 records of errors can be set in an error history error log in the Device Net Master Unit The error log can be read cleared and monitored using FINS commands or a Configurator as described following Note The contents of the error history is cleared when power is turned OFF or when the Master Unit is reset FINS Commands The following FINS commands can be sent from a CPU Unit to the Master Unit to read and clear the error history e ERROR HISTORY READ command code 21 02 e ERROR HISTORY CLEAR command code 21 03 The data that was read can be stored in the DM area of the PC Addressed to local Master Unit Addressed to remote Master Unit FINS command FINS command Configurator The Master error history read operation can be used from the Configurator to monitor the error history With the Configurator the error history can only be monitored and the data cannot be saved 15 2 1 Error History Data Each record in the error history consists of 10 bytes in the configuration shown in the
172. Heiter ON outputs for comm errors Pin 10 not used OFF CQM1 DRT21 I O Link Unit Internal in CQM1 Pin 9 not used OFF eT LT 16 pts outputs for comm errors DRT1 HD16S Sensor Terminal 16 pts 3 pins 1 and Not used OFF ee exo Z12345678 910 DRT1 AD04 Analog Input Unit 4 analog input pts A O Oo ON DD Oo peebeeeeee 7 lPInSON Pin 9 OFF to use 4 Pin 10 OFF to not use averaging Mount and wire the Master Units Connect a Programming Device to the PC turn on the PC and create the I O table Turn off power to the PCs Master Units Connect the Configurator Turn on power to all Slaves Place the Configurator online and read the network configuration Create the master parameters for each Master Unit The input and output areas and the Slave I O allocations must be set for each Master Unit as shown in the following tables Use different master pa rameter file names for the parameters for each master The master parame ter settings will be deleted when the Configurator is ended so be sure to save the master parameters in files Master Unit A 00 LR20 2 01 300L 1 Output area block 1 Area Start word I O relay 300 No of words 1 Output area block 2 Input area block 1 Input area block 2 Area Area I O relay Area Start word Start word 20 Start word No of words No of words 1 No of words 111
173. I O points be sure to edit I O tables using CX Programmer I O tables cannot be edited with a Programming Console Default Remote I O Allocation Section 8 3 C200HX HG HE PCs C200HS PCs Note For details refer to the CX Programmer Operation Manual Using the Configurator By performing user set allocation using the Configurator it is possible to change the position of areas used for DeviceNet output For details refer to 8 4 User set Allocations and the CompoBus D Configurator Operation manual W328 Attempting to use DeviceNet remote I O communications functions with the same areas allocated to actual I O for Basic I O Units and to DeviceNet Com poBus D Slaves may cause I O Units the CPU Unit program or Slaves to mal function The I O areas consist of an input area IR 350 to IR 399 and output area IR 50 to IR 99 The input and output areas are allocated according to the Slaves node addresses as shown in the following diagram Node Output area address Input area IR 50 00 IR 350 IR 51 01 IR 351 IR 52 02 IR 352 IR 97 47 IR 397 IR 98 48 IR 398 IR 99 49 IR 399 The I O areas consist of an input area IR 350 to IR 381 and output area IR 50 to IR 81 The input and output areas are allocated according to the Slaves node addresses as shown in the following diagram Output area Node Input area address IR 50 00 IR 350 IR 51 01 IR 351 IR 52 02 IR 352 IR 79 29 IR 379 IR 80 30 IR 380 IR 81 31 IR
174. I O bus error An error I O bus line Check the Unit Service Boards occurred during data and cable connections and issue transfer between the CPU the ERROR CLEAR command and an I O Unit 09 SYSMAC BUS 2 error An SYSMAC BUS 2 Check the Unit Service Boards error occurred during transmission path and cable connections and issue SYSMAC BUS 2 data the ERROR CLEAR command transfer 0A Special I O Unit error An CPU Bus Unit Check the Unit Service Boards error occurred during CPU transmission path and cable connections and issue Bus Unit data transfer the ERROR CLEAR command oD Duplication in SYSMAC Word settings Check and regenerate the I O BUS word allocation table OF A memory error has Contents of memory If the error occurred in internal occurred in internal being processed memory or the EM Unit correct memory in the Memory the data in the command an Card or in Expansion DM execute it again during the error check If the error occurred in a Memory Card or EM used for file memory the file data has been corrupted Execute the MEMORY CARD FORMAT command If the above remedies do not eliminate the error replace the faulty memory 10 Terminator not connected __ Connect the terminator correctly 280 FINS Command Response Codes Appendix A with ABORT command Main code Sub Probable cause Check point Remedy code 26 Command error 01
175. IR 110 The soft ware switches are in IR 110 because the unit number of the Master Unit is set to 1 IR 110 IR 111 For unit number 1 gt Software switches 1 wd 10 words Status area 9 wds IR 119 The functions of the software switches are shown in the following table Function Enable Scan List Clear Scan List Restart for Communications Errors Start Remote I O Communications Stop Remote I O Communications Default Remote I O Allocation Section 8 3 IR 50 IR 51 IR 52 IR 53 IR 54 IR 55 IR 56 15 11 Confirm that the MS and NS indicators are lit at all nodes and that the 7 seg ment display on the Master Unit shows a node address of 10 and that the scan list is enabled Master Unit Le Not lit Scan list enabled Node address 10 Remote I O words will be allocated to the Slaves as follows and remote I O com munications will start Output area Input area 0 Node address 15 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 IR 350 IR 351 IR 352 IR 353 IR 354 IR 355 IR 356 Slave to which words are allocated DRT1 ID16X Remote Adapter DRT1 OD08 Output Terminal CQM1 DRT21 I O Link Unit DRT1 AD04 Analog Input Terminal Allocated for Slave I O Not usable Usable as work bits 103 User set Allocations Section 8 4 8 4 User set Allocations Words that can be
176. Master Unit can be used to determine if the scan list is enabled or disabled If both the right and left dots are not lit the scan list is enabled If both dots are lit the scan list is disabled 8 3 6 Actual System Allocation Example The following example provides the procedure for using remote I O communica tions with the default remote O allocations C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Unit node 10 24 VDC 4 power supply DRT1 AD04 Analog Input Terminal 4 inputs node 03 1485C P1A50 Communications Cable Allen Bradley Br HHH T branch Tap 1458T P2T5 T5 Power Supply Tap DRT1 OD08 Output Terminal 8 pts node 01 DCN1 1C T branch Tap with Terminating Resistor DRT1 ID16X Remote Adapter 16 input pts node 00 CQM1 DRT21 I O Link Unit 16 internal input 16 internal output pts node 02 1 2 3 1 Make the initial settings for the Master Unit as follows a Set the unit number The following example is for unit number 1 and status areas for a unit number of 1 IR 110 to IR 119 and D The following words are allocated for the software switches D DM 6034 to DM 6035 b Set the node address The following example is for a node address of 10 pins 2 and 4 turned ON m A W A P H r ee words allocated to the Master Unit 12345678 A ov QJ oF c Set the baud rate and the communications continue stop setting for com munications errors The following example show a baud rate of
177. No of communications area code bytes 1st and 2nd 3rd byte bytes CIO area Bit status 00000 to 51115 0000 to 01FF 00 to OF 00 1 Word contents 000 to 511 00 to 00 80 2 LR area Bit status LR 0000 to LR 6315 03E8 to 0427 00 to OF 00 1 Word contents LR 00 to LR 63 00 to 00 80 2 HR area Bit status HR 0000 to HR 9915 0428 to 048B 00 to OF 00 1 Word contents HR 00 to HR 99 00 to 00 80 2 AR area Bit status AR 0000 to AR 2715 048C to 04A7 00 to OF 00 1 Word contents AR 000 to AR 27 00 to 00 80 2 Timer Area Completion TIM 000 to TIM 511 0000 to 01FF 00 to 00 01 1 Counter Area Flag status CNT 000 to CNT 511 PV TIM 000 to TIM 511 00 to 00 81 2 CNT 000 to CNT 511 DM Area Word contents DM 0000 to DM 9999 0000 to 270F 00 to 00 82 2 EM Area Word contents EM 0000 to EM 6144 0000 to 17FF 00 to 00 90 to 92 98 2 A8 to AF see note Note EM Area bank designations 90 to 97 Banks 0 to 7 98 Current bank A8 to AF Banks 8 to 15 11 2 1 Word Bit Addresses Each word bit address specifies a specific bit or word The rightmost two digits of the address specify bit 00 to 15 or 00 if not required and leftmost four digits specify the word address Specify the the bit between 00 and OF 00 to 15 Set to 00 to specify word or flag data Specify the address of the word or flag To obtain the corresponding address of the desired word or bit add the data area word address hexadecimal to the first add
178. O 000000 129 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 9 3 Example 2 Sending a FINS Command Using CMND 194 CMND M Master Unit 194 aster Unit CPU eal Unit ad dress 00 Node 05 Node 06 Network 01 MEMORY AREA READ command Operation The data in the 5 words D01000 to D01004 are read from the PC with the Master Unit with node address 06 and transferred to the PC of the Master Unit with node address 05 where CMND 194 is executed The command data is written start ing at DM01000 of the PC with node address 05 and the response data is stored in words beginning with D02000 The completion code is stored in D00006 when execution of CMND 194 has been completed and then the command is executed again Command Details The following command is used CMND 194 S D C S D01000 First command word at local node Settings hex D01000 0101 Command Code D01001 8203 Command parameters D01002 E800 Command parameters D01003 0005 Command parameters D D02000 First response word at local node C D00000 First control word Settings hex D00000 0008 Number of command bytes D00001 000E Number of response bytes D00002 0001 Destination network address D00003 0600 Destination node address 06 Destination unit address 00 CPU Unit D00004 0000 Response communications port 0 no retries D00005 0064 Response monitoring time 130 Message Communicatio
179. O communications Kies Shoes ae Doan ea te i Remote I O communications Handles Multi point A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable mounting more than one Control and Line Master Unit to a single PC allowing control of many more points This feature Expansions with can easily handle line expansions and other applications Multi layer Networks OMRON Master Units Slaves OMRON Slaves Configurator Slave Slave Configurator 13 DeviceNet Features Section 1 2 Free Remote I O A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable flexible allocation of I O Allocation i e in any area and in any order This allows O allocations that suit the applica tion to simplify programming and enable effective usage of PC memory areas OMRON Master Unit Output area Input area Node 01 Node 04 Node 03 Node 02 Node 00 OMRON Configurator Handle Slaves with A Configurator sold separately can be used to set the communications cycle iia Response time enabling usage of Slaves with slow response times pe OMRON Master Unit Set the communications cycle time i Remote I O communications at a set interval OMRON Configurator Easily Expand or Change Use a multi drop trunk line T branch multi drop lines or daisy chain drop lines Lines with Various All three connection methods can be combined to flexibly construct a network Connection Methods that meets the needs of
180. Photoelectric Solenoids sensors valves etc proximity T branch Taps or multi drop connections sensors limit switches etc DeviceNet Fora i C200H I O Link Unit See note Analog Analog RS 232C 4 Input gt Output ature In amp Unit Terminal Terminal put Ter 4 ee minal 44 l NJ Inputs Outputs Outputs Inputs Analog sensors Inverters Thermocouple Tt MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL te valves etc platinum resistance Bar code thermometer readers etc Note A Configurator is required for networks with more than one Master Master Features Master Units Support remote I O communications between OMRON PCs CVM1 CV Series or C200HZ HX HG HE HS and Slaves Support message communications between OMRON PCs or between an OM RON PC and Slaves and Masters from other companies VME Master Boards Support remote I O communications between a VME System and Slaves Configurator Features e Enables free user set allocations to remote I O e Enables multiple Master Units on a single PC e Enables multiple Master Units in a single network Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D Section 1 1 Slave Features Note I O Terminals e Provide general purpose I O via terminal blocks M3 e Available in the following models e 8 point transistor input model e 16 point
181. R Transfers or compares data between the PC memory areas and the file device connected to the PC The clock data of the PC upon completion of the MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER command will be recorded as the date of the file that has been transferred Note 1 The checksum is stored at the front bytes 0 and 1 of the file Thus file trans fer or comparison is effective from the next byte after the checksum 2 The MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER command can be executed regard less of the PC s mode It is the user s responsibility to program steps to pro hibit this command from being executed when the PC is in RUN mode if such protection is necessary Execute the CONTROLLER STATUS READ com mand refer to 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ to read the PC s mode 3 If data is written to the Timer Counter PV Area the Completion Flags will be turned OFF 0 Command Block 22 OA 12 bytes Command Parameter Beginning address No of Disk no File name code code items Memory area code Memory area specification File specification Response Block 22 OA Command Response No of items code code Parameters Parameter code command As follows 0000 Data transfer from the PC memory area to the file device 0001 Data transfer from the file device to the PC memory area 0002 Data compared Memory area code command The memory area to be used for data transfer or com
182. Removed Appendix E Removed Appendix F New model information added October 2000 Reprinted due to error 305
183. Save the network configuration under File Save from the Configurator Checking the current communications cycle time Use a Programming Device to monitor the current communications cycle time in the status area Adjusting the communications cycle time Set the communications cycle time in the Master parameters from the Configurator Replacing a Master Unit After replacing the Master Unit turn ON bit 1 in the software switches to check Slave connection and then turn ON bit 0 in the software switches to enable the scan list Note 1 Refer to the CompoBus DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual or the Com poBus D DeviceNet MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Operation Manual 2 Refer to the CompoBus D Configurator Operation Manual 21 Section 2 2 System Configurations 2 2 System Configurations The following patterns can be used in the DeviceNet network configuration Pattern type One Masier per network Slaves More than one Masters per network chen Slaves More than one Master per PC Masters 2e Slaves Slaves Configurator Not needed if default allocations are used Required Remote I O Communications Default User set Configurator required
184. Section 9 4 E00000 to E32766 E00000 to E32767 EM Area with bank En_00000 to En_32766 n 0 to C En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to Indirect DM EM addresses in binary D00000 to D32767 E00000 to E32767 En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to Indirect DM EM addresses in BCD D00000 to D32767 E00000 to E32767 En_00000 to En_32767 n 0 to Constants D 0000 to 000F D 1 0001 to 0080 0000 to FFFF binary Data Registers DRO to DR15 Index Registers Indirect addressing using Index Registers C200HX HG HE HS Internal Relay Area 1 IRO to IR15 2048 to 2047 IRO to 2048 to 2047 IR15 DRO to DR15 IRO to IR15 IRO to IR15 IR 000 to IR 235 Special Relay Area 1 SR 236 to SR 255 Special Relay Area 2 SR 256 to SR 299 Internal Relay Area 2 IR 300 to IR 511 Holding Relay Area HR 00 to HR 99 Auxiliary Relay Area AR 00 to AR 27 Link Relay Area LR 00 to LR 63 Timer Counter Area TC 000 to TC 511 Data Memory Area DM 0000 to DM 6599 Fixed DM Area DM 6600 to DM 6655 Extended DM Area EM 0000 to EM 6143 Constants Sending Explicit Messages 0000 to FFFF Not usable 0000 to F128 Explicit messages can be sent to OMRON Special Slaves and DeviceNet de vices made by other manufacturers by setting the FINS command code to 28
185. The specified area is not Program area The program area is not protected protected This response command protection so it isn t necessary to clear code will be returned if an protection attempt is made to clear protection on an area that is not protected 02 An incorrect password has Specify a password that is been specified registered 04 The specified area is aes Execute the command again after protected the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR command To many commands at Number of The destination has received more destination commands being than 5 commands Either interrupt executed servicing or wait for servicing to complete before re executing the command 05 The service is being Execute the command again after executed the service has been completed or aborted 06 The service is not being a Execute the service if necessary executed 07 Service cannot be LNK indicator on Execute the service from a node executed from local node Unit Board that is part of the data link because the local node is not part of the data link A buffer error has aa Reset the board If the error prevented returning a persists replace the board normal response 08 Service cannot be Settings before Make the necessary settings executed because execution necessary settings haven t been made 09 Service cannot be Command data Check the command format of and executed because make the necessary settings necessary settings haven t been made
186. This flag is turned OFF when the Enable Scan List software switch or Clear Scan List software switch is turned OFF after execution of the corresponding opera tion Be sure this flag or the previous flag is ON before turning OFF the Enable Scan List software switch or Clear Scan List software switch Communications Stoppage Cleared Flag Bit 11 This flag is turned ON 1 when communications are successfully restarted after being stopped due to a communications error Be sure this flag is ON before turning OFF the Clear Communications Error Stoppage software switch Message Communications Enabled Flag Bit 12 For CVM1 and CV series PCs this flag will be ON 1 when messages commu nications are possible it will be OFF 0 when message communications are not possible due to a Bus Off or other error For C200HX HG HE HS PCs this flag will be ON 1 when messages commu nications to the Master Unit or other nodes are possible it will be OFF 0 when message communications are in progress to the Master Unit or other nodes un til a response is returned or when message communications are not possible 1 The Message Communications Enabled Flag should be used as an execu tion condition for message communications for all PCs 2 The status of the Message Communications Enabled Flag will not change until the next time peripheral servicing is performed i e not until at least the next scan after a message is sent Scan List Disabled Flag Bit 13
187. UN MONITOR PROGRAM 01 01 MEMORY AREA READ Valid Valid Valid 200 02 MEMORY AREA WRITE Valid Valid Valid 201 04 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ Valid Valid Valid 202 10 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ Valid Valid Valid 202 11 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ Valid Valid Valid 203 05 01 CONTROLLER DATA READ Valid Valid Valid 204 06 01 CONTROLLER STATUS READ Valid Valid Valid 204 07 01 CLOCK READ Valid Valid Valid 205 Note Although CS1 series CPU Units support other commands only the ones listed above can be made via DeviceNet CompoBus D 11 2 Memory Area Designations 198 The following table gives the addresses to use when reading or writing PC data The Data area address column gives the normal addresses used in the PC pro gram The Address used in communications column are the addresses used in CV mode commands and responses These addresses are combined with the memory area codes to specify PC memory locations These addresses are not the same as the actual memory addresses of the data The No of bytes column specifies the number of bytes to read or write data for that area The number of bytes varies for the same area depending on the memory area code Actual data area sizes vary with the PC being used Refer to your PC s operation manual for specific limits Memory Area Designations Section 11 2 Memory area Data Data area address Address used in Memory
188. Unit and store it in the DM area of the PC Examples are given for both CVM1 CV se ries PCs and C200HX HG HE PCs CMND CVM1 and CV series PCs Using CMND 194 194 Master Unit unit No 0 Node address 05 FINS unit address FE or 10 hex FINS command Network 01 253 Section 15 2 Error History Command Details 254 The program reads 20 records of error history data from the Master Unit stores the data and then clears the error history This process is repeatedly executed The ERROR HISTORY READ 21 02 and ERROR HISTORY CLEAR 21 03 commands are used The ERROR HISTORY READ command is stored in memory starting from D01000 and the ERROR HISTORY CLEAR command is stored starting from D01003 The responses for both commands are stored starting at D02000 The error records starting at D02005 are moved one record at a time 10 bytes or 5 words starting at D00098 using indirect addressing When 20 records have been read out they are moved to D00100 to D00199 When a total of 20 records have been stored in memory the previous records are overwritten starting at D00100 Because the data is in the DM area it will be preserved even if power is turned OFF If the ERROR HISTORY READ command ends in an error the response code is stored in D00006 If there are not 20 records in the Master Unit when ERROR HISTORY READ is executed a 11 04 response code will be returned In this case the response code is
189. a Special I O Unit error has oc curred with the C200HW DRM21 V1 Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart The Master s MS indicator is ON and green but the NS indicator remains OFF The NS indicator normally goes ON 2 s after the MS indicator e If the Master s 7 segment display is displaying an error code refer to the tables in 15 1 3 Identifying Errors from the Indicators e Make sure that the C200HW DRM21 V1 Master s unit number setting is correct The acceptable unit number ranges are as follows CS1G CPU 0 to F CS1H CPU 0 to F C200HX CPU3 0to9 C200HX CPU5 0 to F C200HG CPU3L E CPU4 E 0to9 C200HG CPUS5L E CPU6L1 E 0 to F C200HE CPU11 E CPU32 E CPU42 E 0 to 9 C200HS CPULIL E 0to9 e Make sure that the Slave s unit number hasn t been set on any other Special I O Units e With a C200HW DRM21 V1 Master check the I O table with the I O Table Verification operation and correct it if necessary After correcting it perform the I O Table Create operation E CPU4L1 E E CPU6LI E Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart The Master s MS indicator is ON and green but the NS indicator continues to flash green The NS indicator normally goes ON 2 s after the MS indicator e If the Master s 7 segment display is displaying an error code refer to the tables in
190. a data CPU Bus Unit B PC status code code model version use configuration Remote I O data Data if 00 is specified as data to be read Data if 01 is specified as data to be read Parameters Data command Specify as follows to read the desired data Value 00 01 Omitted Data to be read Controller model CPU Bus Unit Controller model Controller version configuration Controller version Area data Remote I O data Area data PC status CPU Bus Unit configuration Remote I O data PC status Note If no data is specified all data will be read consecutively Controller model and Controller version response Both are read in ASCII codes 20 bytes i e 20 ASCII characters max each For system use response Reserved for system use Area data response As follows 1st byte 12th byte Wee ee aa i a Program No of DM words No of steps Memory card area size transitions size IOM size Timer counter Expansion Kind of memory card size DM size Item Meaning Unit Program area size The size of PC Setup and program area K words 1K words 1 024 words IOM size The size of the area in which bit word commands K bytes 1K bytes 1 024 bytes can be used No of DM words Total words in the DM area K words Timer counter size Maximum no of timers counters available Timers Counters Expansion DM size Banks in the expansion DM area Banks 1 bank 32 766 word
191. abled Flag is used in the same cycle as the execution condition for reading the response after execution of IOWR an at 136 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs Section 9 4 tempt could be made to read the response even though it has not yet been re turned Response Received in the Same Cycle IOWR CPU Unit executed f Command written Master Unit i isto qos Peripheral servicing ON 1 1 Equals Flag SR 25506 OFF TL Response Message ON ee eee Communications i i Enabled Flag f Response Received in the Next Cycle i IOWR CPU Unit executed Command written eae f Response ON Equals Flag SR 25506 or Message ON Communications Enabled Flag OFF bi al Master Unit Peripheral servicing 3 Response read OFF until response is received pes Message Communications Enabled Flag remains ON here 137 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs Section 9 4 Use the type of programming shown below The programming shown at the top will not always read the response properly WRONG Can Improperly Read Response Execution Message condition Communications Enabled Flag A B 25506 i A DIFU 13 C Cc D Instructions to Message read response Communications Enabled Flag CORRECT Properly Reads Response A DIFU 13 C
192. actual memory addresses of the data The No of bytes column specifies the number of bytes to read or write data for that area The number of bytes varies for the same area depending on the memory area code Note The addresses used in communications and the memory area codes are in hex adecimal CV500 or CVM1 CPU01 E Memory area Data Data area address Address used in Memory No of communications area code bytes ClO TR CPU Bit status Clo 000000 to 25515 000000 to O9FBOF 00 1 Bus Link and TR TRO to TR7 09FF00 to 09FF07 Auxiliary Areas G G00000 to G25515 0A0000 to OAFFOF A A00000 to A51115 0B0000 to OCFFOF Bit status with forced CIO 000000 to 25515 000000 to O9FBOF 40 1 status G G00000 to G25515 0A0000 to OAFFOF Word contents CIO 0000 to 2555 000000 to 09FB00 80 2 TR 09FF00 G G000 to G255 0A0000 to OAFFOO A A000 to A511 0B0000 to OCFFOO Word contents with Clo 0000 to 2555 000000 to O9FBOF Co 4 forced status G G000 to G255 0A0000 to OAFFOO Timer Area Completion Flag TIM T0000 to T1023 000000 to 03DF00 01 1 Counter Area status CNT C0000 to C1023 080000 to OBDFOO Completion Flag TIM T0000 to T1023 000000 to 03DF00 41 1 status with forced CNT C0000 to C1023 080000 to OBDFOO status PV TIM T0000 to T1023 000000 to 01FF00 81 2 CNT C0000 to C1023 080000 to OBFFOO 154 Memory Area Designations Section 10 2
193. akes time for DeviceNet communications to start up This programming uses flags in the Master status area to prevents the Slaves I O processing from being performed until remote I O communications start up Refer to 3 Status Area for details on Master Status Area 1 This programming is fora CVM1 or CV series PC and a Master Unit with a unit number of 00 1501 1501 15 14 004 HL gmp 0001 ii EEES E A Remote I O Communications Slaves VO pro Flag Error Communications CASSINI i Stopped Flag i 005 JME 0001 14 2 Message Communications Time 234 Note The message communications time is the time required from the time a Master Unit starts to send a message over the Network to another node until the Master Unit completes sending the message data for SEND 192 RECV 193 and FINS commands for CMND 194 IOWR If the CPU Unit attempts to send another message or receives a message from another node within the message communications time the second message or the message being received from another node may be destroyed Never execute a second communications instruction before the message communica tions time has elapsed and never send messages to any one node at intervals less than the message communications time 1 If send or receive messages are destroyed error records will be placed in the error history of the Master Unit If an error occurs read the error history using the FINS command or monitor the error hi
194. al conformance data Network current consumption 24 VDC 45 mA max Connector type Open plug Physical insulation Yes Supported indicators Module Network MAC ID setting DIP switch Default MAC ID 0 Baud rate setting DIP switch Supported baud rates 125 kbps 250 kbps and 500 kbps Communications data Predefined Master Slave connection set Group 2 client Group 2 only client Dynamic connection support UCMM Yes Explicit message fragmentation support Object Mounting Identity Object 0x01 Object class Object instance Attribute Not supported Yes Service Not supported ID content Attribute 1 Vendor Get read Set write 47 2 Product type 12 3 Product code See table below 4 Revision 1 2 5 Status bits supported 6 Serial number Unique for each Unit 7 Product name See table below 8 State moa Productcode CVM1 DRM21 V1 0 CVM1 DRM21 V1 C200HW DRM21 V1 1 C200HW DRM21 V1 Message Router Object 0x02 Attribute Service Not supported Not supported Attribute Not supported Service Not supported Header specification addition No Object class Object instance DeviceNet Object 0x03 Attribute Service Object class Not supported Not supported 286 Multi vendor Applications Appendix C
195. al response code will be returned Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file device memory card File name command The file to be transferred or compared refer to 10 3 Vol ume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the file name Data length response The number of bytes that have been transferred or compared 10 48 FORCED SET RESET Force sets ON or force resets OFF bits flags or releases force set status Bits flags that are forced ON or OFF will remain ON or OFF and cannot be writ ten to until the forced status is released Note This command cannot be used to release the status of Completion Flags for tim ers or counters Use the FORCE SET RESET CANCEL command refer to 10 49 FORCE SET RESET CANCEL Command Block 23 01 Command No of Set Reset Bit flag Set reset Bit flag code bits flags specification specification Memory area code Memory area code Forced set resetdata ss Forced set reset data Response Block 23 01 Command Response code code Parameters No of bits flags command The number of bits flags to be controlled Set Reset specification command The action to be taken for each bit flag 195 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL Section 10 49 Value Name 0000 Force reset OFF 0001 Force set ON 8000 Forced status released and bit turned OFF
196. allocated from output area CIO 1900 to CIO 1963 and from input area CIO 2000 to CIO 2063 1 word per node address for nodes 0 to 49 are allocated from output area CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 and from input area CIO 0350 to CIO 0399 1 word per node address for nodes 0 to 49 are allocated from output area IR 50 to IR 99 and from input area IR 350 to IR 399 1 word per node address for nodes 0 to 31 are allocated from output area IR 50 to IR 81 and from input area IR 350 to IR 381 8 pt Slaves 16 pt Slaves 16 pt Slaves One word is allocated 1 address Multiple words are allocated 1 address for each word One word is allocated but only the rightmost byte is used 1 address With Con figurator Output blocks 1 and 2 and input blocks 1 and 2 can be set freely within the above areas to any size as long as the maximum number of words per block or the maximum total number of words is not exceeded The following restrictions apply If a Slave requires more than 8 points one byte the leftmost byte of a word bits 07 to 15 cannot be set as the first byte A Slave cannot belong to two Masters 8 pt Slaves 16 pt Slaves Only the leftmost or rightmost byte is allocated One word is allocated 16 pt Slaves Multiple words are allocated If an odd number of bytes is required the rightmost byte is allocated in the last word Remote 1 O communications at startup The ini
197. arameters Program no command Set to 0000 10 31 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE Acquires the access right even if another device already holds it Note 1 Even if any other device has the access right the access right can be ac quired with this command and a normal response code will be returned 2 The following commands cannot be executed by other devices if the host computer holds the access right Do not restrict the access right unless nec essary PARAMETER AREA WRITE 02 02 PARAMETER AREA CLEAR 02 03 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT 03 04 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR 03 05 PROGRAM AREA WRITE 03 07 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR 03 08 RUN 04 01 STOP 04 02 CLOCK WRITE 07 02 MESSAGE CLEAR 09 20 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE 0C 01 ERROR CLEAR 21 01 ERROR LOG CLEAR 21 03 PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER 22 0B PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER 22 0C FORCED SET RESET 23 01 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL 23 02 3 When the ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE command is executed while any other device has the access right the access right of the other de vice will be canceled If possible wait until the other device completes the present operation and then execute the ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE com mand refer to 10 30 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE 4 The device that has lost the access right is not notified Command Block oC 02 00 00 Command Program code no Response Block oc 02 Command Respon
198. ations 11 8 CONTROLLER DATA READ Reads the following data e Controller model and version Command Block 05 0l W e ery Command code Response Block 05 01 20 bytes 20 bytes Command Response Controller Controller code code model version Parameters Controller model and Controller version response Both are returned in ASCII 20 bytes i e 20 ASCII characters max each The version of MPU1 is returned first followed by the version of MPU2 If the model or version informa tion does not require 20 bytes the remainder of the 20 bytes will be filled with spaces ASCII 20 11 9 CONTROLLER STATUS READ Reads the status of the Controller Command Block o6 01 M Command code Response Block o6 o1 l Command Response code code Status Parameters Status response The operating status of the PC as follows 204 CLOCK READ Section 11 10 00 Stop program not being executed 01 Run program being executed 80 CPU on standby 11 10 CLOCK READ Command Block Response Block Parameters Reads the clock This command is valid for the C200H only 077 o0 Command code 07 0l Command Response code code Year Month Date Hour Minute Second Day Year month date hour minute second day response Each value is ex pressed in BC
199. ations are stopped Restart the Master Unit or connect the cables correctly Timeouts cannot be set for OMRON Master Units using explicit message communications Maintenance 15 3 6 RS 232C Unit Troubleshooting Symptom The RS 232C Unit s ERR indicator is lit Probable cause The RS 232C Unit is damaged Section 15 4 Possible remedy Replace the RS 232C Unit RS 232C port communications error the Unit s RD and SD indicators are not lit The wiring is incorrect or the cables are not connected properly Check the wiring with the RS 232C Unit and correct it if necessary The RS 232C port s parameters do not match those of the RS 232C Unit Reset the RS 232C port s parameters to match the parameters of the RS 232C Unit Parameter Error Flag bit 01 or 09 in communications status word is ON The parameters are set incorrectly Reset the parameters correctly using the PARAMETER SET command then execute the RS 232C PORT RESET command or restart the RS 232C Unit Parity Error Flag bit 04 or 12 in communications status word is ON The parity setting does not match the setting in the RS 232C Unit Reset the RS 232C port s parity setting to match the parity of the RS 232C Unit Overrun Error Flag bit 05 or 13 in communications status word is ON The baud rate does not match the setting in the RS 232C Unit Reset the RS 232C port s baud rate to match the
200. ations on Master Unit mounting 70 Mounting Section 7 2 1 25 Bizz 1 If a Configurator is used up to 16 Master Units can be mounted to a PC If a Configurator is not used only 1 Master Unit can be mounted to a PC 2 The Master Unit must be secured with screws after being mounted to the Backplane Tighten to a torque of 1 2 Nim 3 The DeviceNet Master Unit can t be mounted in an Expansion I O Rack SYSMAC BUS Slave Rack or SYSMAC BUS 2 Slave Rack 4 The Master Unit is classified as a CPU Bus Unit When a CVM1 BC053 BC103 Backplane is being used the Master Unit must be mounted in one of the slots that support CPU Bus Units The Master Unit can be mounted in any of these slots as long as its unit number isn t the same as the unit number of another CPU Bus Unit 5 The following diagram shows an installed DeviceNet Master Unit The PC can be installed in a control panel in this condition Master Unit CS1 series C200HX The Master Unit can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack of any C200HG C200HE and CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE or C200HS PC but there are some C200HS Master Units limitations on Master Unit mounting T 2 3 1 If a Configurator is used up to 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted to a PC Refer to the following table for details If a Configur
201. ator and NS indicator have been checked use the TS indicator of each Unit to check the status of the Communications Unit and each I O Unit and then take action in according to the following table TS indicator status Commu nications Unit 1 0 Units All I O Unit TS indicators are not lit The power supply to the I O Unit interface has shorted The current consumption of the I O Unit interface exceeds 0 4 A Check that the I O Unit communications cable has not shorted Check that the total current consumption of the communications power supply for the I O Unit does not exceed 0 4 A After taking the above measures restart the Communications Unit The cable between the Communications Unit and the first I O Unit is disconnected After turning OFF the power supply to the Communications Unit and all I O Units correctly connect the cable ON red I O Unit interface error The TS indicators on the Units closer to the Communications Unit are flashing green and the indicators on the rest of the Units are lit red The cable is broken at the Unit where the TS indicator display changes All I O Unit TS indicators are lit red The cable between the Communications Unit and the first I O Unit is broken After turning OFF the power supply to the Communications Unit and all I O Units replace the broken cable There is a lot of noise Remove the source of the noise All I
202. ator is not used only 1 Master Unit can be connected to a PC CPU model number Max No of Master Units CS1 Series CS1G CPU CS1H CPU C200HX More than 880 C200HG CPU53 63 Z C200HG or I O points C200HX CPU54 64 65 85 Z C200HE Less than 881 C200HE CPU11 32 42 Z O points C200HG CPU33 43 Z C200HX CPU34 44 Z C200HS CPU all models 2 The Master Unit must be secured to the Backplane after mounting 3 The DeviceNet Master Unit can t be used simultaneously with a SYSMAC BUS Master Unit 4 The Master Unit is a Special I O Unit It can be mounted in any slot in the Backplane of a CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack as long as its unit number isn t the same as the unit number of another Special I O Unit 71 Connecting Communications Cables Section 7 3 5 The following diagram shows an installed DeviceNet Master Unit The PC can be attached to a control panel in this condition a aa O lo 12989990800 g Master Unit 7 2 2 Mounting T branch Taps and Terminating Resistors A T branch Tap or Terminal block Terminating Resistor might be required for the Slave The T branch Tap can be mounted on DIN track or mounted directly to the control panel with screws but a Terminal block Terminating Resistor must be mounted with screws When mounting directly to a panel refer to the diagrams in 5 1 Cables and Con nectors f
203. atype dle by great i e estes 12 1 3 DeviceNet Master Unit Version Comparison 0 0 00 e eee eee eee 15 1 4 Communications Specifications 0 0 eee eens 16 1 5 Outline of Configurator sesse i cece eee 17 Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D Section 1 1 1 1 Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D 1 2 3 Note DeviceNet functions m Remote I O communications Message communications DeviceNet is a multi bit multi vendor network that combines controls and data on a machine line control level and that conforms to DeviceNet open field net work specifications Two types of communications are supported 1 Remote I O communications that automatically transfer I O between Slaves and the CPU Unit without any special programming in the CPU Unit and 2 Message communications that read write messages control operation or perform other functions for Master Units CPU Units to which a Master Unit is mounted or Slaves Message com munications are achieved by executing specific instructions SEND 192 RECV 193 CMND 194 and IOWR from the program in the CPU Unit The following functions are also supported if a Configurator is used 1 I O area words can be flexibly allocated for remote I O communications 2 More than one Master Unit can be mounted under a single PC 3 More than one Master Unit can be connected in a single network The Configurator is a software application running on a pe
204. ax 100 m max 39 m max 250 m max 78 m max 500 m max 156 m max 3 2 5 Locating Terminating Resistors Be sure to connect the Terminating Resistors at both ends of the trunk line to reduce signal reflection and stabilize communications When there is a T branch Tap 6 meters or less from the end of the trunk line or the node A Terminating Resistor attached to a T branch Tap can easily be mounted without taking up much space When there is not a T branch Tap 6 meters or less from the end of the trunk line or the node A Terminating Resistor must be connected before that point Either a T branch Tap mounted to a Terminating Resistor or a Terminating block Termi nating Resistor can be used In this case be sure to make the cable length 1 m or less from the node to the Terminating Resistor Truck line T branch Tap mounted to a Terminating Resistor or a Terminating block Terminating Resistor oae Node at end of trunk line 32 SECTION 4 Master Unit Specifications This section provides Master Unit specifications and describes their components indicators switch settings etc 4 1 Overall Specifications 2 ee eee ene bee eee bee ee nes 34 4 2 CVMiJ and CV seri s PCS 0 58 oe sca aa ude hi dee RA TORERE S AN adage dads 35 4 3 CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs 0 40 33 Overall Specifications Section 4 1 4 1 Overall Specifications Master
205. bit this command from being executed when the PC is in the RUN mode if such protection is necessary Execute the CONTROLLER STATUS READ com mand refer to 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ to read the PC s mode 2 When data is written to the Timer Counter PV Area the Completion Flags will be turned OFF 0 01 05 Command Beginning address Beginning address No of items code Memory area code Memory area code Source Destination 01 05 Command Response code code Memory area code command The data area to transfer from and the data area to transfer to Beginning address command The first word value to transfer from and the first word to transfer to No of items command The number of items to transfer each item consists of two bytes The following data can be transferred refer to 10 2 Memory Area Designations for memory area designations Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes CIO TR CPU Bus Word contents 80 2 Link and Auxiliary Timer Counter PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 Expansion DM Word contents specified bank 90 to 97 2 banks 0 to 7 Word contents current bank 98 2 10 9 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ Note 162 Reads the memory areas according to the addresses specified with the COM POSITE READ REGISTRATION command 01 11 1 Although this command is addressed to the CPU Unit it is
206. ble Allocated Allocation not possible Allocated 3 wds Allocation not possible ER Not used Not usable Usable Allocation not possible Cannot be allocated to any Slave Allocation possible Can be allocated to another Slave Input Area 15 0 Address 00 Allocated Beane 01 Allocated 02 Allocation not possible 03 Not abl od Ht Allocated 2 wds 05 Allocation not possible Not usable 06 Allocated 07 Allocation not possible 08 Allocation possible 09 Allocation possible 10 Allocated ween 11 Not used Cannot be used for work bits Can be used as work bits Usable Not usable Not usable Usable Default Remote I O Allocation Section 8 3 8 3 4 Default Remote I O Allocation Example The following example uses a CVM1 or CV series PC in a network consisting of Slaves with the following I O points and node address settings 8 input points 00 16 output points gt 03 48 input points 06 8 output points 01 8 mixed I O points 04 16 mixed I O points gt 05 Master Unit no points 07 16 input points 02 32 output points gt 08 Node Output area Input area address Outputs Inputs _ i j location 00 0 pts 8 pts CIO 1900 Allocation possible CIO 2000 not possible Allocated 01 8 pts 0 p
207. ble A trunk line is usually connected here Mounting screw holes Used when screwing the Tap to a control panel Socket for Terminating Resistor connection Connect a Terminating Resistor here if the T branch Tap is installed at the end of the trunk line Communications Connector Connect to the network communications cable A drop line is usually connected here DIN track mounting hooks Used when mounting the Tap to a DIN track DCN1 3C T Branch Tap Components Communications Connector Connect the network communications cable trunk line Mounting screw holes Used when screwing the Tap to a control panel Socket for Terminating Resistor connection Connect a Terminating Resistor here if the T branch Tap is installed at the end of a trunk line Communications Connector Connect the network communications cable drop lines DIN track mounting hooks Used when mounting the Tap to a DIN track 50 Cables and Connectors Section 5 1 DCN1 1C Dimensions All dimensions are in mm Mounting holes Two 4 2 dia or M4 z DCN1 3C Dimensions All dimensions are in mm OmRON DCN1 3 T PORT TAP Mounting holes Two 4 2 dia or M4 4 lt a
208. ble to which Terminating Resistors are connected at the ends Drop lines are cables that branch from the trunk lines A special 5 wire cable is used for both the trunk lines and the drop lines Branching Patterns Branching Patterns from Trunk Line 1 One drop line from 2 Three drop lines maximum 3 Node connected directly to trunk line from trunk line trunk line Multi drop Trunk line line Trunk line Mi T branch Tap Trunk line Trunk line ME ele line T branch Tap Node Drop line T branch Tap Branching Patterns from Drop Line 4 One drop line from 5 Three drop lines maximum 6 Node connected directly to drop line from drop line drop line Multi drop Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line y s line T branch Tap Node o T branch Tap Drop line T branch Tap Various different forms of connection can be used on the same network as shown in the following diagram Any number of nodes up to 63 can be connected onto a single drop line Communications Trunk line Trunk line Power Supply Tap or T branch Tap Terminating Resistor Terminating Resistor Drop line
209. cal Master Unit is specified as the destination in the communications instruction in the PC s user program not the OMRON Special Slave or Device Net device made by another manufacturer and the node address of the actual destination i e the slave or master made by another manufacturer is specified in the command data for the explicit message send command command PC s Loa ae de CPU Unit CMND 194 Control data in C 3 Destination node address Destination unit address IOWR Control data in C Destination node address Destination unit address Explicit message Slave or master not by OMRON Local node address Unit No of Master Unit 10 hex Local node address FE or Unit No of Master Unit 10 hex The following diagram shows an example of actual node address specifications Machine No of Master Unit 2 15 Node 05 s S Destination node address D Local node address 05 Destination unit address FE or 12 hex The node address of the non OMRON node is set as the destination node address in the FINS command data Command code Explicit message 142 Node 06 Slave or master not by OMRON Node address of the non OMRON node 06 hex Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 5 Note Explicit messages are first sent to the the DeviceNet Master Unit which pro cesses them before send
210. ch Baud rate DIP switch Etc Mount the Master Unit and wire the network For CVM1 and CV series PCs Master Units are treated as CPU Bus Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used For CS1 series PCs Masters are treated as Special I O Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used For C200HX HG HE PCs Masters are treated as Special I O Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used For C200HS PCs Masters are treated as Special I O Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used Connect a Programming Device to the PC and turn on the power supply to the PC Generate the I O table Turn on the power supply to the Slaves and turn on the communications power supply Turn on the power supply to the PC i e to the Master Unit Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode Perform the following and go to step 12 if the
211. con Flag tions ee Flag Execution condition seis A Execution condition he A A z Hi Hi Equals Flag Note Be sure to use the Message Communications Enabled Flag as an input condi tion 221 SECTION 14 Communications Timing This section describes the time required for a complete communications cycle for an output response to be made to an input to start the system and to send a message 14 1 Remote I O Communications Characteristics 0 0 cece cee eee eee nee 226 14 1 1 Communications Cycle Time and Refresh Time 0004 226 4 1 2 VO Response Time sis erii ed neds aig dain Sa ae A we aes 228 14 1 3 More than One Master in Network 20 0 0 cece eee eee 234 14 1 4 System Startup Time 00 0 eee eee 235 14 2 Message Communications Time 0 0 0 cee cece eee ee 236 223 Remote I O Communications Characteristics Section 14 1 14 1 Remote I O Communications Characteristics 1 2 3 Note This section describes the characteristics of DeviceNet CompoBus D commu nications when OMRON Master and Slave Units are being used Use this sec tion for reference when planning operations that require precise I O timing The equations provided here are valid under the following conditions 1 The Master Unit is operating with the scan list enabled 2 All of the required Slaves are participating in communications 3 No errors are being indicated at th
212. controller detected a Bus Off status and communications have been stopped Check the following and restart the Slave Master Slave baud rates for loose or broken cables for noise cable lengths and Terminating Resistors Flashing Communications timeout red The connection with the Master Unit timed out Check the following and restart the Slave Master Slave baud rates for loose or broken cables for noise cable lengths and Terminating Resistors 15 1 4 Normal MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Status When a MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL is operating normally the status will be as follows VO Unit Interface Status During normal operation the status of the I O Unit interface is set in the first two words of the MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL input area as shown in the following dia gram First word 0 First word 1 Unit Indicators Input area 80 Hex Ox Hex Bits corresponding to the addresses of I O Units that are actually connected will be turned ON 1 Bits 0 to 7 correspond to addresses 0 to 7 During normal operation the front panel indicators of each Unit will be as shown in the following diagram Communications Unit MS Lit green NS Lit green TS Lit green PWR Lit green U ERR Not lit TS Lit TS Lit green green Basic I O Unit Special I O Unit 245 Indicators and Error Processing Section 15 1 15 1 5 MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Troubleshooting Check Flowchart START a
213. cted device lists node address order remote I O configurations etc Monitoring Master status remote I O operation errors etc Monitoring Master error histories up to 20 records of error time stamps error codes error types etc Monitoring communications cycle times Settings Setting parameters for OMRON Master Units Setting remote I O allocations scan list Setting initial remote I O parameters started stopped Setting the communications cycle time Setting Slave parameters for Slaves not from OMRON Setting node addresses and baud rates Operations Starting stopping remote I O communications File management Reading writing files for connected device data online and device data resulting from setting Master parameters offline Other Reading writing EDS files Checking for duplicated I O allocations in Master parameters Printing Master Slave parameters Files that can be written Master parameter files parameters for OMRON Master Unit 1 file per node Slave parameter files parameters for Slaves 1 file per node Network file all Master Slave parameters for Masters Slaves in the device list 1 file network EDS file DeviceNet device definition file 1 file device type 18 SECTION 2 Application Overview This section provides a general overview of the DeviceNet CompoBus D Network including basic operations and basic procedures for starting and running the Network 2 1 2 2
214. current consumption nodes Are the power supply specifications met Step 3 ii y Split the power supply ee system by installing more than two power supplies Set the location for the power supply 57 Locating the Power Supply Section 6 3 6 3 Locating the Power Supply 6 3 1 Power Supply Location Patterns The power supply can be located in the configurations shown below Basically select from the configurations 1 and 2 Consider using configuration 3 when power supply specifications cannot be met by configurations 1 and 2 It is possible to use configuration 4 for a duplex power supply Refer to sections 6 4 to 6 7 for more details concerning each con figuration 1 2 3 1 Locating the Nodes on Both Sides of the Power Supply Power Supply Tap or T branch Tap 2 Locating the Nodes on One Side of the Power Supply Note Configuration 1 is recommended for a single power supply to several nodes J ot 4 woe pego e es 3 Splitting the Power Supply System with Multiple Power Supplies Power Supply Tap or T branch Tap System 1 Syst
215. d 8 of the rear DIP switch set to OFF Protective sheet Was the protective sheet removed after mounting and wiring 82 Operations Checklist CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS Master Units Switch settings Section 7 11 Has the Master s unit number been set Refer to Section 4 Master Unit Specifications for details Answer Has the baud rate front DIP switch pins 1 and 2 been set Refer to Section 4 Master Unit Specifications for details Is the baud rate the same on all of the Slaves Has the continue stop communications for error setting front DIP switch pin 3 been set Refer to Section 4 Master Unit Specifications for details Is pin 4 of the front DIP switch set to OFF Has the node address rear DIP switch pins 1 to 6 been set Refer to Section 4 Master Unit Specifications for details Is the Master s node address unique not allocated to a Slave Are pins 7 and 8 of the rear DIP switch set to OFF Protective sheet Was the protective sheet removed after mounting and wiring Slaves Switch settings Has the node address rear DIP switch pins 1 to 6 been set Refer to the relevant explanation in the CompoBus DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 for details Is the Slave s node address unique not allocated to another Slave Has the baud rate DIP switch pins 7 and 8 been set Refer to
216. d after a short time e Check whether all of the Slaves settings are correct See 7 11 Operations Checklist for details e If a particular Slave s NS indicator is always red replace that Slave The NS indicator lights green but turns red after a short time or The NS indicator lights green but starts flashing red after a short time Restart the faulty Slave Unit after checking the following points e Make sure that there are121 Q terminators connected at both ends of the trunk line Connect 121 Q terminators if the wrong resistance is be ing used e Check whether all of the Slaves settings are correct See 7 11 Operations Checklist for details e Check whether the communications cables are wired correctly See 7 11 Operations Checklist for details e Check whether the power supply is set correctly See 7 11 Operations Checklist for details e Check all the nodes for broken wires in the communications and power supply cables attached to the connectors e Check whether power is correctly supplied to the network e If there is nearby equipment that generates electrical noise take steps to shield the Master Slaves and communications cables from the noise e If an error has occurred with OMRON s Master Unit refer to 15 1 Indi cators and Error Processing or 15 3 1 Master Unit Troubleshooting f an error has occurred in a Master Unit supplied by another maker refer to the relevant user s manual 266 e I
217. d and number of words for each Command Block 03 06 00 00 Command Program Beginning word No of code no bytes Response Block 03 06 o0 00 Command Response Program Beginning word No of Data code code no bytes Parameters Program no command and response Set to 0000 Beginning word command and response Set between 00000E00 and 0000FFFE for the CV500 or CVM1 CPU01 and between 00000E00 and 0001FFFE for the CV1000 CV2000 or the CVM1 CPU11 21 The beginning word must be an even number 169 PROGRAM AREA WRITE Section 10 17 No of bytes command and response The number of bytes in an even num ber 148 or smaller Bit 15 must be OFF 0 in the command block Bit 15 will be ON 1 in the response block when the last word data of the program area is re turned Bit 15 OFF 0 Without last word data Bit 15 ON 1 With last word data Bits 0 to 14 No of bytes read Bits 0 to 7 Second byte Bits 8 to 15 first byte Data response The data in the specified program area will be returned in se quence starting from the beginning word 10 17 PROGRAM AREA WRITE Command Block Response Block Parameters 170 Note Writes data to the specified number of consecutive program area words starting from the specified word A maximum of 150 bytes can be written with each com mand To write larger am
218. d for the communications power supply internal circuit power supply and the I O power supplies 3 DeviceNet products that meet EC directives also meet the common emis sion standard EN50081 2 When DeviceNet products are built into equip ment however the measure necessary to ensure that the standard is met will vary with the overall configuration of the control panel the other devices connected to the control panel and other conditions You must therefore confirm that EC directives are met for the overall machine or device The following examples show means of reducing noise 1 2 3 1 Noise from the communications cable can be reduced by installing a ferrite core on the communications cable within 10 cm of the DeviceNet Compo Bus D Master Unit Ferrite Core Data Line Filter LF130B manufactured by Easy Magnet Co Impedance specifications 25 MHZ 105 Q 100 MHZ 190 Q 30 mm 13 mm i mm 2 Wire the control panel with as thick and short electric lines as possible and ground to 100 Q min 3 Keep DeviceNet communications cables as short as possible and ground to 100 Q min xvi SECTION 1 Features and System Configuration This section provides an overview of the DeviceNet CompoBus D network including features specifications and the sys tem configurations 1 1 Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D 2 0 cece eee nee 2 F2 DeviceNet Features ii cess worivice iho hee ete beg gh eri dat
219. d the following crimp terminals Phoenix Contact K K Al series Crimp Terminals a inal i Crimp Wire terminal Insert the line into the terminal and then crimp The following crimp tool is also available Phoenix Contact K K Contact ZA3 Crimp Tool 4 Attach the crimp terminals to the lines and then cover any exposed areas of the cable and lines with electricians tape or heat shrinking tubes 5 Orient the connector properly loosen the line set screws and then insert the lines in order Black blue shield white and then red The wiring method is the same regardless of whether or not the connector is equipped with set screws Connector without Set screws Connector with Set screws Black V Blue CAN low Sy Shield e Black V Blue CAN low Shield a aS Red V Note Be sure the line set screws are sufficiently loosened before attempt ing to insert the lines If these screws are not loose the lines will enter the gaps in the back of the connector and will not lock properly There are colored stickers provided on the Master Unit and Slaves that match the colors of the lines to be inserted Be sure that the colors match when wiring the connectors These colors are as follows Power line negative voltage V Communications line low CAN low Shield Communications line high CAN high Power line positive voltage V 6 Tighten the line set screws for each line in the connec
220. data can be written to and read from the program area Note 1 Protection cannot be cleared if any other device holds the access right 168 PROGRAM AREA READ Section 10 16 2 If memory is write protected via the key switch on the front panel of the PC the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR command is not effective 3 If you forget the password you will not be able to clear program protection without using PROGRAM AREA CLEAR to delete the entire program area Executing PROGRAM AREA CLEAR will release program protection Command Block 03 05 00 O00 00 00 00 00 OO FF FF FF FF Command Program Beginning word Last word Password code no Protect code Response Block 03 05 Command Response code code Parameters The command will be executed normally even if the beginning word and last word are set to values other than those shown below Program no command Set to 0000 Protect code command Set to 00 Beginning word command Set to 00000000 Last word command Set to FFFFFFFF Password command The password that was set in the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT command 10 16 PROGRAM AREA READ Reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive program area words starting from the specified word A maximum of 148bytes can be read with each command To read larger amounts of data use multiple commands and specify the beginning wor
221. determined by using the graph Step 1 Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply from a Graph A voltage drop occurs when a current flows through a communications cable The longer the communications cable the greater the voltage drop The com munications power supply at each node must be 11 VDC or more To ensure this the relationship is plotted as shown in the graph below to find the maximum cur rent that satisfies the voltage of the communications power supply at different trunk line lengths even if there is a voltage drop due to cable resistance 59 Step 1 Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply from a Graph Section 6 4 Thick Cable Distance m 0 25 50 100 150 200 250 300 360 400 450 500 Max current A 8 00 8 00 5 42 2 93 2 01 1 53 1 23 1 03 0 89 0 78 0 69 0 63 Max current A Distance m Thin Cable _Distance m o 10 20 30 40 so 60 70 80 90 100 N Max current A Distance m 6 4 1 Determining the Best Location of the Power Supply from a Graph Verify the Items 1 to 3 below for each node located in the same direction viewed from the power supply Therefore if nodes are located on both sides of the pow er supply these items must be verified for all nodes located in each direction 1 2 3 1 Find A the total current consumption of all the nodes to which communica
222. ding 180 207 setting 180 command list CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs 200 CVM1 and CV series PCs 155 Master Units 210 commands delivering commands through a network 127 commands for C200HX HG HE PCs CLOCK READ 207 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ 204 CONTROLLER DATA READ 206 CONTROLLER STATUS READ 206 MEMORY AREA READ 202 MEMORY AREA WRITE 203 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ 204 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ 205 commands for CVM1 and CV series PCs ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE 183 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE 184 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE 185 Index CLOCK READ 180 CLOCK WRITE 180 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ 164 CONNECTION DATA READ 177 CONTROLLER DATA READ 174 CONTROLLER STATUS READ 177 CYCLE TIME READ 179 ERROR CLEAR 185 ERROR LOG CLEAR 187 ERROR LOG READ 186 FAL FALS READ 182 FILE COPY 192 FILE DATA CHECK 193 FILE DELETE 191 FILE NAME CHANGE 192 FILE NAME READ 188 FORCED SET RESET 197 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL 198 MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER 194 MEMORY AREA FILL 162 MEMORY AREA READ 160 MEMORY AREA TRANSFER 164 MEMORY AREA WRITE 161 MEMORY CARD FORMAT 190 MESSAGE CLEAR 181 MESSAGE READ 181 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ 162 PARAMETER AREA CLEAR 169 PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER 195 PARAMETER AREA READ 166 PARAMETER AREA WRITE 167 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR 173 PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER 196 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT 170 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR 170 PROGRAM AREA READ 171 PROGRAM AREA WRIT
223. e 10 27 MESSAGE READ Note Command Block Response Block Parameters Reads messages generated by MSG 195 The MESSAGE READ MESSAGE CLEAR refer to 10 28 MESSAGE CLEAR and FAL FALS READ commands refer to 10 29 FAL FALS READ share the same command code They are distinguished by bits 14 and 15 of the two byte parameter following the command code To read MSG 195 messages bits 14 and 15 must be OFF 0 Command Message no code parameter 09 20 32 bytes 32 bytes aa 42 Sree vahe Command Response Message no Message Message code code parameter Message no parameter command and response In the command block turn ON 1 the bits of the messages to be read In the response block the bits of the messages being returned will be ON 1 If no bits are turned ON in the com mand block all bits will be OFF 0 in the response block and no further data will be returned First byte Second byte 15 14 13 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ojolo Jo LY LY LY LY ry i LY ry i Set to 0 i t Message no 0 Message no 1 00 Message read Message no 2 t Message no 3 t 5 Message no 4 bee 2 2 2252 5 7 ee Message no 5 b Message no 6 WG geiena et eee eb aeien a Message no 7 Message response Each message is read in the numerical order according to the message
224. e The configuration of the various types of data that can be read or written is shown below The number of bytes required for each type of data is also given 00 Bit is OFF 0 01 Bit is ON 1 00 Bit is OFF 0 but not forced 01 Bit is ON 1 but not forced 02 Bit has been forced OFF 0 03 Bit has been forced ON 1 Word Contents or PV Two Bytes 156 B Bits 0 to 7 second byte Bits 8 to 15 first byte Volume Labels and File Names Section 10 3 Word Contents or PV with Forced Status Four Bytes im Contents of bits 0 to 7 fourth byte Contents of bits 8 to 15 third byte Forced not forced designation for bits 0 to 7 ON forced second byte Forced not forced designation for bits 8 to 15 ON forced first byte Step Status One Byte 00 INACTIVE 01 HALT 02 PAUSE 03 EXECUTE Current Bank No of Expansion DM Two Bytes Bits 0 to 7 second byte Bits 8 to 15 first byte Scheduled Interrupt Interval 10 3 Volume Labels and File Names Bits 15 OFF 0 No expansion DM Bits 15 ON 1 Expansion DM Bits 0 to 14 Current bank no Bits 0 to 14 are valid only when expansion DM is available __ Bits 0 to 15 Third and fourth bytes Interval for scheduled interrupt 1 Bits 16 to 31 First and second bytes Interval for scheduled interrupt 0 Each volume label or file name consists of
225. e s ON OFF delay Tout The Output Slave s ON OFF delay Tru The communications cycle time for the total Network See page 224 Tpc The PC s cycle time Tre The PC s DeviceNet Unit refresh time See page 225 The maximum I O response time Tmax is the total of the following terms TMAX Tin 2 x TRM 2 x Tpe TRF TouT Note 1 Refer to the CompoBus D DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 for details on the Input and Output Slaves delay times 2 Refer to Refresh Time on page 225 and to the PC s Operation Manual for details on the PC s cycle time MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Minimum I O Response Time The minimum I O response times are the I O response times shown in the fol lowing diagram PC Peripheral servicing cycle time DeviceNet Master Unit DRT1 COM Communications Unit Input Unit Output Unit TIN Input Unit ON OFF delay time Tour Output Unit ON OFF delay time Trip W O Unit interface communications time 1 5 ms Trin Input Slave s communications time Slave See page 224 231 Remote I O Communications Characteristics Section 14 1 Trt out Output Slave s communications time Slave See page 224 With the MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Tat in and TprT our will be the equal to the communications time for one Slave The minimum I O response time Tmin is the total of the following terms Tain Tin Trt ig DeviceNet I O response time Trt if Tout Note 1
226. e 130 9 4 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs 134 9 4 1 Sending FINS Commands 0 0 cece eee eee 134 9 4 27 Using LOWR oreet eesi overt Sg ah boston vine shat wuindy hae e a ai de ewes heees 137 9 4 3 C200HX HG HE Programming Example Sending a FINS Command 141 9 5 Sending Explicit Messages 0 0 0 ee cece een nee 143 9 5 1 FINS Command EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND 28 01 0 0 00 145 9 5 2 Programming Examples sssi nepis errno aai iaso EERE EIE eee eee 147 113 Overview Section 9 1 9 1 Overview Message communications enable messages to be set between nodes on a De viceNet CompoBus D Network when required by system conditions The mes sages can be sent between PCs between an OMRON PC and a master made by another company or between Slaves They can be used to send receive data read time data error histories and other data or control operation e g by force setting resetting bits There are two types of messages FINS messages and explicit messages Both types of messages are used by placing send receive instructions in the user pro gram FINS Messages Messages can be exchanged using FINS commands between DeviceNet nodes Masters and Slaves that support FINS messages Both the CVM1 DRM21 V1 and C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Units support FINS mes sages Explicit Messages Service requests can be sent to OMRON Special Slaves and DeviceNet devices mad
227. e I O communications Bit 14 turns ON stopped No change No change 8 2 Scan Lists Contents Master Units use scan lists to determine normal DeviceNet communications The scan lists provide the following e Slave I O allocations telling how many I O points and what node addresses are allocated to each Slave e Communications parameters providing the initial remote I O communications status and the communications cycle time settings Scan lists can be either enabled or disabled when the default remote I O alloca tions are being used They must be enabled for user set allocations Creating Scan Lists Default Remote I O Allocations A scan list can be created by turning ON the Enable Scan List software switch when the PC is in PROGRAM mode communications are active and the scan list is disabled All Slaves that are participating normally in the Network will be registered in the scan list m Scan list enabled m Default allocations os Scan list disabled Remote I O communications User set allocations Scan list enabled User set Remote I O Allocations The user creates the scan list using the Configurator and then registers it in the Master Unit Settings for all Masters and Slaves participating normally in the net work are used as a basis for creating the scan list Scan List Enabled Scan List Disabled Default allocations All Slaves Registered using Default
228. e Master Unit 4 Messages aren t being produced in the Network from another company s configurator for example The values provided by these equations may not be accurate if another compa ny s Master or Slave is being used in the Network 14 1 1 Communications Cycle Time and Refresh Time Communications Cycle Time Communications Time Slave 224 This section explains the communications cycle time communications time Slave and refresh time The communications cycle time is the time from the completion of a Slave s re mote I O communications processing until remote I O communications with the same Slave are processed again The communications cycle time is used to cal culate the maximum I O response time The communications cycle time depends on the number of Masters in the Net work and on whether or not message communications are being performed The following explanation is for a network with one Master For networks with several Masters refer to More than One Master in Network on page 232 Use the equations shown below to calculate the communications cycle time Tru for a network with one Master Note that if the result of this calculation is less than 2 ms the actual communications cycle time will be 2 ms Tram Communications time per Slave High density Unit processing time Explicit message processing time 10xN 1 0 ms Communications Time Per Slave This is the communications time required for
229. e Masters Connect the Configurator to the network using the node address of one of the Slaves Read a Master parameter file from the Configurator 10 Register the Master parameters read in step 9 in the corresponding Master Unit 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all Master Units 12 Disconnect the Configurator from the network 13 Turn ON the power supply to all the Slaves 14 Start communications CON OO o 109 User set Allocations Section 8 4 8 4 3 Actual System Allocation Example The following example provides the procedure for using remote I O communica tions with user set remote I O allocations C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Unit A node 10 24 VDC power supply DRT1 AD04 C200HX Analog Input Terminal 4 inputs node 04 1485C P1A50 Communications Cable Allen Bradley 1458T P2T5 T5 Power Supply Tap DCN1 3 T branch Tap DRT1 OD08 Output Terminal 8 pts node 01 DCN1 3 T branch Tap DCN1 1C DRT1 HD16S T branch Sensor Terminal Tap with 16 inputs node 03 Terminating Resistor 4 Photoelectric proximity sensors C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Unit B node 11 C200HX Configurator DRT1 ID16X Remote Adapter 16 inputs node 00 CQM1 DRT21 I O Link Unit 16 internal input 16 internal output pts node 02 The following remote I O configuration will be us
230. e area as that used by SYSMAC BUS Master Units A SYS MAC BUS Master and DeviceNet Master Unit cannot be mounted to the same PC unless the I O allocations for the DeviceNet Master Unit are changed If the I O allocations are not changed the following problems will result C200HX C200HG and C200HE PCs An error won t occur in the PC but a PC mounting error will occur in the Device Net Master Unit and it won t be possible to use DeviceNet communications C200HS PCs An error won t occur in the PC or the DeviceNet Master Unit but both Masters will access the same data area so neither will operate properly With CVM1 and CV series PCs the DeviceNet Master Unit can be used together with SYSMAC BUS and SYSMAC BUS 2 Master Units With the CS1 Series the DeviceNet Output Area CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 is con tained inside the I O Area CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 For this reason in systems with a large number of I O points where CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 would be allo cated to I O Units ensure that there is no overlap of area allocation using one of the following methods Editing I O Tables By editing the I O tables using the CX Programmer it is possible to ensure that actual I O for Basic I O Units is not allocated to CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 43 CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs Section 4 3 Dimensions 44 Note With automatic allocation I O table creation it is possible that actual I O is allo cated to CIO 005
231. e because it has been removed the baud rates don t match or some other reason Transmission timeout The Error Remote I O Communications Stopped Flag bit 14 will turn ON when ever this flag turns ON If the Communications Continue Stop for Communications Error setting on the front panel DIP switch is set to stop communications then communications will stop and remained stopped when the Transmission Error Flag turns ON mes sage communications will not stop Communications Error Flag Bit 06 This flag is turned ON 1 when a communications error occurs A communica tions error will occur when there is no response from one of the Slaves that are participating in communications The Error Remote I O Communications Stopped Flag bit 14 will turn ON when ever this flag turns ON If the Communications Continue Stop for Communications Error setting on the front panel DIP switch is set to stop communications then communications will stop and remained stopped when the Transmission Error Flag turns ON mes sage communications will not stop Verification Error Flag Bit 07 This flag is turned ON 1 when a verification error occurs An verification error will occur in the following cases e A non existent Slave is registered in the scan list Non existent Slave e One of the Slave s I O parameters don t match the I O parameters regis tered in the scan list Slave Unit I O size differs 217 Status Area Section 13
232. e by other manufacturers using explicit messages defined for DeviceNet Note A specific FINS command command 28 01 is used to send explicit messages Message Support The following tables outline DeviceNet message support Of the commands sent and received via the DeviceNet Master Unit some commands are ad dressed to the CPU Unit and other commands are addressed to the Master Unit Data Send Receive Commands PC sending Instruction used PC receiving command command CVM1 and CV C200HX HG HE C200HS Series CVM1 and CV SEND 192 RECE Not supported Series IVE CS1 Series Not supported C200HX HG HE Not supported C200HS General FINS Commands PC sending Instruction used PC receiving command command CVM1andCV C200HX HG HE C200HS Series CVM1 and CV CMND 194 Master Unit only Series See note CS1 Series IOWR Master Unit only See note C200HX HG HE IOWR Master Unit only See note C200HS Not supported Note Only commands addressed to the DeviceNet Master Unit can be sent to C200HS PCs 114 Overview Section 9 1 Message Communications Overview Type of message Data send receive commands General FINS commands CVM1 SEND 192 RECV 193 CMND 194 CV Series CS1 None IOWR Series C200HX HG HE CS1 series CS1 series C200HX HG HE or CS1 series C200HX HG HE C200HX HG HE or CVM1 CV series PC _C200HS or CVM1 CV series PC CVM1 CV series PC
233. e code data error data Yes no FALS no message Status Mode Parameters Status response The operating status of the PC as follows 00 Stop program not being executed 175 CONTROLLER STATUS READ Section 10 23 01 Run program being executed 80 CPU on standby the start switch is OFF or the CPU is waiting for a signal from a device such as a SYSMAC BUS 2 Remote I O Slave Unit Mode response One of the following PC modes 00 PROGRAM 01 DEBUG 02 MONITOR 04 RUN Fatal error data response The contents of PC fatal error information for de tails refer to the CV series PC Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams L 1 Cycle time over Da ae e E Bain ok 1 Program error be Satta a S p A TARE 1 I O setting error Pe HS Gree stys SoS yates 1 I O point overflow Ce ee E E eee ee 1 CPU bus error Dey age aia st pale See es ae ee aa 1 Duplication error eg whe Ne niga oat a Mes cate yaa ton to 2 1 I O bus error Baa den Selene ein OS RAS EBay Rm nel eS oe Be 1 Memory error First byte Second byte Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Ly i i ry ry i 1 FALS error 1 Watch dog timer error t 1 Fatal SFC error Non fatal error data response The contents of PC non fatal error informa tion for details refer to the CV series PC Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams First byte Second byte Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
234. e communications cables turn OFF the power supply to all PCs Slaves and communications power supplies 2 Use crimp terminals for wiring Connecting bare twisted wires can cause the cables to come OFF break or short circuit most likely resulting in incorrect operation and possibly damage to the Units 3 Use suitable crimp tools and crimping methods when attaching crimp termi nals Consult the manufacturer of the tools and terminals you are using In appropriate tools or methods can result in broken wires Connecting Communications Cables to T branch Taps Section 7 4 4 Be extremely careful to wire all signal lines power lines and shielding wire correctly 5 Tighten all set screws firmly Tighten to a torque of between 0 25 and 0 3 NEm 6 Wire the signal lines power lines and shielding wire so that they do not be come disconnected during communications 7 Do not pull on communications cables with excessive force They may be come disconnected or wires may break 8 Allow leeway so that communications cables do not have to be bent further than natural The Cables may become disconnected or wires may break if the cables are bent too far 9 Never place heavy objects on communications cables They may break 10 Double check all wiring before turning ON the power supply 7 4 Connecting Communications Cables to T branch Taps This section shows how to connect a communications cable with a connector attached to a
235. e contents of DM 2001 to 0000 each cycle if the IOWR instruction execution and message commu nications reception of the response have been com pleted If an error response is returned compares the contents of DM 2001 to the error code 1104 If the error code is not 1104 i e if the error is not insuf ficient records then the contents of DM 2001 is moved to DM 0006 and the contents of IR 000 are shifted to the right twice to torn ON IR 00000 and then IR 00001 to retry the command Compares the contents of DM 2004 number of records read to 0000 if the command ended normally The con tents of IR 000 are then shifted to the left once to indi cate that records were read and twice to indicate that no records were read Error History Section 15 2 00003 00003 Uses indirect addressing with DM 0097 and DM 0098 to store 5 words of data in consecutive words remov ing the error history data from the response data ADD 30 0002 DM 0098 DM 0098 XFER 0003 DM 0098 ADD 30 0003 DM 0098 DM 0098 MOV 21 SBB 51 DM 2004 0001 DM 2004 MOV 21 Equals Flag DM 0095 DM 0097 Adds 0005 to the contents of DM 0097 to move to the next 5 words Adds 0002 to the contents of DM 0098 to change to the address to the next word after the error code and error details Uses indirect addressing with DM 0098 to store the time stamp from the CPU Unit s clock in
236. e eee 194 10 46 PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER 0 00000 e eee eee eee eee 195 10 47 PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER 0 000 000 eee ee 196 10 48 FORCED SET RESET foie i ok bed A pe ew SA gk oy ee a AG 197 10 49 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL 00 0 ccc cee ee 198 SECTION 11 FINS Commands to CS1 series and C200HX HG HE CPU Units 199 11 Command List 22 00 felt ieeha tee AAAS KARA aa a Rie ed Saha GARE a ha 200 11 2 Memory Area Designations 0 0c eee ce eee 200 11 3 MEMORY AREA READ m ieee bin Bie eee be a HO RO Ble Hb BE 202 11 4 MEMORY AREA WRITE 0000 cece cece nen n eee eee 203 11 5 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ 000 cece eee e tenes 204 11 6 COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ 0 00 c cece eee eee 204 11 7 REGISTER COMPOSITE READ 0 2 eee cece ene eens 205 11 8 CONTROLLER DATA READ 2 00 00 cece ccc nets 206 11 9 CONTROLLER STATUS READ cecce ed e i cece eens 206 11 1 0 CLOCK READ sotene e naa e nes ad Cheer weak hes hes Gee ee Beohaes ate 207 SECTION 12 FINS Commands to Master Units 209 1221 Command List amesa paren a wie act aay ie abe ets wach Rate ae BM haa Bats 210 12 2 RESET e nei ee A Rei ci Aa ee ek ec R 210 12 3 CONTROLLER DATA READ 20 0 0 c ccc e nee nee 210 12 4 ECHOBACK TEST eie cache eek ae arene We a Gi we deb a ee cad ela acacia diibe whg a eats 211 12 5 ERROR TOG READ m reor G
237. e manual Pages 2 7 8 22 32 37 40 185 193 208 211 212 216 220 224 227 234 236 239 242 252 254 313 325 328 335 340 345 355 356 365 371 377 379 Information on CS1 series PCs added Pages 3 6 Major changes to model information Pages 7 15 19 341 347 Notes changed added Page 13 Correction made to information on communications cycle time Pages 21 27 Information on reference sources added changed Pages 23 228 Information on communications setup added Sections 5 1 to 5 3 Removed Sections 5 4 8 to 5 4 12 Removed Page 181 Information on dual power supply changed Page 184 Torque data changed Information on mounting added Section 7 2 2 Removed Pages 187 219 226 Changes to graphics Pages 190 192 Torque data changed Sections 7 11 7 12 Removed Pages 204 218 384 400 401 Changes made to tables Pages 234 246 253 259 260 Information on explicit messages added Page 326 Information on error log data added Pages 338 339 Changes made to information on communications cycle time Information for net works with more than one Master moved to page 347 Pages 346 349 Equations changed added Section 14 1 3 Removed Page 382 Information on troubleshooting for Analog I O Units Temperature Input Terminals the C200H I O Link Unit and the RS 232C Unit added Page 399 Change to introduction Information on connection to other company s Masters removed Pages 402 408
238. e right to turn ON IR 000005 and then shifts it one more bit to turn ON IR 000004 to retry the clear command Places 0001 into IR 000 to repeat processing from the error history read 00004 10112 _ Fk ___ Shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit to the left to turn Message ON IR 000005 Commu Bennan Transfers five words of command data from DM 1010 at Flag the local node to the Master Unit Unit 0 00005 25506 Shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit to the right to turn ON IR 000004 to retry the clear command or shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit to the left to turn ON IR 000006 Equals Flag command failed 25506 Equals Flag execution normal ao 262 Troubleshooting Section 15 3 15 3 Troubleshooting 15 3 1 Master Unit Troubleshooting PC Error CVM1 DRM21 V1 The indicators of a Master Unit connected to a C200HX C200HG C200HE or C200HS PC will indicate when an error has occurred Check the Master Unit s indicators and perform the error processing described in the following table When an error occurs in a Slave the Slave can be identified from the status of the Master s indicators or from the status flags in the PC s Special I O Unit area Use the following table to troubleshoot errors in a PC that has a CVM1 DRM21 V1 Master Unit installed Refer to the CV series PCs Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams for more details Error Probable cause An I O verification error occurred
239. e sure that the Master s unit number setting is correct The acceptable unit number ranges are as follows CS1G CPU 0 to F CS1H CPU 0 to F C200HX CPU3L_J E CPU4L1 E 0to9 C200HX CPU5_1 E CPU6L1 E OtoF C200HG CPU3L1 E CPU4 E 0to9 C200HG CPU5L1 E CPU6L_ E OtoF C200HE CPU11 E CPU32 E CPU42 E 0to9 C200HS CPU E O0to9 e Make sure that the Slave s unit number hasn t been set on any other Special 1O Units A Special I O Unit error occurred e Make sure that the Unit is connected properly e Check to see if the IOWR instruction was executed with the Message Com munications Enabled Flag turned ON e Restart the Unit Replace the Unit if it doesn t restart An I O Bus error occurred e Make sure that the Unit is connected properly 263 Troubleshooting Section 15 3 No I O Data Communications Use the following table to troubleshoot the network when I O data communica tions won t start The I O Data Communications Flag remains OFF Error Probable cause All of the Master s indicators are OFF e Check whether power is being supplied to the PC e Check whether the Master Unit is mounted in the Backplane correctly e When a watchdog timer WDT error has occurred in the PC follow the procedures described in the PC s manual to correct the problem e All of the indicators will be OFF when
240. e times see the explanation of the remote I O communications performance 14 1 3 More than One Master in Network The following equation shows the remote I O communications cycle time Try when there is more than one Master in the Network and message communica tions are not being performed An example for two Master Unit is used 232 Remote I O Communications Characteristics Section 14 1 First the Network is divided into two groups Master A and the Slaves in remote I O communications with it and Master B and the Slaves in remote I O commu nications with it Le Slaves in remote I O commu nications with Master A Se F K Slaves in remote I O commu nications with Master B Group A Group B Master A Master B Slave A Slave B Slave D Slave E Slave F Slave C l Although in the above diagram the Slaves are separated into two groups for con venience the actual physical positions in the Network are irrelevant Next we can refer to the previous equations and calculate the communications cycle time for each group as if they were separate Networks Master A Master B Slave A Slave C Slave F Slave B Slave D Slave E Group A communications cycle time TRM A Group A communications cycle time TRM B In Networks with two Mast
241. ecifications 52 timers changing PV 161 162 203 reading Completion Flag status 162 164 165 202 204 205 reading PV 160 162 164 165 202 204 205 Transmission Error Flag 219 troubleshooting Analog Input Units 270 C200H T O Link Unit 271 Master Units 265 RS 232C Unit 273 Slave Units 268 Temperature Input Terminals 271 Units reading the model numbers of connected Units 177 Verification Error Flag 219 volume labels 159 creating deleting 191 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No W267 E1 6 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code August 1996 Revised content Original production June 1997 Complete revision to include V1 Master Units December 1997 The manual was revised to include new information on net work configuration and wiring and Temperature Input Ter minals Section 3 Added to include information on network con figuration and specifications Page 72 Changes to table Pages 72 to 84 Additions made to include DRT1 AD04H Pages 91 to 97 Information added on Temperature Input Terminals Section 6 Added to include information on the commu nications power supply Section 7 Extensively revised to include information on wiring the network Page 267 Informa
242. ecify reading 030 20 records from the error history from the Master Unit MOV 0002 D00001 at node 05 of network 01 030 MOV 0001 D00002 J 030 MOV 05FE D00003 030 MOV 0000 D00004 J 030 MOV 0064 D00005 030 Mov 0002 D00006 Place data into control data words to specify clearing 030 the error history from the Master Unit at node 05 of MOV 0004 D00007 network 01 030 MOV 0001 D00008 030 MOV 05FE D00009 030 MOV 0000 D00010 030 MOV 0064 D00011 A50015 030 Nov 2102 D01000 Place the command data for ERROR HISTORY READ Fi into D01000 to D01002 irst Scan Flag 030 MOV 0000 D01001 J 030 MOV 0014 D01002 030 MOV 2103 D01003 Places the command data for ERROR HISTORY 030 CLEAR into D01003 MOV 2005 D00097 030 Place 2005 0100 and 0199 into D00997 Se ang 7 D00099 to use D02005 D00100 and DO as the Mey eo ee initial addresses for indirectly addressing storing the 030 response code the first error history data word and the Mov 0199 D00099 last error history data word respectively 030 MoV D00097 D00095 Transfer the contents of D00097 and D00098 to D00095 030 and D00096 MOV 00098 D00096 J 030 Mov 0001 0000 Sets the contents of CIO 0000 to 0001 255 000003 AS50200 150112 151000 194 _ H _ CMND D01003 D02000 Port En Message Error abled Co
243. ecify sending 9 bytes to node 05 unit FE on network 01 and to receive 10 bytes in return Place the command data for EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND into D01000 to D01004 Places 0001 into CIO 0000 Sends 9 bytes of command data to node 05 unit FE on network 01 and receives 10 bytes of response data and stores it in D02000 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the left Stores the completion code in A503 to D00006 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the right to reset CIO 000000 Example 2 Sending an Explicit Message Using IOWR Master Unit ma Explicit message 146 chine No 0 ba IOWR Unit A Node address 05 Unit address FE or 10 hex Network 01 as EEE Slave node 02 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 5 Operation The vendor code is read from a slave OMRON vendor code 002F hex using the EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command 28 01 The command data is written starting at DM 1000 and the response data is stored starting at DM 2000 When execution of CMND 194 has been completed the completion code is stored in DM 0006 and the instruction is executed again Command Details The following command is used IOWR C S D C DM 0000 Control word Settings hex DM 0000 05FE Response Destination node address 05 Destination unit address FE or 10 S DM 1000 First source word Settings hex DM 1000 8207 First response word DM 2000 DM 1001
244. ed Ca SO de eRe FRG ee eed ek eae ed 211 12 6 ERROR LOG CLEAR perest ges sche eas pe Eola es betes sa galls 212 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 13 Software Switches and Status Area ceeeee 13 1 Software Switch Status Area 0 ccc cece cece eee e errre 13 2 Software Switches 6 a6 ek secre Foes kg Gig hE te PEGA Big BERNER EIR th 13 3 Status ATCA se amp Sse syice die gpeshilev gr te Sede stele antem erence a eect bo Bne anton ele geet tog doled 4 Sel anion aas SECTION 14 Communications Timing cccccccccees 14 1 Remote I O Communications Characteristics 20 0 0 ccc eens 14 2 Message Communications Time 00 eee eee SECTION 15 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 15 1 Indicators and Error Processing 0 eee cece eee eee eee 15 2 Error History 003 ost ehh See Rb OG Beh ES PROG CSO See See OA E es 15 3 Troubleshooting istisna hae alesh o HA ees ees He Ke eee goats 15 4 Maintenances s ca na 64 05 had sed Mos Bh oe ae eee OSS Sas die suo aries Appendices A FINS Command Response Codes 0 0 00 c ccc eee eee eee B Node Address Settings Table s misse rnnr eee eee cee eee ee tenet e ee ees C Multi vendor Applications 00 cece eee eee eens D Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions 0 00005 Glossary 4c2ccnecouatods tannin timeout aioe INDEX 4 6020 E E E paren che tea E E E Revision History
245. ed as the date of the file that has been transferred Note 1 The checksum is stored at the front bytes 0 and 1 of the file Thus file trans fer or comparison is effective from the next byte after the checksum 2 This command cannot be executed when the access right is held by any oth er device or when the PC is write protected by the key switch on the front panel 3 The PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER command cannot be executed when the PC is in the RUN mode Command Block 22 0C 00 00 00 00 0E 00 12 bytes A ee Command Parameter Program Beginning word No of bytes Disk no File name code code no Program area specification File specification 194 FORCED SET RESET Section 10 48 Response Block 22 0C Command Response Data length code code Parameters Parameter code command As follows 0000 Data transferred from the program area to the file device 0001 Data transferred from the file device to the program area 0002 Data compared Program no and beginning word command As follows 0000 Program no 00000E00 Beginning word No of bytes command The number of data bytes to be transferred or compared as follows 0000F1FE CV500 or CVM1 CPU01 V 0001F1FE CV1000 CV2000 or CVM1 CPU11 21 V Note If 00000000 is specified as the number of transfer data bytes no file transfer or comparison will be performed and a norm
246. ed for the above Network m Remote Adapter Master Unit A Output Terminal m VO Link Unit Master UnitB 7 Sensor Terminal L Analog Input Terminal 1 2 3 1 Make the initial settings for the Master Units A and B as follows a Set the unit numbers The following example is for unit number 1 for both Master Units The following words are allocated for the software switches and status areas for a unit number of 1 IR 110 to IR 119 and DM 6034 to DM 6035 b Set the node addresses The following example is for a node address of 10 for Master Unit A pins 2 and 4 turned ON and 11 for Master Unit B pins 1 2 and 4 turned ON J A P A Ww E r r The remote I O words allocated to the Master Units Ma 2345678 are not used 212345678 A o J or 110 User set Allocations Section 8 4 DRT1 ID16X Remote Adapter 2 Allocated points c Set the baud rates and the communications continue stop settings for communications errors The following example shows a baud rate of 500 kbps pin 1 OFF and pin 2 ON and the setting to stop communica tions for communications errors pin 3 ON v zZ 1234 Ao H or Make the initial settings for the Slaves DIP switch settings Node Pins 9 and 10 address Inputs Outputs pins 1 to 6 0 pins1 to 6 500 kbps Not used OFF COT Te ee 512345678910 OFF and DRT1 OD08 Output Terminal 1 pin1 ON pin8 Pin 9 ON to hold
247. ee wee et ee De Red ee gle ghee SoBe 34 4 2 CVM Land CV series PCS succsee ee SS EEA Se De ie E E a Sew es 35 4 3 CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE and C200HS PCs 0 0 40 SECTION 5 Specifications for Connectable Devices 45 5 1 Cables and Connectors sereisas pe nea aa cee nent nee eens 46 SECTION 6 Communications Power Supply eee0 55 6 1 Basic Concepten rsss sae awash y es ae eth SG eM ball ok tats 56 6 2 Flow Charts i einet eero ehtoa debe ites We GRA e i bhatt ead 57 6 3 Locating the Power Supply 0 0 eee ccc eee eens 58 6 4 Step 1 Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply from a Graph 59 6 5 Step 2 Calculating the Best Location of the Actual Nodes 63 6 6 Step 3 Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies 67 6 7 Dual Power Supply sic aces ace pant laren ae ha CRRA eRe eee ae 8 67 6 8 Configuration Design Checklist 0 00 0 eee eee eee eee 68 vii Viii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 7 Installation isiesescewes wir swe w eee seats 69 Tel General Precautions s rataan eee Pye ee oe ea arctan ae ade 70 T2 MOUnUIn ge a r aa eas EE ea E A E ERE E ees E E AE 70 7 3 Connecting Communications Cables 0 0 eee eee 72 7 4 Connecting Communications Cables to T branch Taps 000000 75 7 5 Connecting Terminating Resistors 00 cece eect ee 76
248. em 2 Special Power Supply Tap Special Power Supply Tap Remove the fuse and split V a fuse V 0 Make V the same for y t Systems 1 and 2 24V OV 4 Duplex Power Supply with Multiple Power Supplies Special Power Special Power Supply Tap Supply Tap CO LON LOO LTT on to Ee EI eA Ee C Co Communications Communications power supply Ngae ee Node power suppi 58 Step 1 Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply from a Graph Section 6 4 Note If power supply specifications cannot be met with a single power supply when the current capacity of the thick cable exceeds 8 A even after the power supply location is modified use more than one communications power supply In con figuration 1 the power can be supplied bi directionally to the trunk line as long as each current capacity is 8 A or less when using thick cable Accordingly it is pos sible to have a configuration with a total maximum current capacity of up to 16 A Consider changing to thick cable to meet specifications if the current capacity of the thin cable exceeds 3 A when using thin cable for the trunk line
249. ems code Memory area code Response Block 01 01 Command Response Data code code Parameters Memory area code command The data area to read Beginning address command The address of the first word bit flag to read from memory Specify 00 for the 3rd byte No of items command The number of items to be read Specify 0000 to 03E7 0 to 999 decimal The command can complete normally even if zero items are specified When reading through a DeviceNet network however the total number of bytes in one read must be 156 or less Adjust the number of items according to the number of bytes required per item so that the total number of bytes being read does not exceed 156 Data response The data from the specified words is returned in sequence starting from the beginning address PVs for timers and counters are returned as BCD The required number of bytes in total is calculated as follows No of bytes required by each item x No of items Memory Areas The following area can be read refer to 11 2 Memory Area Designations for PC word bit address designations Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes CIO LR HR or AR Word contents 80 2 area Timer Counter Completion Flag status 01 1 200 MEMORY AREA WRITE Section 11 4 Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 EM Word contents 90 to 97 98 2 A8 to AF Note Refer to 11 2 2
250. er 32 input 32 output words Message commu nications Max No of nodes per Master Unit FINS commands 8 Explicit messages 6 3 FINS commands 8 Explicit messages 63 Not supported Instruc tions used Data send receive SEND 192 REC V 193 FINS commands CMND 194 Data send receive None FINS commands IOWR Not supported Software switches 1 word scan list register clear remote I O communications start stop etc Status 34 11 words status data area registered Slave data normal Slave data current communications cycle time CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 4 2 PC CVM1 and CV CS1 Series C200HX HG HE C200HS Series Settings Rotary switch Unit number Back panel DIP switch Node address Front panel DIP switch Baud rate Continue stop communications for communications errors Displays 2 color indicators Two Unit status and Network status 7 segment display One Node address and error codes Dot indicators Two Registered scan list enable disable Voltage of communica 24 VDC 10 supplied via special cable tions power supply Current consumption Communications power supply 45 mA max from communications connector Internal I O power supply 250 mA at 5 VDC max from PC Weight 360 g 250 g 4 2 CVM1 and CV series PCs Specifications Master Unit model number CVM1 DRM21 V1 Communications power 11 to 25 VDC supply vo
251. er Unit 23 No Unit 01 A file device does not exist Configuration of Unit Mount the Memory Card or disk where specified 02 The specified memory Check the specifications of the does not exist installed file memory 03 No clock exists Check the model number 24 Start stop not 01 The data link tables either Data link tables Set the data link tables correctly 279 FINS Command Response Codes Appendix A in SYSMAC BUS System Main code Sub Probable cause Check point Remedy code 25 Unit error 02 Parity checksum error Contents of memory Transfer correct data into memory occurred because of being processed incorrect data 03 I O setting error The I O Unit configuration Either change the actual registered I O configuration configuration to match the differs from the actual registered one or generate the I O tables again 04 Too many I O points I O points registered Redesign the system to remain in I O tables within permissible limits 05 CPU bus error An error CPU bus line Check the Unit Service Boards occurred during data and cable connections and issue transfer between the CPU the ERROR CLEAR command and a CPU Bus Unit 06 I O duplication error A Rack numbers unit Check the system s settings and rack number unit number numbers and I O eliminate any duplication or I O word allocation has addresses in PC been duplicated Setup 07
252. er to the Nodes for details Can the power supply handle the inrush current when the system is started Is the network be grounded in only one location Refer to 7 7 Grounding the Network for details Is the ground connection near the middle of the network Is a separate ground line used 83 SECTION 8 Remote I O Communications This section describes setting up and using remote I O communications to automatically transfer data between a PC to which a Master Unit is mounted and the Slaves controlled by the Master Unit S21 OVErvieW sti s ate se et eed BoA eae nets E hatte ieee 86 8 2 SCAM EIStS hens bed dee ede a a ere Seg eel adaa dee Se ar aaa a aT 92 8 3 Default Remote I O Allocation s ceiro coia caa oia aa aaa eee ene ences 95 8 3 1 PC Allocation Areas 0 cee eee ee ee teen ene ne ENR 95 8 3 2 W O Allocations and Errors 0 0 0 eee eee 96 8 3 3 Slave Models and I O Allocations 0 0 0 e eee eee 97 8 3 4 Default Remote I O Allocation Example 00000 100 8 3 5 Basic Application Procedure 0 0 00 cee eee 101 8 3 6 Actual System Allocation Example 0 00 0 eee ee eee eee 102 8 4 User set Allocations sonenn 0 0 cece ee nent nee beeen nee ene 105 8 4 1 Example of User set Allocations 00 0 c cece eee eee 108 8 4 2 Basic Application Procedure 0 0 0 cee eee 108 8 4 3 Actual System Allocation Example
253. error The actual value returned will be 4100 plus the FAL FALS number for details refer to the CV series PC Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams lf no FAL or FALS error has occurred 0000 will be returned Error message response The error message of the present FAL FALS num ber If there is no error 16 spaces ASCII 20 will be returned 10 24 CYCLE TIME READ Initializes the PC s cycle time history or reads the average max and min cycle time Command Block 06 20 Command code Parameter Response Block The response format is as follows when the parameter is 00 when initializing 06 20 Command Response code code The response format is as follows when the parameter is 01 when reading 06 20 Command Response Average cycle time Max cycle time Min cycle time code code Parameters Parameter code command As follows 00 Initializes the cycle time 01 Reads the average maximum and minimum cycle time Average cycle time max cycle time min cycle time response Each val ue is expressed in 8 digit BCD in 0 1 ms increments For example if 00 00 06 50 is returned the cycle time is 65 ms 177 CLOCK READ Section 10 25 The average cycle time is obtained as follows Average cycle time max cycle time min cycle time 2 10 25 CLOCK READ Reads the clock Command Block
254. error PC error Configuration data error Routing table error Flashing red No change E4 lt Master node address E8 lt Master node address E5 lt Master node address Bit 03 turns ON Node address duplication Bus Off detected No change Lit red FO amp Master node address F1 lt Master node address Bit 01 turns ON Illegal switch setting Initialization error with PC PC interface error Flashing red Not lit F3 lt Master node address Bit 00 turns ON F5 lt Master node address F6 amp Master node address Local node is not part of network send response message destroyed Send error send response message destroyed Remote node busy send response message destroyed Local node busy send response message destroyed Illegal message received reception message data destroyed Illegal header send response message destroyed Reception buffer full reception response message destroyed No change No change No change 117 FINS Commands Responses Section 9 2 Note The send response message or reception response message will be destroyed if any of the following occur e If any communications instructions GEND 192 RECV 193 CMND 194 or IOWR are executed from the PC at intervals less than the message commu nications time e If messages are received from other
255. ers the communications cycle time for the entire Net work will be the sum of the communications cycle times for the groups Tru Tava TRM B Although this example shows only two Masters in the Network the total commu nications cycle time for any Network can be calculated by dividing it into groups and adding the communications cycle times of all groups 14 1 4 System Startup Time This section describes the system startup time for a Network operating with the scan list enabled The system startup time is the delay from the time that the Master Unit is turned ON until remote I O communications begin Here we as sume that the scan list is enabled and that remote I O communications are set to start automatically at startup System Startup Times The following table shows the system startup times for two cases In the first case the Master Unit starts up just after all of the Slaves power supplies are turned ON In the second case the Master Unit is restarted while communica tions are in progress Slave s indicator status System startup time The Master is started just after Slave startup The NS indicator is OFF or flashing green 6 seconds Just the Master is restarted The NS indicator is flashes red while the Master is OFF 8 seconds Just the Slaves are restarted 10 seconds 233 Message Communications Time Section 14 2 Program Example Note As shown in the preceding table it t
256. es PCs Note however that I O memory addresses and specification methods for the 3rd operand of IOWR instructions are different Master Unit machine No 0 Node address 05 FINS unit address FE or 10 hex Network 01 FINS command The program reads 20 records of error history data from the Master Unit stores the data and then clears the error history This process is repeatedly executed The ERROR HISTORY READ 21 02 and ERROR HISTORY CLEAR 21 03 commands are used The ERROR HISTORY READ command is stored in memory starting from DM 1000 and the ERROR HISTORY CLEAR command is stored starting from DM 1010 The responses for both commands are stored starting at DM 2000 The error records starting at DM 2005 are moved one record at a time 10 bytes or 5 words starting at DM 0098 using indirect addressing When 20 records have been read out they are moved to DM 0100 to DM 0199 When a total of 20 records have been stored in memory the previous records are overwritten start ing at DM 0100 Because the data is in the DM area it will be preserved even if power is turned OFF Time stamps are not provided in the error history data for the C200HW DRM21 V1 Master Unit Thus each time 5 words are read out the time data from the CPU Unit is used to overwrite the time data from the error history which is all zeros when read out If the ERROR HISTORY READ command ends in an error the response code is stored in DM 0006 If there
257. eter outside diameter Shield weaving Signal pair Shield weaving Signal pair Blue white Blue white 4 Power pair Red black Shield line Power pair Red black Shield line 46 Cables and Connectors Section 5 1 Showa Electric Cables Model number Thick cable Thin cable Signal wires Power wires DCA2 5C10 TDN18 Series Signal wires Power wires DCA1 5C10 TDN24 Series Conductor cross sectional area 0 86 mm2 2 17 mm2 0 20 mm2 0 38 mm2 Conductor outer diameter 1 21 mm 1 92 mm 0 60 mm 0 80 mm Color Blue white Red black Blue white Red black Impedance 120 Q 10 120 Q 10 Propagation delay 1 36 ns ft 1 36 ns ft Attenuation factor 500 kHz 0 25 dB ft 125 kHz 0 13 dB ft 500 kHz 0 50 dB ft 125 kHz 0 29 dB ft Conductor resistance 6 9 Q 1 000 ft 22 6 Q 1 000 m 2 7 Q 1 000 ft 8 9 Q 1 000 m 28 Q 1 000 ft 91 9 Q 1 000 m 17 5 Q 1 000 ft 57 4 Q 1 000 m Maximum current 8A 3A Finished outer diameter Allen Bradley Cables Model number 11 2 to 12 1 mm Thick cable 6 9 mm Thin cable Signal wires 1485C P1 A50 Power wires Signal wires 1485C P1 C150 Power wires Conductor cross sectional area 0 82 mm2 1 65 mm2 0 20 mm2 0 33 mm2 Conductor outer diameter 1 17 mm 1 68 mm 0 06 mm 0 79 mm Color Blue
258. etting method Loc Netwk The network address of each CPU Bus Unit mounted to the PC 1 to 127 SIOU unit The unit number of each CPU Bus Unit mounted to the PC and connecting it to a network 0 to 15 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 9 3 9 3 1 Data Send Receive Instructions NETWORK SEND SEND 192 Ladder Symbol 192 SEND S Operands S 1St source word D 1St destination word C 1St control word Description Control Data Note Local node source Destination node D c Variations j SEND 192 SEND 192 transfers data beginning at word S in the local PC to addresses be ginning at D at the designated node on the designated Network The possible values for D depend on the Unit from which the data is being trans mitted If D is in the EM Area data will be transferred to the current EM bank in the PC to which the data is being transmitted The control words beginning with C specify the number of words to be sent the destination node and other parameters Some control data parameters depend on the type of Network through which data is being sent SEND 192 only starts the transmission Verify that the transmission has been completed with the Network Status Flags in A502 The control data depends on the destination The following information is for De viceNet networks Bits 00 to 07 Bits 08 to 15 Number of words 1 to 76 words 0001 to 004C Destinat
259. ettings after Replacing Nodes Settings after Replacing Master Units 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note After replacing a Unit set the new Unit s switches to the same settings that were on the old Unit The scan list network file must be registered after replacing a Master Unit Use the following procedures Default Remote I O Allocations Turn on power to all Slaves and then turn ON the Scan List Enable software switch bit 00 The scan list will be registered User set Remote I O Allocations Perform one of the following procedures Using a Network File The following procedure can be used to write the scan list to the Master Unit from a network file saved on a disk 1 Turn on power to the Master Unit and the Configurator 2 Place the Configurator online and read the network file that was previously saved 3 Use the device parameter editing operation specify the Master Unit that has been replaced and write the scan list in the network file to the Master Unit ZF Replace Master Unit a i Network file L Write to new Master Unit Recreating the Allocations from the Configurator The following procedure can be used to recreate user set allocations and write them to the Master Unit 1 Turn on power to the Master Unit Slaves and Configurator 2 Place the Configurator online and create the device list 3 Spec
260. etwork message destroyed The local node is not in network attempted to send response message but message was destroyed Local node not participating Send error occurred attempted to send response message but message was destroyed Remote node busy Remote mode was busy attempted to send response message but message was destroyed Illegal header An illegal header was detected attempted to send response message but message was destroyed Receive response message destroyed Reception buffer full The internal reception buffer in the local node was full attempted to receive response message but message was destroyed Illegal message An illegal message was received and destroyed Send response message destroyed Local node busy Local mode was busy attempted to send response message but message was destroyed Code from 7 segment display on Master Unit Error node address Configuration error A configuration data error occurred E8 I O area overlap Words in the Slave I O areas are overlapping do I O area range exceeded An I O area is outside the valid areas d1 Unsupported Slave An unsupported Slave is connected d2 Verification error Slave missing A Slave registered in the scan list is not connected to the network d5 Verification error Slave I O size differs The I O capacity of a Slave doe
261. f a particular Slave s NS indicator is always red replace that Slave Section 15 3 Troubleshooting Trouble Adding a Slave Use the following table to troubleshoot problems in adding a Slave to the net to the Network work Error Probable cause The NS indicator remains OFF e Check if the baud rate of the Master Unit coincides with that of the Slave Unit If the baud rates are different correct the baud rate of the Slave Unit e Check that the Slave s connector is connected correctly e Check whether the communications power supply is supplying 24 VDC e Make sure that the Master is operating properly When using an OMRON Master refer to the troubleshooting tables in 15 1 3 Identifying Errors from the Indicators or 15 3 1 Master Unit Troubleshooting When using another company s Master Unit refer to that Master s user s manual e Check whether the communications cables are wired correctly See 7 11 Operations Checklist for details e Check whether the power supply is set correctly See 7 11 Operations Checklist for details e Check for broken wires in the communications and power supply cables attached to the connectors The NS indicator continues to flash green e Make sure that the Master is operating properly When using an OMRON Master refer to the troubleshooting tables in 15 1 3 Identifying Errors from the Indicators or 15 3 1 Master Unit Troubleshooting When using another company s Mas
262. fications Thick cable 5 wires 100 m Appendix D Manufacturer OMRON DCA1 5C10 Thin cable 5 wires 100 m OMRON TDN18 10G Thick cable 5 wires 10 m Showa Electric TDN18 30G Thick cable 5 wires 30 m Showa Electric TDN18 50G Thick cable 5 wires 50 m Showa Electric TDN18 100G Thick cable 5 wires 100 m Showa Electric TDN18 300G Thick cable 5 wires 300 m Showa Electric TDN18 500G Thick cable 5 wires 500 m Showa Electric TDN24 10G Thin cable 5 wires 10 m Showa Electric TDN24 30G Thin cable 5 wires 30 m Showa Electric TDN24 50G Thin cable 5 wires 50 m Showa Electric TDN24 100G Thin cable 5 wires 100 m Showa Electric TDN24 300G Thin cable 5 wires 300 m Showa Electric TDN24 500G Thin cable 5 wires 500 m Showa Electric 1485C P1 A50 Thick cable 5 wires 50 m Allen Bradley 1485C P1 C150 MSTB2 5 5 ST 5 08AU Thin cable 5 wires 150 m Specifications For node connection Without connector set screws Attach to DRT1 Series Allen Bradley Manufacturer Phoenix Contact K K MSTBP 2 5 5 STF 5 08 AB AU For T branch Tap and node connection With connector set screws Phoenix Contact K K SO Attach to CVM1 DRM21 V1 C200HW DRM21 V1 CQM1 DRT21 DCN1 For node connection Multi drop wiring Phoenix Without connector set screws Contact K K
263. for High density Units Soldered Pressure welded Crimp Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions Connector Cables for MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Units Unit connected GT1 ID16ML 0 I O Block G7TC I16 GT1 OD16ML 0 I O Block G7TC OC16 G7OD SOC16 G70D FOM16 G7OA ZOC16 3 M7F GT1 OD16ML 1 0 1 0 Block G7TC OC16 1 G7OD SOC16 1 G70D FOM16 1 G7OA ZOC16 4 M7F GT1 ID32ML 0 I O Block G7TC IL116 GT1 OD32ML 0 I O Block G7TC OC16 G7TC OC08 G70D SOC16 G7OD FOM16 G70A ZOC16 3 M7F GT1 ID16ML 1 GT1 OD32ML 1 0 Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit XW2B 20G4 XW2B 20G5 GT1 ID32ML 1 GT1 OD32ML 1 0 Connector Terminal Block Conversion Unit XW2B 40G4 XW2B 40G5 Appendix D Manufacturer Recommended Power Supplies for MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Units S82K 05024 Specification 100 to 120 200 to 240 V 50 W S82K 10024 100 to 120 200 to 240 V 100 W S82J 5524 100 to 120 V 50 W S82J 5024 100 to 120 V 100 W S82J 6524 200 to 240 V 50 W S82J 6024 200 to 240 V 100 W Manufacturer 295 Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions Appendix D Current Consumption Overview Internal current consumption Communications current consumption DRT1 I
264. for the internal circuit power supply be sure to follow the specifications pro vided in this manual Configuration A Communications Internal circuit Communications Internal circuit power supply power supply power supply power supply Same power supply for communications and internal circuit Configuration B Communications Internal circuit Communications Internal circuit power supply power supply power supply power supply Same power supply for communications and internal circuit _ 7 11 Operations Checklist Go through the items in the following checklist before turning ON the Units in the DeviceNet system All of the checks should be answered Yes CV series Master Switch settings Has the Master s unit number been set Units Refer to Section 4 Master Unit Specifications for details Has the baud rate front DIP switch pins 1 and 2 been set Refer to Section 4 Master Unit Specifications for details Is the baud rate the same on all of the Slaves Has the continue stop communications for error setting front DIP switch pin 3 been set Refer to Section 4 Master Unit Specifications for details Is pin 4 of the front DIP switch set to OFF Has the node address rear DIP switch pins 1 to 6 been set Refer to Section 4 Master Unit Specifications for details Is the Master s node address unique not allocated to a Slave Are pins 7 an
265. fter an unsuccessful communications instruction attempt Execution Error Flags will maintain status until the next communications instruction They will turn ON when the next communications instruction is executed even if an error occurred for the last instruction Error types Time out error command response time greater than the response monitoring time set in the control words Transmission data errors Message The Communications Enabled Flag turns OFF when Communications message communications are not possible for the Enabled Flag in the Master Unit due to detection of Bus Off or other errors Master Unit status area This flag is ON when message communications are bit 12 in CIO 1500 possible 25 x unit No Note The behavior of the Message Communications Enabled Flag is different for the CVM1 and CV series PCs and C200HX HG HE PCs 126 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 9 3 Communications Flag The relationship between the the Message Communications Enabled Flag and Operation the NS indicator is shown in the following table Message Network status NS indicator Communications Enabled Flag Communications connection made network Lit green normal Communications connection not made Flashing green network normal but communications not established Non fatal communications error error in one Flashing red or more Slaves Offline or power supply is off no power Not lit sup
266. g tables Check the node address of the address of the remote remote node node is not between 00 and 63 11 Parameter error 01 A correct memory area Memory area code in Check the command s memory code has not been used or command data area code and set the appropriate Expansion Data Memory is code not available 02 The access size specified Access size in Set the correct access size for the in the command is wrong command data command or the first address is an odd number 03 The first address is in an First address in Set a first address that is in an inaccessible area command data accessible area 04 The end of specified word First address and Check the acceptable limits of the range exceeds the number of items in data area and set the word range acceptable range command data within the limits Data link tables Check the data link tables to be sure the limit to link words has not been exceeded 06 A non existent program no Program number in Check the program number and has been specified command data be sure that it is set correctly 09 The sizes of data items in Command data Check the command data and be the command block are sure that the sixes of the data wrong items are correct Data link tables Check the data link tables to be sure all nodes in the refresh parameters are in the common link parameters OA The IOM break function IOM break function in Either abort the current IOM break cannot be executed
267. he checksum is stored at the front bytes 0 and 1 of the file Thus file trans fer or comparison is effective from the next byte after the checksum 2 The PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER command can be executed re gardless of the PC s mode It is the user s responsibility to program steps to prohibit this command from being executed when the PC is in RUN mode if such protection is necessary Execute the CONTROLLER STATUS READ command refer to 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ to read the PC s mode 3 This command cannot be executed if any other device holds the access right or when memory is write protected via the key switch on the front panel of the PC Command Block 22 OB 12 bytes Command Parameter Parameter Beginning No of Disk no File name code code areacode address words Parameter area specification File specification Response Block 22 0B Command Response No of words code code Parameters Parameter code command As follows 0000 Data transfer from the PC s parameter area to the file device 0001 Data transfer from the file device to the PC s parameter area 0002 Data compared Parameter area code command The parameter area to be used for data transfer or comparison 193 PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER Section 10 47 Beginning address command The first word in the parameter area to be transferred or compared Each parameter a
268. he following illegal allocations will occur if a node address of 50 is set for a a node address of 49 is set for a DRT1 ID16 Input Terminal DRT1 AD02 Analog Input Terminal Node Node Output area address Input area Output area address Input area 00 00 A 01 02 02 47 a7 48 ie 49 ie pene e DRT1 ADo2 49 os eres To eliminate the above problems and clear this error change the node address setting on the Slave and restart the Master by turning on the power again or re starting Verification Error Slave A verification error Slave I O Size Differs will occur and it won t be possible to I O Size Differs start DeviceNet communications if a CVM1 CV series Master Unit is being used with the scan list enabled and the type of I O input or output or the number of I O points registered for a Slave in the scan list doesn t match the actual I O specifi cations of the Slave that is connected to the Master For example a verification error will occur if the Slave with node address 10 is registered in the scan list as an 8 point Input Slave but the actual Slave with node address 10 is an Output Slave or has a different number of I O points To eliminate and clear this error either create the scan list again or replace the Slave with the kind of Slave registered in the scan list Note The scan list verification is performed in byte units 8 bits A verification error will thus not occur if an 1 point Input Slave is used instead of an 8 po
269. he noise Connect no more than 8 I O Units for each Com munications Unit After taking the above measures restart the Communications Unit If the problem persists replace the Communications Unit Configuration error The I O Unit configuration was changed while the Communica tions Unit was turned ON After turning OFF the power supply to the Com munications Unit and all I O Units return to the correct I O Unit configuration and restart the Communications Unit If the problem persists replace the Communications Unit Special I O Unit error A specific error such as no oper ating power supply has occurred in a Special I O Unit Check the operating power supply and provide the correct power supply If the problem persists replace the Special I O Unit in which the error occurred 247 Indicators and Error Processing Section 15 1 Troubleshooting via Indicators Communications Unit MS indicator status OFF There are indicators that display the Unit status of each MULTIPLE I O TERMI NAL Unit The contents and causes of errors can be found by checking these indicators Indicator Meanings Communications Indicator Meaning name Displays the DeviceNet communications status Unit Displays the Communications Unit status Displays the I O Unit interface status Basic I O Unit Displays the I O Unit interface status Special I O Unit Displays the I O U
270. ify the Master Unit register Slaves using the device parameter editing operation and allocate l O 4 Write the scan list to the Master Unit 1 You should always save the network file to a disk when using user set re mote I O allocations so that the scan list and other parameters are available should you need to replace a Master Unit 2 Whenever using a new CPU Unit be sure that all data in the DM Area HR Area and other memory areas is transferred to the new CPU Unit before starting operation 273 Appendix A FINS Command Response Codes This section describes the response codes returned with responses to FINS commands Response codes can be used to confirm normal completion of command execution or to troubleshoot problems when commands fail Re fer to the operation manuals for specific Units or Systems for further troubleshooting information Configuration Response codes for FINS commands consist of two bytes that indicate the result of executing a command The structure of the response codes is shown in the following diagram First byte Second byte Bt 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Main response code MRES Sub response code SRES l l l l l ry ry l 1 PC Non fatal Error Flag t 1 PC Fatal Error Flag ry Lee Relay Error Flag The main response code MRES in the first byte classifies the response and the sub response code SRES in the second byte indicates details under
271. ill start with the scan list enabled You can use the software switches to start and stop remote I O communications 5 Perform the following from a Programming Device connected to the PC and go to step 7 if the scan list was disabled at startup and you want to re regis ter it a Turn ON the Scan List Clear Bit in the software switches bit 1 b Confirm that communications are possible with the registered Slaves by monitoring the Registered Slave Data Area Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled You can use the software switches to start and stop remote I O communications c Turn ON the Scan List Enable Bit in the software switches bit 0 6 Do nothing if the scan list was enabled at startup and you do not want to change it Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled You can use the software switches to start and stop remote I O communications Go to step 7 7 Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit 8 Switch the PC to RUN mode ao 24 Basic Operating Procedures Section 2 3 Note The dots on the 7 segment display on the Master Unit can be used to determine if the scan list is enabled or disabled If both the right and left dots are not lit the scan list is enabled If both dots are lit the scan list is disabled Using User set I O Allocations 1 2 3 N oor WwW 10 Connect a Configurator to the Network Turn ON the powe
272. imes out 9 3 3 Using SEND 192 RECV 193 and CMND 194 SEND 192 RECV 193 and CMND 194 are based on command response processing That is the transmission is not complete until the sending node re ceives and acknowledges a response from the destination node unless the re sponse function is disabled in the control word If more than one network communications instruction SEND 192 RECV 193 CMND 194 is used through one port the following flags must be used to en sure that any previous operation has completed before attempting further com munications instructions The Port Enabled Flag for the communications port and the Message Enabled Flag for the Master Unit are generally programmed as follows Execution Port Enabled Message condition Flag Enabled Flag _ tr 4 pH snn RECV or CMND Communications Flags Port 0 to 7 Enabled Flags A50200 to A50207 are OFF during Enabled Flags communications instruction execution for ports 0 to 7 A50200 to A50207 respectively and turn ON when execution has completed regardless of whether or not an error has occurred Do not start a communications instruction for a port unless the corresponding Enabled Flag is ON Port 0 to 7 Execution Error Flags A50208 to A50215 turn OFF Execution Error Flags following normal completion of a communications A50208 to A50215 instruction i e after reception of response signal for ports 0 to 7 respectively These flags turn ON a
273. in The scan list couldn t be created because the Master was already operating with the scan list enabled Use the Clear Scan List BIt to switch the Master to scan list disabled mode and try the operation again The scan list couldn t be created or cleared because one of the Slaves that should be registered didn t exist Check the Slaves connections and recognition by the Master and try the operation again The scan list couldn t be created because a configuration error occurred Eliminate the cause of the configuration error restart the Master and try the operation again The scan list couldn t be created or cleared because a scan list operation was already being performed Verify that the previous scan list operation has been completed and try the operation again red Flashing Setup error I O area overlap There is an overlap in the Slaves I O words The Master Unit will attempt to reconnect to the Slaves with the error Bits 04 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Correct the Slave node address red Flashing Setup error I O area range exceeded The range of the Slaves I O area was exceeded The Master Unit will attempt to reconnect to the Slaves with the error Bits 04 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Correct the Slave node address 241 Indicators and Error Processing Display Indicator status 7 segment d2 Snn MS NS
274. in the command data OA The specified action or Action and transition Execute the command again using transition number has numbers in program an action or transition number that already been registered in program area hasn t been registered 0B Cannot clear error because Cause of error Eliminate the cause of the error the cause of the error still and execute the ERROR CLEAR exists command 30 Access right 01 The access right is held by Execute the command again after error another device the access right has been released The command can be executed after the ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE or ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE command is completed Releasing the access right might affect processes in progress at the node that held the access right 05 No object 40 Abort 01 Command was aborted 281 Appendix B Node Address Settings Table Each Slave s node address is set in binary with pins 1 through 6 of the Slave s DIP switch There are some differ ences in the location and orientation of the DIP switches but the node address is always set in binary 0 OFF 1 ON DIP switch setting Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 address Pin 1 DIP switch setting Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin address Pin 1
275. inating resistor is included with the T branch Tap Clip the leads on the resistor to about 3 mm and insert it into the T branch Tap as shown in the follow ing diagram The resistor can face in either direction A terminating resistor is built into the Terminal block Terminating Resistor To connect the cable to the Terminating Resistor attach standard M3 crimp termi nals to the signal wires and securely screw the terminals to the Terminal block Terminating Resistor Tighten to a torque of between 0 3 and 0 5 N jm To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires don t pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when connecting it to the terminal block Also never put heavy ob jects on top of the cable 7 6 Connecting Communications Cables to Nodes 76 This section shows how to connect a communications cable with a connector attached to a Master or Slave Grounding the Network Section 7 7 Align the cable connector with the socket on the node as shown in the following diagram and fully insert the connector into the socket Tighten the set screws to a torque of between 0 25 and 0 3 Nom Note 1 The direction of the node s socket varies with different Masters and Slaves For example sockets in a CV series Master and a CS1 series C200HX C200HG C200HE or C200HS Master face in the opposite direction Compare the color of the cable wires to the sticker on the node to confirm tha
276. ing 190 message communications C200HX HG HE PCs 135 CS1 series PCs 134 CVM1 and CV series PCs 124 messages 179 clearing 181 explicit 143 reading 181 182 model numbers reading model numbers of specified Units 177 reading PC model number 174 206 mounting Master Units 70 T branch Taps 72 Terminators 72 multi vendor environment 287 N network 217 status flags 217 Node Number Duplication Bus Off Error Detected 218 nodes installation connection 76 number setting table 285 replacement 274 non fatal error data 178 normal slave information area 222 P Parameter Areas clearing 169 comparing transferring 195 reading 166 writing 167 PC changing to PROGRAM mode 174 changing to RUN mode 173 PC memory address See Memory Areas PC memory addresses See Memory Areas reading 206 reading controller data 174 reading controller status 177 206 reading cycle time 179 PC modes 178 PC status 176 precautions general xiii program clearing 173 clearing protection of the program area 170 comparing transferring 196 protecting the program area 170 reading 171 writing to program area words 172 303 Index R refresh time 227 registered slave information area 221 remote I O systems 176 response codes 277 rotary switch Master Units CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs 41 CVM1 and CV series PCs 37 RS 232C Unit troubleshooting 273 S scan list 92
277. ing the actual explicit message to the final destination You must use the node and unit address of the local Master Unit in the PC user program communications instruction Addressing them to any other node will re sult in an error such as would occur in the following illustration WRONG The FINS com mand must be addressed to the local Master Unit ea a x Explicit message n Slave or master by other manufacturer FINS command 9 5 1 FINS Command EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND 28 01 EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND will send an explicit DeviceNet message to the specified object and receive a response Command Block 28 01 152 bytes max Y Command Class ID Instance ID Service data code Service code Destination node address Response Block Normal Response 28 01 152 bytes max tee Bog es T Service data Service code Command Response No of bytes code code received Source node address Error Responses The following response is returned if an error occurs for the explicit message 28 01 E Error code Service code 94 hex Command Response No of bytes code code received Source node address 143 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 5 Parameters 144 Note The following response is re
278. ining cables be sure that the maximum current capacity of the cables is not exceeded Refer to Section 6 Communications Power Sup ply Network Configuration Restrictions Section 3 2 Baud rate Maximum network length Ltyick Lrun O 100 m Lryick 2 5 x LtHin O 250 m LrHick 5 x LrHin O 500 m Lryick Length of the thick cable Lthin Length of thin cable Configuration Example Maximum network length 24m 125m Ch Thin cable Thick cable Communications power supply Terminal block with Terminating Resistor thin Node cable Node Node Lruick LtHin 175 100m 500 kbps NG Lryick 2 5 x Lyin 125 2 5 x 50 250 250m 250 kbps OK LTHICK 5xX LTHIN 125 5 x 50 375 500m 125 kbps OK The results of the above formulas indicate that 250 kbps and 125 kbps can be used as the baud rates for this configuration example Even when the above conditions are met however the current flowing through the cables must not exceed the permissible current capacity Refer to Section 6 Communications Power Supply 3 2 2 Drop Line Lengths A drop line length is measured from the point in the trunk line where the original branch was made to the end of the branch The maximum length of a drop line is 6 m It is possible to make a secondary branch from a drop line
279. instruction 2 The unit address must designate a DeviceNet Master Unit Command Block 08 01 156 bytes max Command Test data code Response Block 08 01 156bytes max Command Response Test data code code Parameters Test data command and response In the command block designate the data to be transmitted to the destination node The designated data consists of 156 bytes maximum binary data In the response block the test data from the command block will be returned as it is If the test data in the response block is different from that in the command block an error has occurred 12 5 ERROR LOG READ Reads the specified number of records from the error history file beginning with the specified record Note 1 If the number of records that you designate in the command block exceeds the actual number of stored records all the stored records will be returned and no error will occur If there are no records in the error history a response code of 1103 will be returned address range specification error and no re cords will be returned 2 The error history in the Master Unit is cleared when power to the PC is turned off or the Master Unit is reset Be sure to save the error history in the DM area if you want to maintain the data Command Block 21 02 Command Beginning No of code record no records Response Block
280. int Input Slave 8 3 3 Slave Models and I O Allocations The following table shows the default remote I O allocations for OMRON Slaves 96 Default Remote I O Allocation Outputs Slave name Transistor Input Terminal Model number DRT ID08 Environment resistant Terminal DRT IDO8C Output area See explanation following table Section 8 3 Input area Rightmost 8 bits allocated Leftmost 8 bits cannot be used Transistor Output Terminal DRT1 OD08 Environment resistant Terminal DRT1 OD08C Rightmost 8 bits allocated Leftmost 8 bits cannot be used See explanation following table Sensor Terminal DRT1 ND16S Environment resistant Terminal DRT1 MD16C Rightmost 8 bits allocated Leftmost 8 bits cannot be used Rightmost 8 bits allocated Leftmost 8 bits cannot be used Transistor Input Terminal DRT1 ID16 Remote Adapter DRT1 ID16X Sensor Terminal DRT1 HD16S RS 232C Unit DRT1 232C2 See explanation following table 16 bits allocated Transistor Output Terminal DRT1 OD16 Remote Adapter DRT1 OD16X 16 bits allocated See explanation following table CQM1 I O Link Unit CQM1 DRT21 16 bits allocated 16 bits allocated Analog Input Terminal 2 inputs DRT1 AD04 See explanation following table 2 words 16 bits each allocated Analog Input Terminals 4 inputs DRT1 AD04
281. ion Precautions Z N WARNING N Caution Observe the following precautions when using a PC System Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury Always heed these precautions e Always ground the system to 100 Q or less when installing the system to pro tect against electrical shock e Always turn off the power supply to the PC System before attempting any of the following Performing any of the following with the power supply turned on may lead to electrical shock e Mounting or removing any Units e g I O Units CPU Unit etc or memory cassettes e Assembling any devices or racks e Connecting or disconnecting any cables or wiring Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the PC System or could damage the PC or PC Units Always heed these precau tions e Use the Units only with the power supplies and voltages specified in the opera tion manuals Other power supplies and voltages may damage the Units e Take measures to stabilize the power supply to conform to the rated supply if it is not stable e Provide circuit breakers and other safety measures to provide protection against shorts in external wiring e Do not apply voltages exceeding the rated input voltage to Input Units The In put Units may be destroyed e Do not apply voltages exceeding the maximum switching capacity to Output Units The Output Units may be destroyed
282. ion network address Set to 0 0 to 127 i e 00 to 7F Destination unit address Bits 00 to 03 No of retries 0 to 15 i e 0 to F Bits 04 to 07 Set to 0 Destination node address Bits 08 to 11 Transmission port number 0 to 7 Bit 12 to 14 Set to 0 ON No response OFF Response returned Response monitoring time 0001 to FFFF 0 1 to 6553 5 seconds Bit 15 1 Set the destination network address to 00 when transmitting within the lo cal network The network of the Unit with the lowest unit number will be se lected if the PC belongs to more than one network 2 Indicates a Unit as shown in the following table CPU Unit 00 User program in FA computer 01 CPU Bus Unit 10 to 1F Unit numbers 0 to 15 FE The local Unit 3 Values of 01 to 3F indicate nodes 1 to 63 4 Designates the length of time that the PC retries transmission when bit 15 of C 3 is OFF and no response is received The default value is 0000 which indicates 2 seconds 123 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 9 3 NETWORK RECEIVE RECV 193 Local node destination Source node Description Control Data Ladder Symbol 193 RECV S D c Operands Variations 4st S 18 source word j RECV 193 D 18t destination word C 1St control word RECV 193 transfers data beginning at word S from the designated node on the designated
283. ions lines and the SYSMAC power lines Also provide separate conduits or ducts for the communications lines and power lines Low voltage cable Communications cable Suspended duct Floor duct Communications line Ss SYSMAC I O Line OOO000 Control cable boogoooo9 gt et SYSMAC Power Line 768855050 Communications line General control circuit line EE 00min Shielding SYSMAC I O Line 1 2 A l Power cable EF max n a Power line Power ine 288429922 Triple ground Do not install communications lines and SYSMAC Power Lines onto the control panel on which high voltage devices are mounted Install surge suppressors on devices that generates noise particularly devices that have an inductive component such as motors transformers solenoids and magnetic coils Surge suppressor Surge suppressor Installed next to device Installed next to device 3 Baca Gos ath Pee Sh r E T T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i n L A Q9 3 l DC input type Device AC input type Device such as a motor such as a motor 79 Faulty Operation Section 7 9 T branch Tap or Power Supply Tap or Communications Connector If a surge suppressor does not fit on the device installing a ferrite core directly next to the device s contactors such as a contactor may be effective 3 u T 1 1 1 1 k Device such as a mot
284. irr cass jv te ea ta ee ei ee a NA 265 15 3 1 Master Unit Troubleshooting 0 0 eee eee eee 265 15 3 2 Slave Unit Troubleshooting 0 0 ce eee 268 15 3 3 Analog Input Unit Troubleshooting 0 0 00 e eee ee eee 270 15 3 4 Temperature Input Terminal Troubleshooting 0004 271 15 3 5 C200H I O Link Unit Troubleshooting 00 0 0 eee eee 271 15 3 6 RS 232C Unit Troubleshooting 0 0 e eee ee eee 273 15 4 Maintenance is etenee ee i eae beg a ed o a eink bole dente 273 15 42 Cleaning y eiaskia 3a p syste a 3 4 soa ba E gar RE E land RE wished ENS 273 15 42 Inspection vec eg ina eee eens Mee gander eee teats 273 15 4 3 Replacing Nodes 0 0 eee cece eee 274 237 Indicators and Error Processing Section 15 1 15 1 Indicators and Error Processing DeviceNet Master Units have an MS Module Status indicator that indicates the status of the node itself and an NS Network Status indicator that indicates the status of the Network The Master Units also have a 2 digit 7 segment display and two dot indicators These indicators and display show when an error has occurred and what type of error it is 2 digit 7 segment display ws T Lt Lo Ss Oo Cc igre wo dot indicators 15 1 1 MS and NS Indicators The MS and NS indicators can be green or red and they can be OFF flashing or ON The following table shows the meaning of these i
285. ist disabled for configuration errors E8 With V1 Master Units remote I O communications will not continue i e I O will not be refreshed between the PC and the Master Unit and only software switches and the status area will be refreshed 244 Indicators and Error Processing Section 15 1 Errors Occurring in the Slave Unit the Slave Unit Display Indicator Network status status MS NS ON ON green green Remote I O or message communications in progress normal status The following table lists probable causes and remedies for errors that occur in Probable cause and remedy Remote I O communications and or message communications are active on the Network ON OFF Checking for node address green duplication Checking whether the Unit s node address has been set on another node ON Flashing Waiting for connection green green The Unit is waiting for a connection from the Master Unit ON red OFF Watchdog timer error A watchdog timer error occurred in the Unit Replace the Unit Flashing OFF red Incorrect switch settings A mistake has been made in the switch settings Check the settings and restart the Slave ON ON green red Node address duplication The Slave Unit s node address has been set on another node Change the settings to eliminate the duplication and restart the Slave ON ON green red Bus Off error detected The communications
286. itches the PC is not in PROGRAM mode Switch the PC s operating mode to PROGRAM mode Turn ON bit 00 of the software switches again Invalid setting values in Link Area Turn OFF bit 00 of the software switches Check the area settings address settings and size settings and correct if necessary Turn ON bit 00 of the software switches again Timeout error in communications with Master Check the status of the Master Unit Unit Check that the DeviceNet communications cables are e The Master Unit is not operating connected properly and that noise preventative e The cables are not connected properly measures have been taken e A source of noise is close to the Master Unit 3 Ifthe error is not cleared after taking the above steps i restart the Unit The Network s communications power is not Check the Network s power supply and wiring and restart being supplied normally the Unit The Unit s Read Write Area is set to default 1 Check that the area address settings for the SYSMAC settings with other Communications Units BUS Masters DeviceNet Masters and DeviceNet connected Slaves are not overlapping Set the Read Write Area settings using bit 00 of the software switches If the settings are overlapping intentionally the Unit will operate according to the Read Write Area settings after setting this bit 3 Restart the Unit The CPU Unit is mounted to a C200H or Remount the CPU Unit to a C200HE C200HG or
287. ite in D is not BCD the node address is not between 1 and 127 the unit address of the local Master Unit is not between 0 and F the Master Unit is mounted on a Slave Rack etc Message Communications Enabled Flag in the Master Unit status area C200HX HG HE Bit 12 in IR 101 10 x unit No CS1 Series Bit 12 in IR 2001 10x unit No The Communications Enabled Flag turns OFF during messages communications or when message communications are not possible This Flag is ON when message communications are possible Note 1 The behavior of the Message Communications Enabled Flag for CVM1 and CV series PCs is different to that for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs 2 With CS1 series PCs there are no memory addresses for the Equals Flag and the Error Flag Timing the Reading of Responses Responses should be read in a cycle after the one in which IOWR is executed and when the Message Communications Enabled Flag turns ON Even if IOWR execution is finished the status of the Message Communications Enabled Flag will not change until the next peripheral servicing in the CPU Unit If the response is returned in the same cycle as IOWR execution the Message Communications Enabled Flag will remain ON If the response is not received until the next cycle the Flag will turn OFF during peripheral servicing and then turn ON at the next peripheral servicing after the response is received If the Message Communications En
288. l be turned OFF if a setup error communications error or verification error occurs with the Slave If a transmission timeout error or network power supply error occurs these flags will retain the status they had just before the error occurred All bits will be OFF if remote I O communications have not been started at all since the Master Unit was started If remote I O communications are stopped after they were started these flags will retain the status they had just before communications were stopped 13 3 6 Using the Status Area in Programming Remote I O Communications 220 The following type of programming can be used to execute Slave I O processing if an error occurs or if the Error Communications Stopped Flag bit 14 turns ON during remote I O communications i e when the Remote I O Communications Flag is ON The following example is for CVM1 and CV series PCs Remote VO Error Communications Communications Stopped Flag x Flag 1501 1501 15 14 0 04 kH mP 0001 H r 757 ae aar sce eT Na ee ce E See ee 005 l ume 0001 H Section 13 3 Status Area Message _ The following type of programming can be used to execute message commu Communications nications when the Message Communications Enabled Flag is ON and the IOWR Write Normal Flag Equals Flag are ON Example 1 C200HX HG HE Unit No 0 Example 2 CS1 Series Unit No 0 Message Communica Message Communica tions
289. lave s node address indicates that Display Indicator status the status of the indicator will not change from its previous condition 7 segment MS NS PC Watchdog Timer Error Probable cause and remedy Either a watchdog timer error occurred in the PC or power isn t being supplied to the PC properly Master Unit operation will stop Refer to the PC s Operation Manual for details Watchdog Timer Error A watchdog timer error occurred in the Master Unit and Master Unit operation will stop Replace the Master Unit The MS indicator will be OFF in C200HW DRM21 V1 ON red in the CVM1 DRM21 V1 Communications stopped due to an error The Master has been set to stop communications in the event of a communications error and communications have been stopped due to a communications error send timeout or network power supply error Remote I O communications will stop but message communications will continue Bits 06 and 15 or bits 05 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Remove the cause of any communications error error d9 network power supply errors error E0 and send timeouts error E2 and then restart remote I O communications using the software switch to cancel stoppage of communications Scan list operation couldn t be performed The scan list couldn t be created or cleared because the PC wasn t in PROGRAM mode Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode and try the operation aga
290. le Devices and Device Current Consumptions Devices Master Units Specifications Manufacturer CVM1 DRM21 V1 For CVM1 and CV series PCs C200HW DRM21 V1 For CS1 series C200HX HG HE C200HS PCs 3G8B3 DRM21 VME board Configurators 3G8F5 DRM21 For ISA board OMRON 3G8E2 DRM21 For PCMCIA board OMRON Slave Units Basic I O Slave Units Specifications Manufacturer CQM1 DRT21 I O Link Unit suitable for CQM1 series board 16 inputs and 16 outputs DRT1 ID08 Remote I O Terminal 8 transistor inputs NPN DRT1 ID08 1 Remote I O Terminal 8 transistor inputs PNP DRT1 ID16 Remote I O Terminal 16 transistor inputs NPN DRT1 ID16 1 Remote I O Terminal 16 transistor inputs PNP DRT1 OD08 Remote I O Terminal 8 transistor outputs NPN DRT1 OD08 1 Remote I O Terminal 8 transistor outputs PNP DRT1 OD16 Remote I O Terminal 16 transistor outputs NPN DRT1 OD16 1 Remote I O Terminal 16 transistor outputs PNP DRT1 IDO8C Environment resistant Terminal 8 transistor inputs 8 transistor outputs NPN Conforms to IEC IP66 DRT1 OD08C Environment resistant Terminal 8 transistor outputs NPN Conforms to IEC IP66 DRT1 MD16C Environment resistant Terminal 8 transistor outputs NPN Conforms to IEC IP66 289 Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions Special I O Slave Units DRT1 ID16X Specifications Remote Adapter 16 transistor inputs
291. length Selection of thick cables or thin cables B Separation from noise sources Refer to 7 8 Noise Precautions Do 1 and 2 above meet the No DeviceNet specifications Check Yes Determine the method for providing a Refer to Section 6 Communications Power Supply communications power supply Y 4 Arrange for the required devices Refer to Appendix F Connectible Devices Also refer to CompoBus DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual or the CompoBus D DeviceNet MULTIPLE I O Delivery of devices TERMINAL Operation Manual Y 5 Installation Refer to Section 7 Installation 2 3 2 Hardware Preparations 1 2 3 1 Set the initial settings for the Master Unit Unit number UNIT No or MACHINE No on front panel switch Node address back panel DIP switch Baud rate back panel DIP switch Communications continue stop setting for communications error front pan el switch 2 Set the initial settings for the Slaves Node address DIP switch Baud rate DIP switch Etc 23 Basic Operating Procedures Section 2 3 3 Mount the Master Unit and wire the Network For CVM1 and C series PCs Master Units are treated as CPU Bus Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack Only one Master Unit can mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used For C200HX HG HE PCs Masters are treated as Special I O Units and can be m
292. llocated words in more than one Master Master Master x Words must be allocated to a Slave from one Master only WRONG Slave You can use the master parameter file duplication check from the Configura tor to check for node address that have been set more than once in the scan list which shows the I O allocations that have been made 6 Always use the Configurator when there is more than one Master and en able the scan lists A Bus off error can occur if there is more than one Master with the scan list disabled on the same network 7 User set allocations can be used to enable mounting more than one Master Unit to the same PC as shown below Master Unit Master Unit Slave Slave 8 An error will not occur for user set allocations even if allocated words over laps with words allocated to other Units Set allocations carefully the sys tem will not function properly if used with overlapping setting 106 User set Allocations Section 8 4 8 4 1 Example of User set Allocations The following example uses a CV series PC in a network consisting of Slaves with the following I O points and node address settings Output Block 1 16 output points gt 00 8 I O points gt 01 16 I O points gt 02 Output Block 2 48 input points 04 8 input points gt 09 8 output points 16 input points gt 12 8 input points gt 03 32 output points gt 10
293. ltage Supplied from the communications connector Current consumption Communications power 45 mA max 24 VDC Internal circuits 250 mA max 5 VDC Supplied from the PC Weight 360 g General specifications Conform to CVM1 and CV Series specifications 35 CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 4 2 Master Unit Components The following diagram shows the main components of the Master Unit The func tions of these components are described below Indicators Rotary switch These switches set the Master s two digit decimal unit number Front panel DIP switch The pins have the following functions Pins 1 and 2 Baud rate Pin 3 Continue Stop communications for error Pin 4 Reserved Always keep OFF Back panel DIP switch The pins have the following functions Pins 1 to 6 Node address Pins 7 and 8 Reserved Always keep OFF Communications connector Connect the Network communications cable to this connector The communications power is also supplied through this connector Indicators The indicators indicate the status of the Master Unit and Network When the Net work is operating normally the 7 segment display shows the Master Unit s node address when an error has occurred it shows an error code or the faulty node s node address The indicators and 7 segment display can be used together to troubleshoot er rors Refer to 15 7 Indicators and Error Processing for more de
294. ly capacity allowance in the design e f the power supply is switched OFF during the operation of the network there may be a malfunction in the nodes e The current capacity of the drop line varies according to its length The longer the drop line the lower its maximum capacity becomes This is the same whether the cable is thick or thin Calculate the current capacity passing through the drop line the total current consumption at the drop line using the following formula I 4 57 L l Permissible current A L Length of the drop line m 56 Flow Chart Section 6 2 6 2 Flow Chart 6 2 1 Determining the Communications Power Supply Use the flow chart below to determine the communications power supply on the trunk line Satisfy the conditions for each drop line on page 56 Provisionally determine the location of the power supply Step 1 Determine the best location of the power supply from the graphs i Are the power supply specifications met Consider changing the Yes location of the power supply Consider using thick cable Are the power supply specifications met Step 2 lt Yes Calculate the best location of the actual nodes Are the power supply specifications met p Consider changing the location of Yes the power supply Consider using thick cable Consider changing the location of high
295. minal Environment resistant 10 C to 55 C Unit Remote Adapter Sensor Terminal 0 C to 55 C 35 to 85 25 to 85 0 C to 55 C 0 C to 55 C 35 to 85 35 to 85 Analog Input Terminal Analog Output Terminal Temperature Input Terminal C200H I O Link Unit 0 C to 55 C 10 to 90 RS 232C Unit 10 C to 55 C 25 to 85 MULTIPLE I O 10 C to 55 C 25 to 85 TERMINAL Communications Unit I O Units Note Acceptable humidity range with no condensation or icing 15 4 3 Replacing Nodes The DeviceNet Master Unit and Slave Units make up the network The entire network is affected when a Unit is faulty so a faulty Unit must be repaired or re placed quickly We recommend having spare Units available to restore network operation as quickly as possible Precautions Observe the following precautions when replacing a faulty Unit e After replacement make sure that there are no errors with the new Unit e When a Unit is being returned for repair attach a sheet of paper detailing the problem and return the Unit to your OMRON dealer e If there is a faulty contact try wiping the contact with a clean lint free cloth dampened with alcohol Note To prevent electric shock when replacing a Unit be sure to turn OFF the power supplies to all of the nodes Master and Slaves before removing the faulty Unit 272 Maintenance Section 15 4 S
296. mmu History Flag nications Flag Enabled 060 Flag fen 000004 A50200 150112 A50208 030 H MOV A503 Port En Message Port Er 061 abled Commu ror Flag ASR Flag nications Enabled A50208 030 Flag MOV 0001 Port Er ror Flag 256 030 MOV D00095 060 ASL 0000 D00006 0000 D00006 0000 0000 Error History Section 15 2 Message Com munications Enabled Flag 000000 A50200 150112 151000 194 Reads 20 records from node Maan eck ar ane i ji CMND D01000 D02000 D00000 stores the data beginning at D Control data is specified starting at D00000 Port En Error His 060 abled Flag tory Flag ASL 0000 Shifts 0000 one bit to the left to turn ON CIO 000001 000001 A50200 150112 A50208 030 s i ee A503 D0006 Stores the completion code in A503 teib00006 i M Port Er compares it with 1104 and then turns ON CIO 000000 sondtan abled Comin tor Flag CMP 1104 9000s J by shifting CIO 0000 one bit to the right to retry the com Flag nications A50006 061 mand or turns ON CIO 000002 by shifting CIO 0000 one Enabled ASR 0000 pit to the left Flag Equals Flag AS50006 060 ASL 0000 A50208 Equals Flag 060 ASL 0000 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the left to turn 000002 Port Error Flag 028 ON CIO 000002 CMP 0000 D02004 Compares the contents of D02004 to 1104 jumps ac A50006 004 cording to the results i e to JME
297. mmunications will stop but messages communications and software switch status area refreshes will continue A PC mounting error will always occur the first time PC power is turned ON with more than one Master Unit but the error can be eliminated by registering proper parameters in all Master Units Flashing red Routing table error The Master Unit is not properly registered in the local network table Master Unit operation will continue without the routing tables Bits 05 and 14 will be ON in Master Status Area 1 Correct the routing tables in the CPU Unit and restart the Master Unit Flashing red Configuration data error There is a data error in the configuration data i e the scan list and Master parameters in the Master Unit Check the network configuration and create the scan list again Master Unit operation will continue with the scan list disabled and with the default Master parameters see note 2 at end of table Check the network configuration and correct the scan list and network parameters from the Configurator or use the software switch to reset the scan list For VO Master Units without V1 suffix in model number operation will continue with the scan list disabled For V1 Master Units remote I O communications will stop and only the software switches and status area will be refreshed Node address duplication The Master Unit s node address has been set on another node
298. model number CVM1 and CV Series CVM1 DRM21 V1 CS1 Series C200HW DRM21 V1 C200HX HG HE C200HS Max No of Master Units mountable With Con figurator 1 Without Configura tor 16 CPU Units with more than 880 I O points 16 CPU Units with less than 881 I O points 10 Master Unit mounting position CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack classified as CPU Bus Unit Cannot be mounted to Expansion I O Rack or to SYSMAC BUS or SYSMAG BUS 2 Slave Racks CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack classified as CPU Bus Unit Cannot be mounted to Expansion I O Rack or to SYSMAC BUS or SYSMAC BUS 2 Slave Racks Commu nications supported Remote 1 0 Supported Messages Supported Not supported but Master Unit will respond to commands addressed to it Max No of Slaves per Master Unit With Configurator 50 Without Configurator 63 With Configurator 32 Without Configurator 63 Max No of con trolled points per Master Unit With Configurator 6 400 pts 100 words x 4 blocks Without Configurator 2 048 pts 64 input 64 output words With Configurator Without messages 4 800 pts With messages 1 600 pts Without Configurator 1 600 pts 50 input 50 output words With Configurator 1 280 pts Without Configurator 1 024 pts 32 input 32 output words Max No of I O points per Slave con trollable by Mast
299. n Increase the value for the re sponse watchdog timer in instruction sponse monitoring time in the con terval too short trol data Frame lost in transmission Error history Check the error history and correct the process 03 Communications 01 Error occurred in the Unit Board indicators Take corrective action referring to controller error communications controller the manual for the relevant Unit or Unit indicator is lit Board 02 CPU error occurred inthe CPU Unit indicators Clear the error in the CPU refer to PC at the destination node at remote PC the PC s operation manuals 03 A controller error has Board indicators Check network communications prevented a normal status and reset the controller response from being board If the error still exists returned replace the controller board 04 Node address setting error Unit number Make sure the node address is within specified range and that there are no duplicate node addresses 04 Not executable 01 An undefined command Command code Check the command code and be has been used sure that the Unit supports it 02 Cannot process command _ Unit model version Check the unit model and version because the specified unit model or version is wrong 05 Routing error 00 Routing error in control Control data in Be sure the Unit is listed in the data or routing tables instruction or routing routing tables for CVM1 and tables CV series PCs address only within the local netw
300. n the back of the Master Unit Holding Slave outputs for communications errors Set the DIP switch on the output Slave Automatically stopping remote I O communications at startup Disable starting remote I O communications at startup in the Master parameters from the Configurator Branching three drop lines from the same point on the trunk line Use a T branch Tap List of Application Methods System operation Stopping remote I O communications Section Method Use with the software switches or Configurator 2 1 Enabling the scan list for remote I O communications when using default allocations Turn ON bit 0 of the software switches to enable the scan list Disabling the scan list for remote I O communications when using default allocations Turn ON bit 1 of the software switches to clear the scan list Checking whether a scan list was created by the Configurator Use a Programming Device to monitor scan list registration via Configurator in Master Status Area 2 Checking whether or not an error history has been generated in a Master Unit Use a Programming Device to monitor error history generation in Master Status Area 2 Monitoring error histories in Master Units Monitor the error histories from the Configurator Monitoring Master Unit status Monitor the Master status from the Configurator Saving the scan list data for a connected Slave
301. nal block 16 transistor inputs NPN GT1 ID16 1 Transistor Input Unit terminal block 16 transistor inputs PNP GT1 ID16MX Transistor Input Unit MOLEX connector 16 transistor inputs NPN GT1 ID16MX 1 Transistor Input Unit MOLEX connector 16 transistor inputs PNP GT1 ID16ML Transistor Input Unit FUJITSU connector 16 transistor inputs NPN GT1 ID16ML 1 Connectable Devices and Device Current Consumptions Specifications Transistor Input Unit FUJITSU connector 16 transistor inputs PNP Appendix D Manufacturer OMRON GT1 ID16DS Transistor Input Unit D sub 25 pin connector 16 transistor inputs NPN OMRON GT1 ID16DS 1 Transistor Input Unit D sub 25 pin connector 16 transistor inputs PNP OMRON GT1 ID32ML Transistor Input Unit FUJITSU high density connector 32 transistor inputs NPN OMRON GT1 ID32ML 1 Transistor Input Unit FUJITSU high density connector 32 transistor inputs PNP OMRON GT1 OD16 Transistor Output Unit terminal block 16 transistor outputs NPN OMRON GT1 OD16 1 Transistor Output Unit terminal block 16 transistor outputs PNP OMRON GT1 OD16MX Transistor Output Unit MOLEX connector 16 transistor outputs NPN OMRON GT1 OD16MxX 1 Transistor Output Unit MOLEX connector 16 transistor outputs PNP OMRON GT1 OD16ML Transistor Output Unit FUJITSU connector
302. ncludes the second minute hour 0 to 23 date month and year the rightmost two digits in BCD specifying the time that the error occurred Note The time stamp is returned only for CVM1 and CV series PCs All bytes will be all zeros for other PCs If the time of the error is required use the clock function CS1 Series A351 to A354 C200HX HG HE HS AR 18 to AR 20 12 6 ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears all error log records to all zeros Note This command cannot be executed if any other device has the access right Command Block 21 03 SW Command format Response Block 21 03 Command Response format code 210 SECTION 13 Software Switches and Status Area This section describes the software switches used to control DeviceNet operation and the status area used to access DeviceNet status 13 1 Software Switch Status Area 0 0 cee eee teen nee nnee 214 13 2 Software Switches Heisei taa a ee een een eee n teen eee n 215 13 3 SS tatuSsAre aie cSt Phe T 5 N os amp tute de sou EE E E A T A EE Ak ate AS 217 13 3 1 Master Status Areal 2 0 0 cent nee n nee 218 13 3 2 Master Status Area2 seras ie enire ce eee ee nee en nes 221 13 3 3 Current Communications Cycle Time 0 00 0 eee eee 221 13 3 4 Registered Slave Data os csere recre e ee a e o e Ea A 221 13 3 5 Normal Slave Data eedi e ene een a nnes 222 13 3 6 Using the Status Area in Programming 0 00 00
303. ndicator conditions Status Meaning ON Normal operating status Communications are being performed normally Flashing Reading switch settings ON A non recoverable fatal error has occurred Watchdog timer error memory error or system error The Unit will need replaced Flashing A recoverable error has occurred Configuration error switch setting error PC initialization error PC interface error or routing table error Correct the error and reset the Unit Power isn t being supplied or the Unit is being reset The Unit is online with the network and a communications connection is currently established Either remote I O communications are active with the scan list enabled or message communications are in progress Flashing The Unit is online with the network but a communications connection has not yet been established Either the scan list is being read or both remote I O communications and message communications are stopped ON A fatal communications error has occurred Network communications are not possible Check for a node address duplication or Bus Off error Flashing A non fatal error has occurred Communications error setup error or verification error OFF The Unit is not online with the network There is no network power supply error the Unit is being reset a minor failure or a send error has occurred 238 Indicators and Error Processing Section 15
304. ned more than one Unit or the same word is allocated more than once 80F0 Program error This error occurs if a program that exceeds memory capacity is executed 80F1 Memory error This error occurs if an error is found in the PC s memory memory card or PC Setup during an memory error check 80F3 Fatal SFC error This error occurs if an SFC syntax error has been discovered and the program will not execute 80FF System error This error occurs if the CPU has a watchdog timer error 8100 to 8115 CPU bus error The rightmost two digits are the unit number in BCD of the CPU Bus Unit that has the error This error occurs if an error is discovered during a CPU bus check C101 to C2FF FALS 007 executed 10 34 ERROR LOG READ 184 Reads the PC s error log Note 1 When the PC does not have the specified number of records all the records that have been stored in the PC will be read and an address range overflow error will result 2 If the data is too large and exceeds the permissible length of the response block the part in excess will not be read and a response length overflow er ror will result ERROR LOG CLEAR Section 10 35 Command Block Command Beginning No of code record no records Response Block 21 02 10 bytes 10 bytes A a eA mak ae Command Response Max no of No of No of Errorlog Error log code code stored records stored records da
305. nications to automatically transfer data be tween a PC to which a Master Unit is mounted and the Slaves controlled by the Master Unit Section 9 describes message communications using FINS commands sent from the ladder diagram pro gram of the PC Section 10 provides information on the FINS commands that can be addressed to the CPU Units of CV series PCs Section 11 provides information on the FINS commands that can be addressed to the CPU Units of CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs Section 12 provides information on the FINS commands that can be addressed to the DeviceNet Master Units Section 13 describes the software switches used to control DeviceNet operation and the status area used to access DeviceNet status Section 14 describes the time required for a complete communications cycle for an output response to be made to an input to start the system and to send a message Section 15 describes error processing periodic maintenance operations and troubleshooting proce dures needed to keep the DeviceNet network operating properly We recommend reading through the error processing procedures before operation so that operating errors can be identified and corrected more quickly The Appendices provide a list of standard models the FINS command response codes a node address settings table information on multi vendor applications and information on current consumptions WARNING Failure to read and understand the information pro
306. nit interface status Displays the Special I O Unit status Displays the operating power supply status In addition to the above indicators some Units also have indicators that display the I O status Causes and Remedies for Communications Unit MS Indicator Errors First use the Communications Unit MS indicator to check the status of the Com munications Unit and then take action according to the following table The power is not being supplied Check the operating power supply and provide the correct power supply If the problem persists replace the Communications Unit ON red A hardware error has occurred in the Communications Unit Restart the Communications Unit If the problem persists replace the Communications Unit Flashing red The DIP switch setting of the Communications Unit is incorrect After checking the DIP switch setting baud rate setting pins 7 or 8 and resetting it correctly restart the Communications Unit If the problem persists replace the Communications Unit 248 No error Proceed to the next item Causes and Remedies for Communications Unit NS indicator Errors Indicators and Error Processing Section 15 1 Communications Unit NS indicator status Causes and Remedies for Communications Unit NS indicator Errors Next use the NS indicator to check the status of the Communications Unit and then take action in according to the f
307. nits Transistor 0 words M3 terminal block 0 words Connector made by MOLEX 0 words Connector made by FUJITSU 0 words Connector D sub 25 pin 0 words 2 words High densi ty connec tor made by FUJIT SU M3 terminal block Unit power supply voltage 24 VDC sup plied from outside Installa tion DIN track Model number DRT1 COM Remarks GT1 ID16 GT1 ID16 1 GT1 ID16MX GT1 ID16MX 1 GT1 ID16ML GT1 ID16ML 1 GT1 ID16DS GT1 ID16DS 1 GT1 ID32ML GT1 ID32ML 1 GT1 OD16 GT1 OD16 1 GT1 OD16MX GT1 OD16MX 1 GT1 OD16ML GT1 OD16ML 1 GT1 OD16DS GT1 OD16DS 1 GT1 OD32ML GT1 OD32ML 1 GT1 ROS16 GT1 ROP08 Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D Section 1 1 Words allocated I O con Unit Installa Model Remarks in PC memory nections power tion number Input Output nat Analog In 4 inputs 4 words M3 terminal 24 VDC DIN track GT1 AD04 Inputs put Units block sup 4 to 20 mA plied 0 to 20 mA from Oto 5 V outside 1to5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V Inputs 8 inputs 8 words Connector GT1 AD08MX made by MOLEX 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Oto 5V 1to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V Analog 0 words 4 words M3 terminal GT1 DA04 Outputs Output block 4to 20 mA Units 0 to 5V 1to5 V
308. nnectors first connect the shielded cable and then securely connect the rest of the cables e When wiring attach crimp terminals to cables and then cover them with vinyl tape or a heat contraction tube Crimp terminals Shielded cable 7 2 Mounting A sheet is attached to the Masters and Slaves to prevent pieces of wire from en tering the Units Install and wire the Units with the sheets in place Stray strands of wire could cause malfunctions Be sure to remove the sheet after installation and wiring to facilitate cooling The Units could overheat and malfunction if the sheets aren t removed Do not add or remove nodes to communications cables while the DeviceNet is in operation Factors such as changes in the positions of terminating resistances caused by cable short circuits contact failures and changes in the node config uration may prevent normal communications Note For details on mounting Slaves refer to the CompoBus DeviceNet Slaves Op eration Manual W347 7 2 1 Mounting Master Units The Master Unit mounts to the PC s Backplane just like other Units This section explains only the precautions that should be taken during Master Unit installa tion Refer to the PC s Installation Guide for details on mounting Units to the Backplane or installing the PC in a control panel CV series Master Units The Master Unit can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack of any CV series PC but there are some limit
309. not sent to a CPU Unit through a DeviceNet network 2 If there is an error in the command code or a read address no data will be read Command Block 01 11 Command Read address Read address code Memory area code Memory area code 100 items max for 2 byte data see description above Response Block 01 11 Command Response code code Parameters Memory area code command The data area to read 163 PARAMETER AREA READ Section 10 11 Read address command The word bit flag to read Memory Areas The following data can be written refer to 10 2 Memory Area Designations for memory area designations Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes CIO TR CPU Bus Bit status 00 1 Link and Auxiliary Bit status with forced status 40 1 Word contents 80 2 Word contents with forced status Co 4 Timer Counter Completion Flag status 01 1 Completion Flag status with forced 41 1 status PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 Transition Flag status 03 1 Flag status with forced status 43 1 Step Flag status 04 1 Status 44 1 Step Timer PV 84 2 Forced Status Bit status 05 1 Word contents 85 2 Expansion DM Word contents specified bank 90 to 97 2 banks 0 to 7 Word contents current bank 98 2 Action Flag status 1B 1 Register Register contents 9C 2 Expansion DM current bank no I
310. ns SEND 192 RECV 193 None Not supported instruc tions FINS commands CMND 194 IOWR Not supported There are FINS commands addressed to the Master Unit and others addressed to the CPU Unit Not supported Explicit DeviceNet messages CMND 194 IOWR Not supported Explicit DeviceNet messages are sent to masters and slaves made by other manufacturers Not supported Sources destinations 1 1 1 N broadcasting is not s upported Not supported Data length excluding command code SEND 192 76 words max RECV 193 78 words max CMND 194 158 bytes max IOWR 158 bytes max Not supported No of simultaneous instructions One each for 8 ports ports 0 to 7 1 only Not supported Response monitoring time 2s 0 1 to 6553 Default setting User setting 5S Not supported Retries 0 to 15 0 Not supported From CVM1 CV se ries PCs Message reception Supported for data send receive and FINS commands Supported only for FINS commands addressed to Master Unit From C200HX HG HE PCs Message Communications Error Indications 116 Supported for FINS commands There are two ways to obtain information on communications errors that occur in message communications 1 Using the error history in the Master Unit and 2 Using Master Unit displays indicators and Master Status Areas
311. ns cable FG V V Communications power supply Ground 100 Q max Power supply without cable grounded If more than one communications power supply is connected to the same net work ground only the one nearest the center of the network Do not connect the shield wire at the other power supplies Always use Power Supply Taps when connecting more than one communications power supply to the same network The power supplies are not counted as network nodes 1 Always ground the communications cable shield at one and only one loca tion in the network 2 Always ground to 100 Q or less 3 Always use a separate ground Never use the same ground as for inverters or other drive system devices Grounding from a Connector The network can be grounded by inserting the ground wire into the same hole as the communications cable s shield wire as shown in the following diagram Ground wire Noise Precautions Section 7 8 Grounding from a T branch Tap The network can be grounded by inserting the ground wire into one of the T branch Tap connectors as shown in the following diagram Ground wire 7 8 Noise Precautions General Precautions To prevent inductive noise do not wire the communications line SYSMAC pow er lines and power lines near to each other In particular be sure to keep the pow er lines for inverters motors regulators and contactors at least 300 mm away from both the communicat
312. ns for CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 9 3 041 BSET 0000 D00000 First Scan Flag 030 MOV 0008 030 MOV 000E 030 MOV 0001 030 MOV 0600 030 MOV 0000 030 MOV 0064 030 MOV 0101 030 MOV 8203 030 MOV E800 030 MOV 0005 030 MOV 0001 Execution condition 0000 A502 1501 00 00 12 44 Port Message 194 CMND D01000 D02000 Enabled Commu icati 060 Flag nications Enabled ASL Flag 0000 A502 A502 1501 01 00 08 12 030 _ kK K MOV A503 Port Port Message 061 Enabled Execution Commu ASR Flag Error Flag nications Enabled Flag D02999 D00000 D00001 D00002 D00003 D00004 D00005 D01000 D01001 D01002 D01003 0000 D00000 0000 D00006 0000 Sets 0000 in D00000 to D02999 Place data into control data words to specify to read 5 words D01000 to D01004 from the PC of node 06 and network 01 to the PC of node 05 Place the command data for MEMORY AREA READ into D01000 to D01003 Places 0001 into CIO 0000 Reads 5 words D01000 to D01004 from the PC of node 06 and network 01 to the PC of node 05 and stored the data beginning at D02000 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the left Stores the completion code in A503 to D00006 Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the right to reset CIO 000000 131 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs Section 9 4 9 4 Message Comm
313. nt consumption on right 0 15 0 25 0 15 0 55 A Maximum current for the left side of the thick cable see previous table approx 2 5A Maximum current for the right side of the thick cable see previous table approx 2 5A using straight line approximation between 100 to 150 m 61 Step 1 Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply from a Graph Section 6 4 Example 3 Uneven Current Consumption on Left and Right Terminating resistor Because the total current flow 0 55 A is less than the maximum current approx 2 5 A on both the left and the right sides the power supply can be placed at the center of the network and provide power to all nodes The following example shows a Network that requires power to be supplied for 240 m on thick cable The power supply must be located off the center of the Network Because the current consumption is not the same on the left and right sides of the Network the current flow to one side will be insufficient if the power supply is connected in the very center of the Network Placing it off center just a little allows power to be supplied to all nodes Trunk line Trunk line Terminating resistor 5 wire cable 5 wire cable Communications power supply Terminating resistor 120m 120m ees Trunk line gt Power supply cable Total power supply length on left Total power supply length on right 120 m Total current consumption on left 1 1 1
314. ntents CIO 0000 to 2555 000000 to 09FB00 80 2 TR 09FF00 G G000 to G255 0A0000 to OAFFOO A A000 to A511 0B0000 to OCFFOO Word contents with CIO 0000 to 2555 000000 to 09FB00 co 4 forced status G G000 to G255 0A0000 to OAFFOO Timer Area Completion Flag TIM T0000 to T1023 000000 to 03FF00 1 Counter Area status CNT C0000 to C1023 080000 to OBFFOO Completion Flag TIM T0000 to T1023 000000 to 03FF00 1 status with forced CNT C0000 to C1023 080000 to OBFFOO status PV TIM T0000 to T1023 000000 to 03FF00 2 CNT C0000 to C1023 080000 to OBFF0O DM Area Word contents DM D00000 to D24575 000000 to 5FFF00 82 2 Transition Area Flag status TN TNOO000 to TN1023 000000 to 03FF00 03 1 CV1 000 or Fla g status with TN TNO000 to TNO511 000000 to 03DF00 43 CV2000 only forced status Step Area Flag status ST ST0000 to ST1023 000000 to 03FF00 04 1 tecnica Status ST ST0000 to ST1023 000000 to 03FF00 44 1 y Step timer PV ST ST0000 to ST1023 000000 to 03FF00 84 2 Forced Status Bit status CIO 000000 to 255515 000000 to O9FBOF 05 1 G G00000 to G25515 0A0000 to OAFFOF Word contents CIO 0000 to 2555 000000 to 09FB00 85 2 G G000 to G255 0A0000 to OAFFOO Expansion DM Word contents Banks 0 E00000 to E32765 000000 to 7FFD00 90 to 97 2 Area to 7 to to CV1000 or E00000 to E32765 000000 to 7FFDOO CV2000 only Current E00000 to E32765 000000to7FFD00 98 2 bank 155 Memory Area Designations Section 10 2
315. nterrupt status Scheduled interrupt interval DD 4 Note Refer to 10 2 2 Data Configurations for the various data configurations 10 11 PARAMETER AREA READ Command Block Reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive parameter area words starting from the specified word All words in the specified parameter area must be read at the same time to ensure complete data A maximum of 75 words can be read with each command To read larger parameter areas use multiple commands and specify the beginning word and number of words for each 02 01 Command Parameter Beginning No of words code area code word Response Block 02 01 Command Response Parameter Beginning No of words Data Parameters 164 code area code word Parameter area code command and response The parameter area to read PARAMETER AREA WRITE Section 10 12 Note Beginning word command and response The first word to read No of words command and response Bits 0 to 14 are used to specify the number of words to be read each word consists of two bytes Bit 15 must be OFF 0 in the command block When the contents in the response block con tains the last word of data in the specified parameter area bit 15 will be ON 1 Bit 15 OFF 0 No data at last word Bit 15 ON 1 Data at last word Bits 0 to 14 No of words read Bits 0 to 7 second byte Bits
316. number setting The Master Unit is shipped with the unit number set to 00 The unit number setting determines which words in the PC s CPU Bus Unit Area are allocated to the Master Unit If the same unit number is used for the Master and another CPU Bus Unit a du plicate number error will occur in the PC and it won t be possible to start up the DeviceNet CompoBus D network Rear panel DIP Switch The Master Unit s node address setting is made in binary with pins 1 through 6 of the DIP switch on the rear of the Master Unit ies Reserved Always OFF Node address setting Pins 1 through 6 represent binary digits which are 1 when the pin is ON 0 when the pin is OFF Any node address from 0 through 63 can be set as long as it hasn t been set on another node Slave Refer to Appendix C Node Address Settings Table for a complete table of DIP switch settings DIP switch setting Node Pin5 Pin4 Pin3 Pin2 address The Master Unit is shipped with the node address set to 0 Since the DIP switch is located on the back of the Master the Master must be removed from the PC in order to change the node address setting Be sure to set the node addresses before assembling the Network 37 CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 4 2 Limitations on Master Unit Mounting 38 Note Note Note Pins 7 and 8 are reserved for system use Leave these pins set to OFF 0 It
317. o 63 Response Setting ON No response OFF Response returned Destination Unit Address CPU Unit 00 Communications Unit FE Special I O Unit 10 to 1F Unit No 10 The source words starting with S provide execution parameter and the com mand data as shown in the following table Word Contents First response word variable area specification see Section 11 Response monitoring time hex 2s 1000 to 028F 0 1 to 65 5 s units of 0 1 s Above 028F 65 5s Number of command bytes hex 0 to 160 Command data beginning with command code The destination information provides the destination unit number of the Special I O Unit and the number of words to be written as shown in the following dia gram D Digits 2 to 4 Number of words to write 001 to 128 BCD Digit 1 Destination unit number of the Special I O Unit 0 to F hex Data Areas The following tables shows the data areas that can be used for each parameter of IOWR CS1 Series CIO Area CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 CIO 0000 to ClO 6142 Work Area W000 to W511 W000 to W510 Holding Bit Area H000 to H511 HO000 to H510 Auxiliary Bit Area A000 to A959 A000 to A958 Timer Area T0000 to T4095 T0000 to T4094 Counter Area C0000 to C4095 C0000 to C4094 DM Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32766 134 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs EM Area without bank
318. o connect a node Phoenix Contact K K 2 5 5 ST 5 08 AU via a multi drop connection Dimensions Unit mm XW4B 05C1 H1 D Unit mm 48 Cables and Connectors Section 5 1 XW4B 05C4 T D 20 32 Unit mm 5 1 3 Special Connector Screwdriver SZF 1 For DeviceNet connectors Phoenix Contact K K All dimensions are shown in mm oe A B C 0 6 3 5 100 E 5 1 4 T branch Taps It is sometimes necessary to connect the Network with a connector attached to a T branch Tap There are two kinds of T branch Taps one that makes a single branch and another that makes three branches Because the T branch Tap has a Terminating Resistor socket a Terminating Re sistor can be connected on a trunk line by installing one of the resistors pro vided Also when the Network is powered by a single power supply and the total current consumption is 5 A or less a T branch Tap can be used instead of a Pow er Supply Tap to connect the communications power supply Model Number of connectors Comments DCN1 1C 3 1 drop line can be Three connectors provided Terminating connected Resistors can be connected DCN1 3C 5 3 drop lines can be Five connectors provided Terminating connected Resistors can be connected 49 Cables and Connectors Section 5 1 DCN1 1C T Branch Tap Components Communications Connector Connect the network communications ca
319. ollowing table The Unit is in Bus Off status A Slave already exits with the same node address as the Communications Unit The baud rate does not match that of the Master Unit Check the connection status of the DeviceNet communications cable or the noise status Reset the node address so that it is not duplicated Reset with the same baud rate as that of the Master Unit After taking the above measures restart the Communications Unit If the problem persists replace the Communications Unit Flashing red A timeout occurred in communications with the Master Unit Check the status of the Master Unit Check the connection status of the DeviceNet communications cable or the noise status After taking the above measures restart the Communications Unit If the problem persists replace the Communications Unit Flashing green The Master Unit has not been started correctly Check that the Master Unit has started normally There is a configuration error in the Master Unit I O area Check that the number of I O points for the Master Unit I O area and the Communications Unit match ON green No error Proceed to the next item Causes and Remedies for Communications Unit and I O Unit TS Indicator Errors 249 Indicators and Error Processing Section 15 1 Causes and Remedies for Communications Unit and I O Unit TS Indicator Errors If there is no error after the MS indic
320. ommand data be sure that it is set correctly 06 A non existent file has File name been specified 07 The specified file already File name Change the name of the file and exists execute the instruction again 08 Data cannot be changed The contents of Check the contents of the memory area being written to 278 FINS Command Response Codes Appendix A possible haven t been created or are incorrect Main code Sub Probable cause Check point Remedy code 22 Not executable in 01 The mode is wrong Check the operating mode current mode executing Data links are active Data link status Check the data link status before execution 02 The mode is wrong Check the operating mode stopped Data links are active Data link status Check the data link status before execution 03 The PC is in the Check the PC s mode PROGRAM mode 04 The PC is in the DEBUG Check the PC s mode mode 05 The PC is in the MONITOR Check the PC s mode mode 06 The PC is in the RUN Check the PC s mode mode 07 The specified node is not Check which node is the polling the polling node node 08 The mode is wrong and the Check whether the step has active step cannot be executed status or not 11 Unit busy Attempt made to Message Check the number of message send message to 9th node communications communications nodes for each Mast
321. ommunications errors that occur in ns Error remote I O communications 1 Using Master Unit displays indicators and Mas ndications 90 ter Status Areas and 2 Using the error history in the Master Unit The MS and NS indicators and the 7 segment display on the front panel of the Master Unit can be used together with the Master Status Area 1 inside the CPU Unit to obtain information on a communications error that has occurred This in formation can be used as the basis for troubleshooting Example Verification Error Slave Missing Lit green 4c Master Status Area 1 Flashing red xx ct ba Sa aa mt t ON Bit 07 ON Verification error w aa ana is Master Status Area 1 COPTITIT Trt Tr Master CPU Unit Unit Each time a communications error occurs an error code is placed in an error record in the error history kept in the RAM of the Master Unit Up to 20 records can be stored in the error history For CVM1 CV series Master Units the record is also time stamped Time stamps are not provided with the other Master Units The error history can be read or cleared from the CPU Unit by sending an FINS command to the Master Unit ERROR HISTORY READ CLEAR The contents of the error history can also be monitored from the Configurator Code ia a records Mesa code FINS command 7 _ Read out __ Monitor Configurator Overview Section 8 1 A setting on the f
322. on Procedure 1 2 3 1 Set the initial settings for the Master Unit 107 User set Allocations Section 8 4 Unit number UNIT No or MACHINE No on front panel switch Node address back panel DIP switch Baud rate back panel DIP switch Communications continue stop setting for communications error front pan el switch 2 Set the initial settings for the Slaves Node address DIP switch Baud rate DIP switch Etc 3 Mount the Master Unit and wire the network For CVM1 and CV series PCs Master Units are treated as CPU Bus Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used For CS1 series PCs Masters are treated as Special I O Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used For C200HX HG HE PCs Masters are treated as Special I O Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used For C200HS PCs Masters are treated as Special I O Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to
323. on of the commands has been completed execute the ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE command to release the access right refer to 10 32 ACCESS RIGHT RE LEASE If another devices holds the access right the device will be identified in the response 1 If any other device has the access right the access right cannot be acquired with this command use the ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE com mand refer to 10 31 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE 2 The following commands cannot be executed by other devices if the host computer holds the access right Do not restrict the access right unless nec essary PARAMETER AREA WRITE 02 02 PARAMETER AREA CLEAR 02 03 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT 03 04 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR 03 05 PROGRAM AREA WRITE 03 07 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR 03 08 RUN 04 01 STOP 04 02 CLOCK WRITE 07 02 MESSAGE CLEAR 09 20 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE 0C 01 ERROR CLEAR 21 01 ERROR LOG CLEAR 21 03 PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER 22 0B PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER 22 0C FORCED SET RESET 23 01 FORCED SET RESET CANCEL 23 02 oC 01 00 00 Command Program code no 181 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE Section 10 31 Response Block oC 01 00 00 Command Response code code Unit address of Unit with access right Node number of device with access right Network address of device with access right If any other device holds the access right the device will be identified P
324. on results is not equals error Shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit right to turn ON IR 00001 Shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit right to turn ON reset IR 00000 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 5 Execution condition 00002 10112 Shifts the contents of IR 0000 one bit to the left to turn ON IR 00001 Commu nications Enabled Flag j Transfers the 8 words of command data starting from DM 1000 at the CPU Unit to the Master Unit unit number 0 00001 25506 If the write for IOWR has been completed IR 000 is shifted one bit to the right to turn ON reset IR 00000 Equals Flag IOWR write not completed 25506 ASL 25 If the write for IOWR has not been completed IR 000 is Equals Flag o o shifted one bit to the left to turn ON IR 00002 IOWR write completed 9 5 Sending Explicit Messages The FINS command code 28 01 can be used to send explicit DeviceNet mes sages to OMRON Special Slaves and DeviceNet devices made by other manufacturers The use of explicit messages is illustrated in the following dia gram Slave or master DeviceNet by other CPU Unit Master Unit manufacturer Explicit FINS FINS Explicit J message A header mae header nee emo TS E l gt gt gt or DeviceNet IOWR Use 28 01 for the network i FINS command code FINS FINS Response Response header A nace 141 Sending Explicit Messages Section 9 5 m FINS The lo
325. onnection Object Interface 3 Bit Strobed I O Connection the number of input words allocated in the OM RON Master can be found from the Produced Connection Size as shown below Produced Connection Size This is the amount of memory usually in bytes allocated as input If the connection size is an even number of bytes the number of allocated words is bytes 2 If the connection size is an odd number of bytes the number of allocated words is bytes 1 2 Connecting an OMRON Slave to another Company s Configurator When another company s configurator a device that makes environment settings on DeviceNet Masters and Slaves is connected it will be able to read settings from OMRON Masters and Slaves but not change them When another company s configurator is being used we recommend creating an OMRON Slave EDS file a file that contains each Slave s parameters and operating information Refer to the DeviceNet protocol tables later in this appendix as well as the Configurator s manual for details on creating an EDS file 285 Multi vendor Applications Master Unit Device Profile General data Compatible DeviceNet Specifications Appendix C Volume Release 1 2 Volume II Release 1 1 Vendor name OMRON Corporation Vendor ID 47 Device profile name Communication Adapter Profile number 12 Manufacturer catalog number Manual number W267 Manufacturer revision 1 0 Physic
326. ons Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes CIO LR HR or AR Word contents 80 2 area Timer Counter PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 EM Word contents 90 to 97 98 2 A8 to AF Note Refer to 11 2 2 Data Configurations for the various data configurations 201 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ Section 11 5 11 5 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ Reads the contents of the specified number of non consecutive memory area words starting from the specified word Note If there is an error in the command code or an address no data will be read Command Block 01 04 aS Command Address Address code Memory area code Memory area code 39 addresses maximum Response Block 01 04 Ne oe ok Command Response Data Data code code Memory area code Memory area code Parameters Memory area code command The data area to read Address command The word bit flag to read The content of up to 39 ad dress can be read Data response The data in the specified memory area s will be returned in sequence starting from the beginning address Memory Areas The following data can be written refer to 11 2 Memory Area Designations for memory area designations Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes CIO LR HR or AR Bit status 00 1 area Word contents 80 2 Timer Counter Completion Flag status 0
327. ons will increase the message communications time Communications cycle time Communications cycle time for remote I O communications only 0 11 x Tg 0 6 ms Tg The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 235 SECTION 15 Troubleshooting and Maintenance This section describes error processing periodic maintenance operations and troubleshooting procedures needed to keep the DeviceNet CompoBus D network operating properly We recommend reading through the error processing procedures be fore operation so that operating errors can be identified and corrected more quickly 15 1 Indicators and Error Processing 0 0 cece cee eee eens 240 15 1 1 MS and NS Indicators cesos socotea cece e 240 15 1 2 Seven Segment Display 0 0 0 cee eee eee eee 241 15 1 3 Identifying Errors from the Indicators 0 00 00 0 eee ee eee 242 15 1 4 Normal MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Status 00 0005 247 15 1 5 MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Troubleshooting 0005 248 1522 Error HIStory vcs is6hes sean tah Rae ee RAS AERA Rees ah srt hae RANA Rago sug aoe 253 1522 1 Error History Data sa ecient eee Be oe bee E baa e Pea FER ON Se 253 15 2 2 Error CodeS rana cuted Ua sea oa Sate ee ag ee el a a 254 15 2 3 FINS Commands for Error Histories 0 0 eee eee eee eee 255 15 2 4 Programming Examples 0 0 cece eee 255 15 3 Troubleshooting s
328. or Read the Master parameter file for the Master Unit that has been turned ON from the Master parameter editing screen Write the Master parameters Turn OFF the power supply the PC i e the Master Unit Repeat the above steps beginning at step 6 for all Master Units Turn ON the power supply to all Masters and Slaves Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled Commu nications will not start if they have been set to be stopped at startup from the Configurator Use the software switches or Configurator to start and stop remote I O communications Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit Read the Network configuration from the Configurator Save the Network configuration in a file from the Configurator Switch the PC to RUN mode When there are no available node addresses for the Configurator as is the case when a total of 64 Master Units and Slave Units are used set up communica tions based on user set allocations according to the following procedure 1 Turn ON the communications power supply 25 Section 2 3 Basic Operating Procedures CON ODO oO o 11 12 13 14 Turn ON the power supply to all the Slaves Turn OFF the power supply to all the Masters Connect the Configurator to the network using the node address of one of the Masters Create the Master parameters for each Master Unit and save the parame ters in files
329. or Ferrite core 0443 1641151 Nisshin Electric Co Ltd Because noise currents flow through metallic equipment such as casings the communications cables should be placed as far away from metallic equipment as possible Ground the shielding wire on the communications cable at one point If the same ground is used for the communications cable and communications power sup ply there is a possibility that noise may be transmitted through the ground line to the communications line In order to avoid this be sure that the power line ground and the grounds for the communications cables and the communica tions power supply are located as far from each other as possible Insert a line filter on the primary side of the communications power supply When there are two or more communications power supplies the communica tions power cables can be grounded by simply connecting a single Power Sup ply Tap near the center of the communications cable Do not ground shielding wire at more than one place Ground at only one point Power Supply Tap Power Supply Tap y Y Y Master Master gz E PS Slave PS Slave PS Slave PS When there is only one power supply When there are two or more power supplies 7 9 Faulty Operation Communications Cable Shielding Communications Power Supply 80 When noise is thought to
330. or a template showing the mounting hole placement Drill the specified holes in the control panel and mount the Slave with M4 screws Tighten the screws to a torque of 1 2 Nm 7 3 Connecting Communications Cables 72 1 2 3 This section explains how to prepare and connect the communications cables to connectors for the DeviceNet network Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the communications cables to the connectors Although some connectors are equipped with set screw and some are not the methods used to connect the cables to the connectors are the same 1 Remove approx 30 to 80 mm of the cable covering being careful not to damage the shield weaving underneath Do not remove more than about 30 mm removing too much of the covering can result in short circuits Approx 30 to 80 mm 2 Carefully peel back the weaving You ll find the signal lines power lines and the shielding wire The shielding wire will be loose on the outside of the other lines but it is harder than the weaving and should be easily identified Shielding wire 3 Remove the exposed weaving remove the aluminum tape from the signal and power lines and strip the covering from the signal and power lines to the Connecting Communications Cables Section 7 3 proper length for the crimp terminal connectors Twist together the wires of each of the signal and power lines Strip to match the crimp terminals We recommen
331. or completion The Scan List Operation Error Flag goes ON After clearing the scan list check which of these flags is ON and then turn OFF the Clear Scan List software switch The Clear Scan List software switch is effective only when the PC is in PRO GRAM mode and communications are being performed with the scan list en abled The status of this bit is ignored when the Master Unit is already operating with the scan list disabled When the Master Units DIP switch has been set to stop communications when a communications error occurs the Clear Communications Error Stoppage soft Status Area Section 13 3 Start Remote I O Communications Stop Remote I O Communications 13 3 Status Area CVM1 and CV series PCs ware switch can be turned from OFF to ON to restart communications after a communications error Be sure to correct the cause of the error before restarting communications because the error will recur immediately if the cause isn t cor rected The Clear Communications Error Stoppage software switch is effective only when communications have been stopped due to an error The status of this bit is ignored otherwise The Communications Stoppage Cleared Flag will go ON when this operation is completed Check that this flag is ON and then turn OFF the Clear Communica tions Error Stoppage software switch The Start Remote I O Communications software switch can be turned from OFF to ON to start remote I O communication
332. or in locations subjected to excessive noise particu larly when using a PCMCIA Card Excessive noise will cause the computer to run out of control This will not however adversely affect the DeviceNet network 3 The OMRON Configurator can only be used for OMRON Master Units CVM1 DRM21 V1 C200HW DRM21 V1 Do not use the Configurator for other company s Master Units 4 Scan lists and other Master parameters can be set either manually or by us ing a wizard Configurator Specifications Item Specification Operating Hardware Computer IBM PC AT or compatible environment CPU With Windows 95 66 MHz i486 DX2 min With Windows NT 90 MHz Pentium min Memory With Windows 95 12 MB min 16 MB or more recommended With Windows NT 16 MB min 24 MB or more recommended Hard disk 5 MB min free space OS Windows 95 Windows NT 3 51 4 0 PCMCIA Cards cannot be used with Windows NT computers DeviceNet interface ISA Board included with 3G8F5 DRM21 or PCMCIA Card included with 3G8E2 DRM21 Relation to network Operates as one node on the network and requires one node address No connectable to network One Configurator per network DeviceNet functions enabled by Flexible remote I O allocations when usage of scan lists has been enabled Configurator Usage of more than one Master Unit per PC i e per CPU Unit Usage of more than one Master Unit per network Main functions Monitoring Displaying conne
333. ork check the node address setting of the remote node use 00 for the network address for C200HX HG HE PCs 01 Destination node address Entry for destination Set the destination node address is not set in the routing node in routing tables in the routing tables table 02 Routing tables aren t Routing tables Set the source nodes destination registered nodes and relay nodes in the routing tables 03 Routing table error Routing tables Set the routing tables correctly 04 The maximum number of Network Redesign the network or reconsider the routing tables to reduce the number of relay nodes in the command 276 FINS Command Response Codes Appendix A error than the max permissible length Main code Sub Probable cause Check point Remedy code 10 Command format 01 The command is longer Command data Check the command format of the command and set it correctly code has been specified command data 02 The command is shorter Command data Check the command format of the than min permissible command and set it correctly length 03 The designated number of Command data Check the number of items and data items differs from the the data and make sure that they actual number agree 04 An incorrect command Command data Check the command format of the format has been used command and set it correctly 05 Header error the node Routin
334. ounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used For CS1 series PCs Masters are treated as Special I O Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 16 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used For C200HS PCs Masters are treated as Special I O Units and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Only one Master Unit can be mounted if a Configurator is not used but up to 10 Master Units can be mounted if a Configurator is used 4 Connect a Programming Device to the PC and turn ON the power supply to the PC 5 Generate the I O table 2 3 3 Setting Up Communications Remote I O Communications with One Master Unit in the Network Using Fixed I O Allocations 1 2 3 1 Turn ON the power supply to the Slaves and turn ON the communications power supply 2 Turn ON the power supply to the PC i e to the Master Unit Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode 4 Perform the following and go to step 7 if the scan list was disabled at startup a Confirm that communications are possible with the registered Slaves by monitoring the Registered Slave Data Area b From a Programming Device connected to the PC turn ON the Scan List Enable Bit in the software switches bit 0 Remote I O communications w
335. ounts of data use multiple commands and specify the beginning word and number of words for each 1 If memory is write protected via the key switch on the PC s front panel or by the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT command refer to 10 14 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT nothing will be written to the program area 2 The PROGRAM AREA WRITE command can be executed as long as the PC is not in RUN mode It is the user s responsibility to program steps to pro hibit this command from being executed when the PC is in MONITOR or DE BUG mode if such protection is necessary Execute the CONTROLLER STATUS READ command refer to 10 23 CONTROLLER STATUS READ to read the PC s mode 03 07 00 00 Command code Program no Beginning word No of Data bytes 03 07 o0 00 Command Response Program Beginning word No of code code no bytes Program no command and response Set to 0000 Beginning word command and response Set between 00000E00 and 0000FFFE for the CV500 or CVM1 CPU01 and between 00000E00 and 0001FFFE for the CV1000 CV2000 or the CVM1 CPU11 21 The beginning word must be an even number No of bytes command and response The number of bytes in an even num ber 150 or smaller Bit 15 must be ON 1 when data is written to the last word in the specified parameter area or no data will be written Bit 15 OFF 0 Data not writ
336. output word then it can be allocated more than one input or output word If a Slave requires less than one word it simply uses the rightmost bits in the word allocated to it Blocks can be positioned in any order in memory e g the following order is okay input block 1 out put block 2 input block 2 output block 1 CPU Unit Address m Output area m Output i f n block 1 Address To Slaves Output o Address block 2 l r Input area Address Addresses can be as P signed in any order Input Address block 1 Input Address From Slaves block 2 i Address Address 87 Overview Section 8 1 Allocation Methods and System Configurations Configuration One master per network Master More than one master per network Master More than one master per PC Masters Slaves Configurator Not needed if default allocations are used Required Remote I O Communications Default allocations Yes User set allocations Configurator required
337. parison Beginning address command The first word value in the memory area to be transferred or compared No of items command and response In the command block the number of items to be transferred or compared In the response block the number of items transferred or compared Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file device memory cards File name command The file to be transferred or compared refer to 10 3 Vol ume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the file name 192 PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER Section 10 46 Memory Areas The following data can be used for transfer or comparison refer to 10 2 Memory Area Designations for memory area designations Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes CIO TR CPU Bus Word contents 80 2 Link and Auxiliary Timer Counter PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 Expansion DM Word contents specified bank 90 to 97 2 banks 0 to 7 Word contents current bank 98 2 Note Refer to 10 2 2 Data Configurations for the various data configurations 10 46 PARAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER Compares or transfers data between the PC s parameter area and the file de vice connected to the PC The clock data of the PC upon completion of the PA RAMETER AREA FILE TRANSFER command will be recorded as the date of the file that has been transferred A file can be transferred to the I O table only when the PC is in PROGRAM mode Note 1 T
338. ply resetting minor failure or send error Fatal communications error Lit red Completion Codes Completion codes are stored in memory as shown in the following table at the completion of execution of communications instructions for each port The completion codes will be 00 0000 during execution of the instruction The completion codes are stored as 2 bytes of data 1 word upon completion of the execution of SEND 192 RECV 193 and CMND 194 These codes are the same as the response codes for FINS commands The first byte of the completion code is placed in bits 08 to 15 and the second byte is placed in bits 00 to 07 Port 0 to 7 A503 to A510 contain the completion codes for the Completion Codes results of communications instruction execution for ports A503 to A510 0 to 7 respectively Flag 0 Instruction Instruction Instruction Communications 1 executed 12 executed 3 executed instruction Execution Error Flag Completion code Previous 00 Normal 04 Busy 00 Normal code end end Timing the Reading of Responses should be read on the rising edge upward differentiation of the Port Responses Enabled Flag as shown in the following diagram Port Enabled Flag JthK __ Processing to read response e 127 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 9 3 Send Receive Data Areas The following table shows the data areas that can be used with SEND 192 and R
339. pply the permissible ambient voltage drop at is lower than if the power supplies were separate When the output voltage ambient fluctuation of the communications power supply has a lower limit of 23 V the permissible maximum voltage drop of a single power supply line is 23 V 21 V 2 1 V Of the permissible maximum voltage drop of a single power supply line 1 V the permissible maximum volt age drop of trunk lines and drop lines are 0 65 V and 0 35 V respectively Calculate the distance between the power supply and each node and the total current consumption of each node in the communications and the internal cir cuit Refer to the current consumption overview in Appendix F Connectible De vices Try to calculate the best location for each node using the formula below If the best location for each node can be determined using the formula the specifica tions for the power supply to each node can also be met Do not exceed the max imum current capacity of the cable Thick cable 8 A and thin cable 3 A Condition Formula 2 For the Voltage Drop of the Trunk Line O Lnx Re Nt x 0 005 x In 9 0 65 V Ln The distance between the power supply and the nodes not includ ing the lengths of the drop lines Re Maximum cable resistance Thick cable 0 015 Q m thin cable 0 069 Q m Nt The number of taps between each node and the power supply Step 2 Calculating the Best Location of the Actual Nodes Section 6 5
340. r Installation Disk ISA Board in IBM PC AT or Compatible Configurator ISA Board F ed 3G8F5 DRM21 PCMCIA Card in IBM PC AT or Compatible Network Interface Unit Connector to network Dedicated ISA Board PCMCIA Card Configurator 3G8E2 DRM21 Applicable computer IBM PC AT or compatible 3G8E2 DRM21 Configurator functions Dedicated PCMCIA Card and Configurator Installation Disk Dedicated PCMCIA Card Windows 95 or Windows NT 3 51 4 0 Windows 95 The main functions of the Configurator are illustrated below Refer to the Com poBus D Configurator Operation Manual W328 Setup functions m Monitoring functions Operating functions File management functions OMRON Displaying connected device lists Monitoring Master status Master error histories and communications cycle times M Setting remote I O allocations scan list Setting other Master parameters initial remote I O status communications cycle time Setting Slave parameters for Slaves not from Starting stopping remote I O communications Reading writing files for connected device data Master parameters offline online and device data resulting from setting 17 Outline of Configurator Section 1 5 Note 1 Connect only one Configurator to each Network 2 Do not use a Configurat
341. r address connection not established node and that a message has not been received from another node Flashing Master Remote I O communications green Units node are being initialized between the address Master Unit and Slaves flashing OFF OFF Waiting for initialization with PC Reset the Master Unit if this status continues for an extended period of time If operation still is not possible replace the CPU Unit and or Master Unit Flashing Master Waiting for end of node address The following causes should be considered if this green Unit s node duplication check status continues for too long address Unit numbers A to F have been used for a C200HS PC The same Unit number has been used for more than one C200HS PC Unit numbers A to F have been used for a C200HX HG HE PC that supports less than 881 I O points The Master Unit is not registered in the I O table for a C200HX HG HE PC Reset the Master Unit if none of the above are problems If operation still is not possible replace the CPU Unit and or Master Unit Saving scan list in EEPROM or flashing clearing scan list 240 Indicators and Error Processing Section 15 1 Errors Occurring in the Master Unit The following table lists probable causes and remedies for errors that occur in the Master Unit In the 7 segment display column Mnn represents the Master s node address and Snn represents a S
342. r de vices Multi vendor Network OMRON Master Unit Master from other company DeviceNet network eee SS he ASS OMRON Configurator Slave from other company i Se et SR Se SS Sa ee Sue Sed OMRON Slaves Remote I O communications to constantly exchange I O data between the PC and Slaves can be executed simultaneously with message communications to send receive Master Unit data as required by the application A DeviceNet net work can thus be installed to flexibly handle applications that require both bit data and message data Message communications can be achieved either by using OMRON s FINS commands or by using explicit DeviceNet messages Simultaneous Remote I O and Message Services OMRON Master Unit OMRON Master Unit EE AA TEE MAEAEA Message communications DeviceNet network OMRON Configurator Slaves Remote I O communications 12 DeviceNet Features Section 1 2 Connect Multiple PCs to A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable connection of more than the Same Network one Master to the Network allowing message communications between PCs and between multiple groups of PCs and Slaves This allows the DeviceNet net work to be used as a common bus to unify controls while reducing wiring OMRON Master Unit OMRON Master Unit OMRON Master Unit EARE ETETE SEEE Message communications OMRON Configurator Slaves Remote I
343. r supply to the Slaves and turn ON the communications power supply Turn ON the power supply to the PC i e to the Master Unit Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode Create the Master parameters with the Configurator Register the Master parameters in the Master Unit Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled Commu nications will not start at if they have been set to be stopped at startup from the Configurator Use the software switches or Configurator to start and stop remote I O communications Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit Read the Network configuration from the Configurator Save the Network configuration in a file from the Configurator Switch the PC to RUN mode Remote I O Communications with More than One Master Unit in the Network 1 2 3 Note 1 2 3 ar WD oOo ON DD 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 The following procedure can be used only when the scan list is enabled Connect a Configurator to the network Turn ON the power supply to all the Slaves Read the Network configuration from the Configurator Turn OFF the power supply to all the Slaves Create the Master parameters for each Master Unit and save the parame ters in files Turn ON the power supply to one PC i e to one of the Master Units Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode Read the Network configuration from the Configurat
344. rator for CS1 series PCs the corresponding words in the range CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 will actually be allocated m Output area Output block 1 Start word No of words allocated oc cupied Start word Output block 2 a No of words allocated oc cupied Note Input area Input block 1 Input block 2 a Start word No of words allocated oc cupied Start word No of words allocated oc cupied 1 When using the Configurator to create Master parameters for a Master Unit mounted to a CS1 series PC set the PC model to Other C200HX HG HE Z Series 2 If Master parameters are read from a Master Unit mounted to a CS1 series PC the PC model will be C200HX CPU85 3 With CS1 series PCs the areas that can be specified when allocating I O with the Configurator and the actual areas that are allocated correspond in the way shown in the following table There are some areas that cannot be allocated User set Allocations Section 8 4 Area specified with Configurator Actual area for CS1 series PC IR 0 to IR 235 CIO 0000 to CIO 0235 IR 300 to IR 511 CIO 0300 to CIO 0511 HR 00 to HR 99 H000 to H099 DM 0000 to DM 5999 D00000 to D05999 1 2 3 1 Use the Configurator to set the area type start word and number of words allocated for each block
345. rea has consecutive word address es beginning at 0000 No of words command and response In the command block the number of data words to be transferred or compared In the response block the number of words transferred or compared Note If 0000 is specified as the number of items no data will be transferred or compared and a normal response code will be returned Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file device memory cards File name command The file to be transferred or compared refer to 10 3 Vol ume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the file name Parameter Areas The following shows the parameter areas and the words that can be specified The word ranges in parentheses show the possible values for the beginning word Leoio o L80 00 PC Setup 0000 to 00FF 0000 to OFFF l o Ls011 8001 Peripheral Device settings 0000 to OOBF 0000 to O6BF 18012 V O tabl 0000 to 03FF i i l 8013 Routing tables 0000 to 01FF Unit No 0 80 02 CPU Bus Unit i 0000 to 083F settings Unit No 15 0020202 ie ae a aE J Note Although the routing tables have a 512 word area 0000 to 01FF only a 48 word area 0000 to 003F of it can be read written 10 47 PROGRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER Compares or transfers data between the PC s program area and the file device connected to the PC The clock data of the PC upon completion of the PRO GRAM AREA FILE TRANSFER command will be record
346. read The contents registered with this command is effective until the power supply to the PC is turned OFF or until the Master Unit is reset This enables executing the COMPOSITE REGISTRATION READ command consecutively without having to specify the contents to be read again 1 Although this command is addressed to the CPU Unit it is actually pro cessed by the DeviceNet Master Unit The command will thus result in an error if it is not sent to a CPU Unit through a DeviceNet network 2 If there is an error in the command code or a read address no data will be read ae CERTES X Command Read address Read address code Memory area code Memory area code Sp 100 items max for 2 byte data see description above 01 11 Command Response code code Memory area code command The data area to read Read address command The word bit flag to read Memory Areas The following data can be written refer to 11 2 Memory Area Designations for memory area designations 203 CONTROLLER DATA READ Section 11 8 Memory area Data Memory area No of code bytes CIO TR CPU Bus Bit status 00 1 Link and Auxiliary Word contents 80 2 Timer Counter Completion Flag status 01 1 PV 81 2 DM Word contents 82 2 EM Word contents specified bank 90 to 97 98 2 A8 to AF Note Refer to 10 2 2 Data Configurations for the various data configur
347. resolution of either 1 6 000 or 1 30 000 Temperature Input Terminals e Temperature data is input as binary data for 4 inputs e Thermocouple and platinum resistance thermometer inputs are available C200H I O Link Units e Special I O Slaves that mount to C200HX HG HE PCs and read write data from the Master Unit to the specified words in the CPU Unit e Read and write areas specified for up to 512 bits each 82 words each e Any memory area words can be read or written using DeviceNet explicit mes sages RS 232C Units Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D Section 1 1 Master Units Applicable PC CVM1 CV Series e Special I O Slaves that provide two RS 232C ports and control I O from the Master Units MULTIPLE I O TERMINALS e Multiple I O Units can be combined under a Communications Unit and treated as a single Slave e Special I O Units such as Analog I O Units and High speed Counter Units are also available Master Unit model number CVM1 DRM21 V1 Mounting position CPU or Expansion CPU Rack Classified as CPU Bus Units Max No of Units With Without Configurator Configurator 16 CS1 Series C200HZ HX HG HE C200HS C200HW DRM21 V1 CPU Rack or Expansion I O Rack Classified as Special I O Units 16 10 or 16 10 Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D Slave Units Input Terminals transistor inputs 1 0 points 8 input point
348. ress of the range of addresses used for that data area in communications For example the address for word AR 13 is computed as follows First address for AR Area 048C 048C OD 13 in BCD 0499 The word address for AR 13 would be 049900 the memory area code would specify this as a word and the address of bit 12 in AR 13 would be 04990C The unit of access bit or word and the data code are specified as shown in the following illustration Bt 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Il ry a 1 1 Access unit Data code 00 Bit 00 CIO LR HR or AR area 10 Word 01 Timer or Counter area 02 Data Memory area 10 to 17 18 28 to 2F EM Area 199 MEMORY AREA READ Section 11 3 11 2 2 Data Configuration The configuration of the various types of data that can be read or written is shown below The number of bytes required for each type of data is also given Flag or Bit Status One 00 Bit is OFF 0 Byte 01 Bit is ON 1 Word Contents or PV Two Bytes E Bits 0 to 7 second byte Bits 8 to 15 first byte 11 3 MEMORY AREA READ Reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive memory area words starting from the specified word All words must be in the same memory area here all memory areas with the same memory area code are considered as one area Command Block 0 01 00 Command Beginning address No of it
349. ritten to last word Bit 15 ON 1 Data written to last word Bits 0 to 14 No of words to be written Bits 0 to 7 second byte Bits 8 to 15 first byte Data command The data to be written The leftmost bits bits 15 to 8 of each word must be specified first followed by the rightmost bits bits 7 to 0 The re quired number of bytes in total for each write can be calculated as follows No of words x 2 each word consists of two bytes Parameter Areas There are five parameter areas each of which has consecutive word addresses beginning from 0000 The following data can be read The word ranges in paren theses show the possible values for the beginning word 8010 L 80 00 PC Setup 0000 to 00FF 0000 to OFFF L 8011 8001 Peripheral Device settings 0000 to 00BF 0000 to 06BF 8012 VO table 0000 to 03FF 80 13 Routing tables 0000 to 01FF Unit No 0 8002 CPU Bus Unit 0000 to 083F settings UnitNo 15 Bs 2 cy 4 fa ay a d Note Only a 48 word area 0000 to 002F of the routing tables is available The data must be written to the 48 word area in sequence beginning from 0000 or an error PARAMETER AREA CLEAR Section 10 13 will result as the PC automatically does a format check in order to prevent routing errors 10 13 PARAMETER AREA CLEAR Writes all zeros to the specified number of consecutive parameter area words to clear the previous data
350. ront panel DIP switch can be used to control remote I O com munications for communications errors This pins can be set either to automati cally restart communications or to not restart communications after the cause of an error is removed These errors include the following Remote I O commu nications time outs network power supply errors unstable supply from net work send time outs slave missing other master present CAN controller er ror Front panel DIP switch Master Unit Remote I O communications Pin 3 Remote I O communications stop continue for communications errors Remote I O Communications Errors Scan list failure CPU Unit in PROGRAM mode In scan list enable mode Slave missing Setup error During scan list operation MS NS indicators MS No change NS No change 7 segment display CO lt Master node address C2 Master node address C3 lt Master node address C4 Master node address CA Master nOde address Master status area 1 Communica tions during error Stop Setup error I O area overlap I O area range violation Unsupported slave Verification error Slave missing Slave I O size differs Remote I O communications time out MS No change NS Flashing red d0 lt gt Master node address d1 lt Master node address d2 Master node address Bits
351. rsonal computer that operates as one node in the DeviceNet network Fixed allocation L Free allocation m FINS message communications Explicit message communications System Configuration without a Configurator Master Unit CPU Unit XQ v wi CVM1 CV series PCs 64 nodes max CS1 series C200HZ HX HG HE PCs 51 nodes max C200HS PCs 33 nodes max Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D Section 1 1 System Configuration with a Configurator Master Unit Master Unit Master Unit Configurator A ISA Board CPU Unit Message communications 64 nodes max 64 nodes max Overview of DeviceNet CompoBus D Section 1 1 Overall System Configuration DeviceNet CompoBus D Master Unit CVM1 CV Series CVM1 DRM21 V1 CS1 Series C200HZ HX Photoelectric Photoelectric Photoelectric HG E HS sensors proximi sensors proximi sensors or prox C200HW DRM21 V1 ty sensors limit ty sensors limit imity sensors switches etc switches etc with connectors pA Ll ti Input j M Input Remote Sensor Terminal Adapter s Terminal i used with In put Block CompoBus D DeviceNet 1 0 Link 6 i F M utput Remote A on CQM1 p Unit g Adapter used gt Environment re P af with Output sistant Terminal puter Block Inputs outputs or mixed I O Pry dela Solenoids Solenoids i valves etc valves etc
352. rt remote I O communications for Master Units A and B and confirm that the desired re mote I O communications are performed If there are duplicated settings correct the remote I O allocations from the master parameter edit screen write the corrected parameters to the Master Unit s and then repeat the procedure beginning at step 17 Note Be sure to save the network files They will be required if a Master Unit is ever set to disable the scan list or if a Master Unit is replaced The master parameter files saved in step 9 are not required 112 SECTION 9 Message Communications This section describes message communications using FINS commands sent from the ladder diagram program of the PC O21 SOVEIRVIEW ieidinc MORES Hid detent E widad dada oot ted ed 116 9 1 1 Message Communications Specifications 0 0 0 eee eee 118 9 2 FINS Commands Responses 0 0c 120 9 2 1 Sending Receiving FINS Command Responses 000000000 121 9 2 2 Units Supporting FINS Communications 0 0 0 0 2 e eee eee 122 9 2 3 FINS Command Lists 0 0 0 cece eee 122 9 3 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs 0 00000000005 124 9 3 1 Data Send Receive Instructions 0 2 0 0 eee eee eee 125 9 3 2 Sending FINS Commands 0 cece annarr 127 9 3 3 Using SEND 192 RECV 193 and CMND 194 0 0 eee 128 9 3 4 Programming Examples 0 00 cece cee ee
353. rt the Unit 2 Ifthe error is not cleared replace the Unit Possible remedy Restart the Unit The Read Write Area s settings have been set but data is not being refreshed according to the settings The settings have not been validated 1 Turn ON bit 00 of the software switches 2 Reset the Unit The Unit has not been reset Restart the PC or turn ON and OFF the bit corresponding to the unit number in word AR 01 After setting the areas and operating the Unit the data in the output area frequently appears as unexpected values The area settings are overlapping with those of other Communications Units Check the area settings of other Communications Units and correct settings so that data is not written to an area already being used by another Unit When reading the Slave s DM Area from the Master unstable values are returned and the data is unreadable Attempt was made to access of words from DM 4096 onwards in the C200HE CPU11 CPU Unit Access the correct words only The Explicit Connection Established Flag is ON in the C200H I O Link Unit s status words but Unit is not receiving an explicit message from the Master 270 The Network cables are disconnected or the Master Unit s power supply is OFF OMRON Master Units do not have timeouts when explicit message communications are used so the Explicit Connection Established Flag will not turn OFF even if communic
354. rts show the minimum and maximum I O response times of the DeviceNet network with a C200HX C200HG C200HE or C200HS PC Minimum I O Response Time The minimum I O response time occurs when the Slave s I O refreshing is executed just after the input signal is received by the Master Unit and the output signal is output at the beginning of the next I O refresh cycle Trc Program execution Master Unit processing Output H I i i I i i oi e a TIN TRT IN Tpc TrF Trr out Tout TIN The Input Slave s ON OFF delay Tout The Output Slave s ON OFF delay Trt in Input Slave s communications time Slave See page 224 Trt out Output Slave s communications time Slave See page 224 Tpc The PC s cycle time Tre The PC s DeviceNet Unit refresh time See page 225 The minimum I O response time Tmin is the total of the following terms Twin Tin Trt in Tec Tre Trt out Tout 1 Refer to the CompoBus D DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W347 for details on the Input and Output Slaves delay times 2 Refer to Refresh Time on page 225 and to the PC s Operation Manual for details on the PC s cycle time Remote I O Communications Characteristics Section 14 1 Maximum I O Response Time The maximum I O response time occurs with the I O timing shown in the follow ing diagram Poom excuton Master Unit processing TIN TRM Tre Tre TRF TRM Tout TIN The Input Slav
355. s Model number DRT1 ID08 16 input points DRT1 ID16 Output Terminals transistor outputs 8 output points DRT1 OD08 16 output points DRT1 OD16 Installation DIN track or screws Section 1 1 Remarks Environment resis tant Terminals transistor inputs outputs 8 input points DRT1 ID08C 8 output points DRT1 OD08C 8 input 8 output points DRT1 MD16C Screws Water resistant Uses XS2 Sensor I O Connector to connect I O and DeviceNet Remote Adapters 16 input points DRT1 ID16X 16 output points DRT1 OD16X Sensor Terminals 16 input points DRT1 HD16S 8 input 8 output points DRT1 ND16S Temperature Input Terminals 4 input points 4 words DRT1 TSO4T 4 input points 4 words DRT1 TSO04P DIN track or screws Connected to photoelectric and proximity sensors with connectors Thermocouple inputs Temperature resistance thermometer inputs CQM1 I O Link Unit 16 internal input 16 internal output points between CQM1 and Master Unit CQM1 DRT21 Assembled with CQM1 Up to 3 or 7 Units mountable to CQM1 depending on model of CQM1 Analog Input Terminals 4 input points 4 words or 2 input points 2 words voltages or currents DRT1 AD04 4 input points 4 words voltages or currents DRT1 AD04H Analog Output Terminals 2 output points 2 words
356. s No of steps transitions Maximum no of steps transitions available Steps transitions Kind of memory card 00 No memory card 5 01 SPRAM 02 EPROM 03 EEPROM Memory card size Size of the memory card K byte 1 word 2 bytes CPU Bus Unit configuration response Each CPU Bus Unit has a code as signed to it consisting of two ASCII characters two bytes These codes are giv en in the numerical order according to the unit number of the CPU Bus Units unit 0 to 15 1st byte 2s 32nd byte 64th byte 20 20 20 20 No 0 No 1 No 15 All set to 20 32 bytes 173 CONTROLLER DATA READ Section 10 21 Remote I O data response The number of remote I O systems SYSMAC BUS and SYSMAC BUS 2 is returned in two bytes as follows No of SYSMAC BUS Masters mounted second byte No of SYSMAC BUS 2 Masters mounted first byte PC status response The following single byte 8 bits is returned Bt 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 oo No of Racks connected to the PC 0 to F 0 to 15 racks L With built in host interface Always 1 Bete Peripheral Device connected 0 no 1 yes 174 CONNECTION DATA READ Section 10 22 10 22 CONNECTION DATA READ Reads the model number of the specified Units Command Block 05 02 ee L Command No of Units ode Unit address Response Block 05 02 20 bytes
357. s If remote I O communications are al ready started this switch will have no effect The Remote I O Communications Operating Flag will turn ON when remote I O communications have started Check that this flag is ON and then turn OFF the Start Remote I O Communications software switch The Stop Remote I O Communications software switch can be turned from OFF to ON to stop remote I O communications If remote I O communications are al ready stopped this switch will have no effect The Remote I O Communications Operating Flag will turn OFF when remote I O communications have stopped Check that this flag is OFF and then turn OFF the Stop Remote I O Communications software switch The status flags indicate the status of the Master Unit and the Network These flags occupy the 11 words after the word allocated to the software switches ex cept the last two words are allocated in the DM area for C200HX HG HE HS PCs The 11 words are divided into five areas as shown in the following dia gram CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs CIO Area IR Area i Master status area 1 Fi 1 Master status area 1 First word 1 1 word irstword 1 word First word 2 First word 2 Registered Slaves data 4 words 4 words Normal Slaves data Normal Slaves data First word 6 4 words First word 6 4 words Registered Slaves data Master status area 2 First word 10 1 word DM Area First word 11 Current communications c
358. s carefully before using it The I O areas consist of an input area IR 2000 to IR 2063 and output area IR 1900 to IR 1963 The input and output areas are allocated according to the Slaves node addresses as shown in the following diagram Node Output areas address Input area IR 1900 00 IR 2000 IR 1901 01 IR 2001 IR 1902 si IR 2002 IR 1961 61 IR 2061 IR 1962 62 IR 2062 IR 1963 63 IR 2063 The DeviceNet Area consists of an input area CIO 0350 to CIO 0399 and an output area CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 The input and output areas are allocated according to the Slaves node addresses as shown in the following diagram Output area oes Input area CIO 0050 00 CIO 0350 CIO 0051 01 CIO 0351 CIO 0052 02 CIO 0352 CIO 0097 47 CIO 0397 CIO 0098 48 CIO 0398 CIO 0099 49 CIO 0399 With the CS1 Series the DeviceNet Output Area CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 is con tained inside the I O Area CIO 0000 to CIO 0319 For this reason in systems with a large number of I O points where CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 would be allo cated to I O Units ensure that there is no overlap of area allocation using one of the following methods Editing I O Tables By editing the I O tables using the CX Programmer it is possible to ensure that actual I O for Basic I O Units is not allocated to CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 With automatic allocation I O table creation it is possible that actual I O is allo cated to CIO 0050 to CIO 0099 and so in systems with a large number of
359. s not agree with the information in the scan list d5 Communications error An error occurred in remote I O communications d9 Scan list operation failed It was not possible to perform a scan list operation CO to C5 PC mounting error A PC mounting error has occurred E4 Node address duplication The same node address is allocated to two nodes FO Bus Off detected A Bus Off status was detected F1 No communications power supply The communications power is not being supplied E0 Send timeout A send timeout occurred E2 Section 15 2 Error History When monitoring the error history from the Configurator the information in the Note Meaning column is also displayed 15 2 3 FINS Commands for Error Histories ERROR HISTORY READ Command Block j byte T Command First record No of records code to read to read Response Block 1 byte 10 bytes 10 bytes T T Se A i nS 73 21 02 ee Be l EES ep as IN Pa xX IN i f Command Response Max No of No of records Data for 1 record Data for 1 record code code records to read No of records stored ERROR HISTORY CLEAR Command Block 1 byte R 3 21 03 I Command code Response Block 1 byte l 21 03 i IN A Command Response code code 15 2 4 Programming Examples This section describes how to read the error history data from the Master
360. s of Terminating Resistors available one for a T branch Tap and one for a Terminating block Ter minating Resistor Use a DeviceNet cable when connecting a Terminating block Terminating Resistor To use DeviceNet connect a communications power supply to the communica tions connector of each node with a 5 wire cable Basically a communications power supply internal circuit power supply and I O power supply must be pro vided separately Refer to Section 7 Installation 1 Always use DeviceNet cables The newly developed 5 wire cables are now recommended instead of con ventional 3 wire cables The 5 wire cables are more suitable for DeviceNet and easier to use Refer to 5 1 Cables and Connectors for details on how to add 5 wire cables to an existing network constructed with 3 wire cables Network Configuration Section 3 1 2 Connect Terminating Resistors to both ends of the trunk line When using a Terminating block Terminating Resistor use a DeviceNet cable to connect the Terminating Resistor When connecting the Terminating Resistor insu late the power supply lines that are not being used with vinyl tape to avoid a short circuit in the cables 3 Do not use products other than DeviceNet products for example a lightning arrester in the communications path If other products are used then this could reduce signal reflection and interfere with normal communications 3 1 2 Connections Trunk and Drop Lines The trunk line is a ca
361. scan list was disabled at start up a Confirm that communications are possible with the registered slaves by monitoring the Registered Slave Data Area b From a Programming Device connected to the PC turn ON the Scan List Enable Bit in the software switches bit 0 Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled You can use the software switches to start and stop remote I O communications Perform the following from Programming Device connected to the PC and go to step 12 if the scan list was disabled at startup and you want to re regis ter the the scan list a Turn ON the Scan List Clear Bit in the software switches bit 1 b Confirm that communications are possible with the registered slaves by monitoring the Registered Slave Data Area Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled You can use the software switches to start and stop remote I O communications Default Remote I O Allocation Section 8 3 c Turn ON the Scan List Enable Bit in the software switches bit 0 11 Do nothing if the scan list was enabled at startup and you not want to change the scan list Remote I O communications will start with the scan list enabled You can use the software switches to start and stop remote I O communications Go to step 12 12 Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit 13 Switch the PC to RUN mode Note The dots on the 7 segment display on the
362. se code code 182 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE Section 10 32 Parameters Program no command Set to 0000 10 32 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE Releases the access right regardless of what device holds it A normal response code will returned even when another device held the access right or when no device held the access right Command Block oC 03 00 00 Command Program code no Response Block 0c 03 Command Response code code Parameters Program no command Set to 0000 10 33 ERROR CLEAR Clears errors or error messages from the PC A normal response will be returned even if the error has not occurred Note The cause of the error must be removed before executing the ERROR CLEAR command or the same error will occur again after the ERROR CLEAR command is executed Command Block 21 01 Command Error reset code FAL no Response Block 21 01 Command Response code code Parameters Error reset FAL no command The code of the error to be reset 183 ERROR LOG READ Section 10 34 The following codes can be used regardless of the PC s mode Error code Meaning FFFE Present error cleared Resets the highest priority error 0002 Momentary power interruption error This error occurs when the CPU power has been interrupted 00A0 to 00A7 SYSMAC BUS error 00B0 to 00B3 SYSMAC BUS 2 error 0
363. ses and the data formats used are illustrated in the following diagram Unless otherwise specified all data is hexa decimal 2 ey 158 bytes max DeviceNet Master Unit Automatically Command Text generated code Xand attached A l Automatically DeviceNet network Response 2 bytes 2 bytes 156 bytes max kail nsa OlOJO OJO O L iN Command Response Text code code generated and attached Command Codes Response Codes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte CPU Unit CVM1 CV Series CS1 Series or C200HX HG HE Command codes are represented by a 2 byte hexadecimal code FINS com mands always begin with a 2 byte command code and any parameters that are required follow the command code Response codes are represented by a 2 byte hexadecimal code that indicates the results of command execution The first byte provides the main response code MRES which classifies the results and the second byte provides the sub response code SRES which provides details on the results 119 FINS Commands Responses Section 9 2 The main response codes are listed below Refer to Appendix B FINS Command Response Codes for further details on response codes Main code Main code 00 Normal completion 20 Read not possible 01 Local node error 21 Write not possible 02 Destination node error 22 Not executable in current mode 03 Communications controller error 23
364. specified number of files stored in the file device con nected to the PC Section 10 36 22 0 Command Disk no Beginning No of code file position files Response Block 22 01 26 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes Command Response Disk data No of Fie data File data code code files Parameters Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file device memory card Beginning file position command The first file to be read the first file num ber is 0000 No of files command The number of files to be read between 0001 and 0019 Disk data response The data from the file device the configuration of which is as follows 1st byte 26th byte 12 bytes Volume Date time Total capacity Unused capacity Total no of files label 186 Volume Label The volume label registered with the file device refer to 10 3 Volume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the volume label If no volume label has been registered 20 spaces ASCII 20 will be returned Date Time The date and time that the volume label was created see next page Total Capacity and Open Capacity The total capacity of the file device and the number of bytes still available hexadecimal Total No of Files The number of files recorded in the file device No of files response The number of files that have been read Bit 15 is ON
365. sponse bytes to receive 0 to 160 i e 0000 to 00A0 Destination network address 0 to 127 i e 00 to 7F Set to 0 Destination unit FINS address Destination node address Bits 00 to 03 No of retries 0 to 15 i e 0 to F Bits 04 to 07 Set to 0 Bits 08 to 11 Transmission port number 0 to 7 Bit 12 to 14 Set to 0 Bit 15 ON No response OFF Response returned Response monitoring time 0001 to FFFF 0 1 to 6553 5 seconds Note 1 Set the destination network address to 00 when transmitting within the same network 2 Indicates a Unit as shown in the following table CPU Unit 00 User program in FA computer 01 CPU Bus Unit 10 to 1F Unit numbers 0 to 15 FE The local Unit 3 Values of 01 to 3E indicate nodes 1 to 63 4 Designates the length of time that the PC retries transmission when bit 15 of C 3 is OFF and no response is received The default value is 0000 which indicates 2 seconds 125 Message Communications for CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 9 3 Sending Explicit Explicit messages can be sent to OMRON Special Slaves and DeviceNet de Messages vices made by other manufacturers by setting the FINS command code to 28 01 When this is done set the response monitoring time in C 5 to at least 0014 hex 2 s If it is set to less than 2 s communications may be busy even if the next command is executed after the first one t
366. start communications after communications errors Turn from OFF to ON to start remote I O communications Turn from OFF to ON to stop remote I O communications When the Enable Scan List software switch is turned from OFF to ON the Slaves that are currently participating in communications are registered in the scan list and the scan list is stored in the Master Unit s non volatile memory After the scan list is created communications are started with the scan list enabled The Enable Scan List software switch is effective only when the PC is in PRO GRAM mode and communications are being performed with the scan list dis abled If this bit is turned ON while the Master Unit is already operating with the scan list enabled the operation won t be performed and an error will occur The result of the operation is indicated in the status flags as follows Normal completion The Scan List Operation Completed Flag goes ON Error completion The Scan List Operation Error Flag goes ON After creating the scan list check which of these flags is ON and then turn OFF the Enable Scan List software switch When the Clear Scan List software switch is turned from OFF to ON the scan list being used will be cleared and communications will be started with the scan list disabled The result of the operation is indicated in the status flags as follows Normal completion The Scan List Operation Completed Flag goes ON Err
367. ster Unit s non volatile memory Always use this mode for normal operation The Master will communicate only with the Slaves registered in the scan list A verification error will occur if a Slave registered in the scan list doesn t exist in the network or isn t started when I O communications begin Even if it is properly connected in the network a Slave which isn t registered in the scan list will not participate in communications and isn t checked for errors Scan List Disabled When a scan list is disabled communications are performed without using the scan list The scan list is disabled when the scan list hasn t been created or it has been cleared Do not disable the scan list during actual system operation All of the Slaves in the network can communicate with the scan list disabled so Slaves can be added to the network while communications are in progress Without a scan list however there is no way to check for Slaves that have not started or have failed and errors can thus go undetected The communications cycle time will be much longer that the computational value when the scan list is disabled When a scan list is disabled operation is possible only by using the default I O allocations User set allocations cannot be used 1 The scan list is automatically enabled when the Configurator is used to allo cate remote O If the software switch is used to clear the scan list remote I O communications will opera
368. story from the Configurator 2 The following equations can be used to find the approximate message com munications time but this is a typical time not the maximum time The mes sage communications time will vary depending on the frequency of mes sage communications the load on the remote node the communications cycle time and other factors For any one Master Unit the message com munications time can be greatly increased due to heavy loads and the user program must be written to allow for this The following equation can be used to compute the approximate message com munications time Message communications time Communications cycle time x No of message bytes 15 6 1 No of message bytes No of data bytes following the FINS command code The communications cycle time depends on whether or not remote I O commu nications are being used Message Communications Only No Remote I O Communications The following equation can be used to compute the message communications time when remote I O communications are not being used Message Communications Time Section 14 2 Communications cycle time 2 see note 0 11 x Tg 0 6 ms Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 Note The communications cycle time will be 2 ms even if remote I O communications are not being used Remote I O and Message Communications Performing message communications in addition to remote I O communicati
369. t check that the I O size registered in the Master s scan list matches the actual I O size of the Slave The I O size is recorded in the following attributes of the connection ob ject Interface 2 Polled I O Connection Produced Connection size Input size Consumed Connection size Output size Interface 3 Bit strobed I O Connection Produced Connection size Input size See Appendix C Multi vendor Usage for details and record the correct value in the Master s scan list Refer to the Master s manual for details on registering the values 15 3 3 Analog Input Unit Troubleshooting DRT1 AD04 Error Probable cause The AD converted data is FFFF The Analog Input Terminal s open circuit detection function is activated when the input range is set to 1 to 5 V and the voltage drops below 0 8 V or the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below 3 2 mA The converted data is set to FFFF when the open circuit detection function is activated Check the Analog input s cables for broken wires or incorrect wiring When the input signal rises above 0 8 V or 3 2 mA the converted data will automatically return to its normal range DRT1 AD04H Error Probable cause The AD converted data is 7FFF when the The Analog Input Terminal s open circuit detection function is activated disconnection indicator is lit when the input range is set to 1 to 5 V and the voltage drops below 0 8 V or the input range is set
370. t and OFF when there is no error history The error history will be cleared when the Master Unit is reset power is turned off or an error history clear opera tion is performed Configurator Scan List Flag Bit 15 This flag is turned ON 1 when a user set scan list has been registered in the Master Unit from the Configurator and operation is taking place with the scan list enabled It is OFF when operating with the scan list disabled or when a default scan list has been registered using the software switch and operation is taking place with the scan list enabled 13 3 3 Current Communications Cycle Time The following diagram shows the structure of Current Communications Cycle Time in memory CVM1 and CV series PCs CIO 1511 25 x unit No CS1 series PCs i i ey i D06033 2 x unit No C200HX HG HE HS PCs DM 6033 2 x unit No Bit 15 14 13 12 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 The current communications cycle time is stored in the above word as 4 digit BCD in ms The value is truncated at the decimal point The value is refreshed each PC execution cycle for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE HS PCs and each peripheral servicing time for CVM1 and CV series PCs 13 3 4 Registered Slave Data The bits in the Registered Slave Data Area correspond to the Slaves node ad dresses as shown in the following diagram First Words CVM1 and CV series PCs CIO 1502 25 x unit No CS1 series PCs CIO 2002 10 x unit No C200HX HG H
371. t is set correctly 06 A non existing file has File name and device Check whether the correct file been specified name was used 07 A verification error has Contents of memory Check whether the memory occurred that was compared contents are correct and replace if incorrect an Check the contents of the file A read error may have occurred 21 Write not 01 The specified area is If the specified area is read only possible read only or is the write cannot be performed If it write protected is write protected turn off the write protect switch and execute the instruction again 02 The data is protected Execute the instruction again after issuing the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT CLEAR command An attempt was made to File name Check the file name and either simultaneously download interrupt servicing or wait for and upload a file servicing to complete before re executing the command The data link tables cannot PC Setup Change the PC Setup to manual be written manual because data link table generation they are set for automatic generation 03 The number of files Number of files in the Write the file s again after erasing exceeds the maximum file device unneeded files or use different permissible disk or Memory Card that has free space Too many files open Number of files open Close open files and re execute the command 05 A non existing program no Program number in Check the program number and has been specified the c
372. t the connector is being inserted in the right direction 2 To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires don t pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when connecting it to the terminal block Also never put heavy objects on top of the cable 7 7 Grounding the Network This section shows how to connect a ground wire to the communications cable s shield wire Connect the ground wire to the communications power supply s FG terminal and ground it to less than 100 Q To prevent ground loops ground the network at only one location Also connect the ground as close as possible to the center of the network Use a ground line that is separate from ones used for inverters and other drive system devices 77 Section 7 7 Grounding the Network Grounding the Network 78 The DeviceNet network must be grounded at one location and one location only so that a ground loop is not created The ground should also be connected as close as possible to the center of the Network Connect the cable shield to the ground terminal on the communications power supply and then connect to a ground of 100 Q max as shown in the following diagrams T branch Tap or Power Supply Tap Power Supply Tap FG V V Communications power supply Ground 100 max Power supply with cable grounded one location only Note V V CAN H CAN H Shield Communications Shield CANL cable CANL V Vy Communicatio
373. ta data records Parameters Beginning record no command The first record to be read the first record number is 0000 Max no of stored records response The maximum number of records that can be recorded No of stored records response The number of records that have been re corded No of records command and response The number of records to read With the DeviceNet network up to 15 records can be read at the same time Error log data response The specified error log records will be returned in sequence starting from the beginning record number The total number of bytes required is calculated as follows No of records x 10 bytes The configuration of each error record is as follows 1st byte 10th byte deal Day Hour Year Month Error code 1 Error code 2 Minute Second Error code 1 2 Refer to page 184 for error code 1 and to the relevant operation manual or installation guide for error code 2 Each data includes the second minute hour 0 to 23 date month and year the rightmost two digits in BCD specifying the time that the error occurred 10 35 ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears all error log records Note This command cannot be executed if any other device has the access right Command Block 21 03 Sa Command format Response Block 21 03 Command Response format code 185 FILE NAME READ 10 36 FILE NAME READ Command Block Reads out data on the
374. tails Indicator Status Meaning ON The Unit is operating normally Flashing Switch settings are being read ON A fatal error Unit hardware error has occurred Flashing A non fatal error such as a switch setting error has occurred OFF The Master Unit s power is OFF it is resetting or it is waiting to start initialization ON Normal Network status Communications connection established Flashing The Network is normal but the communications connection isn t established ON A fatal communications error has occurred A node address duplication or Bus Off error was detected These errors make communications impossible Flashing A non fatal communications error a communications error in a Slave has occurred OFF A Network error has occurred For example the Master is the only node in the Network 36 CVM1 and CV series PCs Section 4 2 Note Rotary Switches The Master Units two digit decimal unit number is set with the rotary switches on the front of the Unit The setting range is 00 to 15 Unit pe x01 O L x100 The left switch sets the 10 s digit and the right switch sets the 1 s digit Any unit number from 00 to 15 can be set as long as it hasn t been set on another CPU Bus Unit connected to the PC Use a small flat blade screwdriver to turn the rotary switches be careful not to damage the switch Always turn OFF the PC before changing the unit
375. te the MEMORY CARD FORMAT before using a new memory card as a file device Note If the MEMORY CARD FORMAT command is executed all data will be cleared from the memory card Be sure that it is okay to delete the data before executing this command FILE DELETE Section 10 40 Command Block 22 04 Command Disk no code Response Block 22 04 Command Response code code Parameters Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file device memory card 10 40 FILE DELETE Deletes files stored by the file device connected to the PC Note 1 The specified files will be deleted in sequence If non existing file names have been specified the PC will ignore them and the operation will continue 2 If the specified number of files and the number of file names do not coincide no files will be deleted Command Block 22 05 12 bytes 12 byes AeA zA s dae Command Disk no No of Filename File name code files Response Block 22 05 Command Response No of code code files Parameters Disk no Command Set to 0000 for the file device memory card No of files command The number of files to be deleted File name command The names of the files to be deleted refer to 10 3 Vol ume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the file name No of files response The number of files that have been
376. te under the default allocations with the scan list disabled Always confirm that the system is stopped before disabling the scan list in a Master Unit This is particularly important if there is more than one Master on the same network If the scan list is disabled for one of the Masters normally communications will not be possible 2 The scan list data in a Master Unit is deleted whenever the scan list is dis abled 93 Default Remote I O Allocation Section 8 3 8 3 Default Remote I O Allocation This section explains how the Slave s I O points are allocated to words in the PC to which the Master Unit is mounted 8 3 1 PC Allocation Areas CVM1 and CV series PCs CS1 series PCs 94 When the default remote I O allocations are used words in the memory of the PC are allocated to slave nodes according to node addresses The words that are allocated are divided into input areas which show the status of inputs from the Slaves and output areas which are used to write data to be output to the Slaves Words allocated to the node address of the Master Unit aren t used by the Mas ter Unit and can be used by a Slave The Master s node address however must be unique and can t be assigned to both the Master and to a Slave When another company s slave is being used both the input and output areas might be used by the slave even if the slave is just an output slave or input slave Be sure to check the slave s specification
377. ten to last word Bit 15 ON 1 Data written to last word Bits 0 to 14 No of bytes written Bits 0 to 7 second byte Bits 8 to 15 first byte PROGRAM AREA CLEAR Section 10 18 Data command The data to be written 10 18 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR Command Block Response Block Parameters 10 19 RUN Command Block Response Block Parameters Clears the contents of the program area Note 1 If memory is write protected via the key switch on the front panel of the PC the PROGRAM AREA CLEAR command is not effective 2 The PROGRAM AREA CLEAR command will clear the program area even if memory is write protected by the PROGRAM AREA PROTECT command refer to 10 14 PROGRAM AREA PROTECT Executing PROGRAM AREA CLEAR will release program protection 3 If any other device holds the access right the PROGRAM AREA CLEAR command is not effective 03 08 00 00 00 Command Program code no Clear code 03 08 Command Response code code Program no command Set to 0000 Clear code command Set to 00 Changes the PC to DEBUG MONITOR or RUN mode enabling the PC to execute its program Note If any other device holds the access right the PC mode will not be changed 04 01 00 00 Command Program code no Mode 04 01 Command Response code code Program no command Set to 0000 Mode command As
378. ter Unit refer to that Master s user s manual e Check whether the Slave is registered in the Master s scan list If an OMRON Master Unit is being used a new Slave can t be added to the network if the Master is operating with the scan list enabled First perform the clear scan list operation check that the Slave has joined the network and then perform the create scan list operation If another company s Master Unit is being used refer to that Master s user s manual for details on adding a new Slave to its scan list 267 Troubleshooting Section 15 3 Error Probable cause The NS indicator alternates between being e When using an OMRON Master check the following items and perform green and flashing green or alternates the necessary error processing steps between flashing red and flashing green Register the scan list again After performing the clear scan list operation check that the Slave has joined the network and perform the create scan list operation Make sure that the Slave s allocated I O area doesn t overlap with that of another Slave If there is an overlap change the Slave s node address to eliminate it Make sure that the allocated I O area doesn t exceed the allowed range shown below C200HW DRM21 V1 Output IR 050 to IR 099 Input IR 350 to IR 399 If the I O area exceeds this range change the Slave s node address to correct the problem When using another company s Master Uni
379. termine the best location of the nodes in each system Power Supply Tap Configuration Connector C Se Fuse A Le Fuse B D 7 Gls r Power supply cable 0 o o FU Cable A ofl s ly a Cable B o Ol JO o Connector A Connector B Internal Circuitry of the Power Supply Tap Power Supply Tap Fuse A Fuse B V IN OMOLO V CANH gt CAN H 5 wire cables hield 6 5 wire cables on side A Shield ened on side B CANL CAN L Fuses used Littel fuse 312008 V V Rated amperage 8 A Schottky Rated voltage 250 V diode 6 35 x 31 75 mm Q Power supply device Remove fuse A when disconnecting cables on side A and fuse B when discon necting cables on side B 6 7 Dual Power Supply Power Supply Taps can be used to construct a dual power supply system in the network Dual power supply differs from parallel operation of power supplies so the following restrictions apply Restrictions Dual power supply is basically used to ensure backup power supply not parallel operation of power supplies Therefore each power supply to be used must meet the power allocation specifications must satisfy steps 1 and 2 67 Configuration Design Checklist Section 6 8 6 8 Configuration Design Checklist Category Answer Specifications Baud rate Is s
380. the application Multi drop trunk line T branch multi drop line Trunk line Ea e Daisy chain Drop line drop line 14 Note The previous versions of DeviceNet Master Unit Version Comparison DeviceNet C Series 1 3 DeviceNet Master Unit Version Comparison Previous version CVM1 DRM21 Section 1 3 CVM1 DRM21 V1 CompoBus D G599HZ HX HG HE Master Unit model number C200HS C200HW DRM21 C200HW DRM21 V1 Remote I O communications Fixed allocations only Fixed or free allocations Message communications Not supported Supported Master Units per network 1 only Multiple with Configurator Master Units per PC 1 only Multiple with Configurator Communications parameters Fixed Settable communications cycle time Explicit messages to Slaves from other companies Not supported Supported Error log in Master Unit None Supported readable from Configurator or via FINS commands Stopping remote I O communications at startup Not supported always running Supported with Configurator Communications cycle time setting Not supported Supported with Configurator Communications cycle time PV monitoring DeviceNet Not supported CompoBus D Supported Master Units CVM1 DRM21 and C200HW DRM21 cannot be used in the same Network as the new versions CVM1 DRM21 V1 and C200HW DRM21 V1 They also can
381. ther check the execution of frames exceeded that can be sent events in the network and reduce the number of events occurring in one cycle or increase the maximum number of frames 05 Node address setting error Node address Make sure the node address is range within specified range and that there are no duplicate node addresses 06 Node address duplication Node address Make sure that there are no error duplicate node addresses 275 FINS Command Response Codes Appendix A relay nodes 2 was exceeded in the command configuration Main code Sub Probable cause Check point Remedy code 02 Destination node 01 Destination node not part INS indicator of Add to Network error of Network relevant Unit 02 No node with the specified Control data in Check the destination node s node node address instruction address 03 Third node not part of Control data in Check the third node s node Network instruction address Broadcasting was Command data Check the control data and specify specified only one node as the third node 04 Busy error destination Increase the number of transmit node busy retry attempts or re evaluate the system so that the destination node is not so busy receiving data 05 Response time out mes Increase the number of transmit sage packet was corrupted retry attempts by noise Response time out re Control data i
382. tial status of remote I O communications can be set with a Configurator so that communications are either started or stopped at startup Without a Configurator remote I O communications will start at startup but can then be controlled via a software switch 89 Overview Section 8 1 PC Starting Stopping remote I O communications CVM1 and CV Series CS1 Series C200HX HG HE C200HS all models CV500 All others C200HE CPU All CVM1 CPU 11 Z others 01 Remote I O communications can be started and stopped either from a PC Programming Device or from a Configurator Remote I O commu nications upon com munications errors A DIP switch on the fount of the Master Unit can be used to set remote I O communications to stop or continue after communications errors occur Note 1 With CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs only 1 600 points 100 words can be controlled from a single Master Unit if message communications are used i e if FINS commands are sent or received 2 If words in the range LR 00 to LR 63 are allocated with the Configurator for CS1 series PCs the corresponding words in the range CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 will actually be allocated 3 With CS1 series PCs there are restrictions on the areas that can be allo cated by user set allocation Be sure to allocate words according to the ranges given in the above table Remote I O There are two ways to obtain information on c
383. tion changed in table Appendix F Added to provide information on connect able devices and current consumption April 1998 The manual was revised to correct errors and include new information on multiple I O terminals Page 6 Table added to include information on MULTI PLE I O TERMINAL Page 34 Information on MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL add ed Pages 46 51 56 60 65 72 84 91 Specifications cor rected Pages 47 53 58 62 67 68 76 Insulated corrected to isolated Pages 50 56 60 64 71 84 91 98 Note on opening the cover removed Page 92 Note on converted data removed Section 5 3 Added to include information on MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Section 7 12 Added to include information on installa tion and connection of MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Pages 350 to 352 Information on MULTIPLE I O TER MINAL response times and communications cycle times added Pages 363 to 368 Error processing information for MUL TIPLE I O TERMINAL added Page 407 Communications Unit device profile added Page 418 Connectable device information updated to include MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL May 2000 Changes were made throughout the manual to correct errors and include new information on CS1 series PCs Basic and Special I O Units MULTIPLE I O TERMINAL Units and Environment resistant Termi nals CompoBus D was changed to DeviceNet and CV series was amended to CVM1 and CV se ries throughout th
384. tions power is to be supplied 2 Using the graph compute B the maximum current flow in each cable from the power supply to the end of the trunk line according to the types of cables thick or thin 3 Compare the values found in steps 1 and 2 above If the first value A is less than the second B this shows that power supply specifications are met and power can be supplied to all nodes at any point in the network Note Be sure to refer to the correct graph because the maximum current flow is different for thick and thin cables 6 4 2 Countermeasures If the second value B is less than the first A use the following procedure to locate the communications power supply 60 Step 1 Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply from a Graph Section 6 4 e Locate the communications power supply in the center of the network and the nodes to both sides of it e If the nodes are already located at both sides of the power supply move the power supply in the direction that requires the larger current capacity e If thin cable is being used replace it with thick cable If after following the above procedure B is still less than A go to Step 2 and de termine the actual position of the nodes by the formula calculation method Example 1 The following example shows a Network that requires power to be supplied for Communications Power 200 m on thick cable The power supply is located on the end of the Network The Suppl
385. together to troubleshoot er rors Refer to 15 1 Indicators and Error Processing for more details Indicator Status Meaning ON The Unit is operating normally Flashing Settings are being read ON A fatal error hardware error has occurred Flashing A non fatal error such as a switch setting error has occurred OFF A hardware error has occurred the Master Unit s power is OFF it is resetting or it is waiting to start initialization ON Normal Network status Communications connection established Flashing The Network is normal but the communications connection isn t established ON A fatal communications error has occurred A node address duplication or Bus Off error was detected These errors make communications impossible Flashing A non fatal communications error a communications error in a Slave has occurred OFF A Network error has occurred For example the Master is the only node in the Network Rotary Switch Setting The Master Unit s one digit hexadecimal unit number MACHINE No is set with the rotary switches on the front of the Unit MACHINE lof No The unit number setting range depends on the CPU Unit being used as shown in the following table CPU Unit models Unit number Setting setting range method CS1 Series Single digit C200HX CPU5 _J E CPU6L E CPU8 hexadecimal C200HG CPU5 _ E CPU6L E
386. tor Tighten the screws to a torque between 0 25 and 0 3 Nim 73 Connecting Communications Cables Section 7 3 Multi drop Connections with Accessory Connector Thin Cables Only Multi drop Connections with Special Connector Thin or Thick Cables Note 74 You will not be able to tighten these screws with a normal screwdriver which narrows to a point at the end You will need a screwdriver that is consistently thin for the entire length Use a flat blade screwdriver that is consistently thin at the end The connectors provided with the Units can be used for a multi drop connection as long as thin cables are being used just insert both lines into the same hole in the connector Be sure to use crimp connectors on both lines The following il lustration shows a multi drop connection for a connector without set screws A multi drop wiring connector sold separately can be used to wire a multi drop connector for either thin or thick cables This multi drop wiring connector is re quired to wire a multi drop connection with thick cables which are too thick for two lines to fit into the connector provided with the Units The multi drop wiring connector cannot always be used with Master Units or the CQM1 I O Link Units because it may come into contact with the Units mounted next to the Master Unit or the CQM1 I O Link Unit If this happens use a T branch Tap to wire the connection 1 Before connecting th
387. transistor input model e 8 point transistor output model e 16 point transistor output model Environment resistant Terminals e Improved I O Terminals that conform to IP66 for spatter water and oil resis tance e Available in the following models e 8 point transistor input models e 8 point transistor output models e 16 point transistor I O models 8 inputs and 8 outputs Remote Adapters e Used in combination with G7D and other I O Blocks to handle relay outputs power MOS FET Relay outputs etc e Available in 16 point input and 16 point output models O Link Units e More than one I O Link Unit can be mounted to a CQM1 PC e Link 16 inputs and 16 outputs between the PC and the Master Unit A CompoBus D DeviceNet Configurator is required to connect more than one Master to the same Network Sensor Terminals e Accept inputs from photoelectric and proximity sensors with connectors e Available in 16 point input and 8 point input 8 point output models e Output signals can be used for sensor teaching and external diagnosis Analog Input Terminals e Convert analog inputs to binary e Switchable between 2 and 4 input points using the DIP switch e Handle inputs of 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Analog Output Terminals e Convert binary data to analog outputs e Provides outputs of 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA e Available in models with a
388. ts 16 Input points units 16 Output points 4 Analog inputs 2 Analog inputs ree Se Se o Nfs Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Communications power supply 45 mA 30 mA x 5 195 mA 30 mA x 7 210 mA 30 mA x 10 300 mA 30 mA x 5 150 mA Internal circuit power supply 70 mA x 5 350 mA 90 mA x 7 630 mA 80 mA x 10 800 mA 140 mA x 5 700 mA e Calculate the voltage drop of each group when the network is supplied by the communications power supply only Group 1 1 x 0 015 1 x 0 005 x 0 195 0 0039 V Group 2 20 x 0 015 2 x 0 005 x 0 21 0 0651 V Group 3 30 x 0 015 3 x 0 005 x 0 30 0 1395 V Group 4 40 x 0 015 4 x 0 005 x 0 15 0 093 V Total voltage drop 0 0039 0 0651 0 1395 0 093 0 3015 V 4 65 V Thus the best location for the nodes can be determined by using the first formula e Calculate the voltage drop of each group when the communications and the internal circuit power supplies are the same Group 1 1 x 0 015 1 x 0 005 x 0 545 0 0109 V Group 2 20 x 0 015 2 x 0 005 x 0 84 0 2604 V 65 Step 2 Calculating the Best Location of the Actual Nodes Section 6 5 Configuration Example 2 66 Group 3 30 x 0 015 3 x 0 005 x 1 1 0 5115 V Group 4 40 x 0 015 4 x 0 005 x 0 85 0 527 V Total voltage drop 0 0109 0 2604 0 5115 0 527 1 3098 V 0 65 V Thus the best location for the nodes can be determined b
389. ts CIO 1901 aed Allocated ClO 2001 Allocation not possible 02 0 pts 16 pts CIO 1902 Allocation not possible CIO 2002 Allocated 03 16 pts 0 pts CIO 1903 Allocated CIO 2003 Allocation not possible Allocati Allocation 04 8 pts 8 pts ClO 1904 Sat Osa Allocated CIO 2004 not possible Allocated 05 16 pts 16 pts CIO 1905 Allocated CIO 2005 Allocated 06 Opts 48 pts CIO 1906 Allocation not possible ClO 2006 Allocated 07 Master Unit see note1 CIO 1907 Allocation possible CIO 2007 Allocated 08 CIO 1908 Allocated CIO 2008 Allocated a 32 pts Opts CIO 1909 Allocated CIO 2009 Allocation possible see note 2 10 None None CIO 1910 Not used CIO 2010 Not used 11 CIO 1911 Not used CIO 2011 Not used 63 None None CIO 1963 Not used CIO 2063 Not used Note 1 The Master Unit is not allocated any words so any available node address can be used 2 Slaves can be allocated to the words labeled Allocation possible as long as the same words are not allocated to more than one Slave 99 Default Remote I O Allocation Section 8 3 8 3 5 Basic Application Procedure 100 1 2 3 1 10 Set the initial settings for the Master Unit Unit number UNIT No or MACHINE No on front panel switch Node address back panel DIP switch Baud rate back panel DIP switch Communications continue stop setting for communications error front pan el switch Set the initial settings for the Slaves Node address DIP swit
390. turned if the explicit message cannot be sent or times out Command Response code code Destination node address command The node address of the destination of the explicit message The node address of the local Master Unit is specified in the control data for the CMND 194 or IOWR instruction but the node address of the actual destination is specified here in the FINS command Service code command response A service code defined for DeviceNet In a normal response bit 15 of the service code specified in the command will be turned ON and returned In an error response 94 hex will always be returned Class ID command The class ID of the destination of the explicit message Instance ID command The instance ID of the destination of the explicit mes sage Service data command response The data defined for the services codes No of bytes received response The number of bytes received from the des tination node address local node Destination node address response The node address of the OMRON Special I O Slave Unit or slave manufactured by another company to which the explicit message was sent is returned Error code response An error code defined by DeviceNet 1 This command sends a DeviceNet defined explicit message to an OMRON Special I O Slave Unit or a Slave manufactured by another company and receives a response 2 Unlike other FINS commands this command is addressed to the local Mas ter Unit
391. ual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc Trademarks and Copyrights COMBICON is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact K K DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc PowerTap is a registered trademark of the Allen Bradley Company Inc The copyright to software provided in the C200HW DRM21 V1 and CVM1 DRM21 V1 belongs to S S Technologies Inc OMRON 1996 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permis sion of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa tion contained in this publication TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS 4 46s 4cencenseeaiaestwsacusewad OXI 1 Intended
392. ula below If the best location for each node can be determined using the formula the specifications for the power supply to each node can also be met Do not exceed the maximum current capacity of the cable Thick cable 8 A and thin cable 3 A Condition Formula 1 For the Voltage Drop of the Trunk Line O Ln x Re Nt x 0 005 x Inf 4 65 V Ln The distance between the power supply and the nodes not includ ing the lengths of the drop lines Re Maximum cable resistance Thick cable 0 015 Q m thin cable 0 069 Q m Nt The number of taps between each node and the power supply In The consumption current required for the communications power supply for each node 0 005 Q The contact resistance of the taps The permissible ambient power supplies of the communications and the internal circuit are as shown below As a rule the communications power supply and the internal circuit should be kept separate Refer to Section 9 Message Communications e Permissible ambient voltage of the communications power supply 11 to 25 VDC e Permissible ambient voltage of the internal circuit power supply 24 VDC from 10 to 15 The lowest permissible ambient voltage is 11 VDC for the communications pow er supply whereas it is 21 VDC including the allowance for the internal circuit power supply Due to this difference in lowest permissible ambient voltages when the internal circuit power is supplied by the communications power su
393. unications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs The IOWR instruction is used to send FINS commands for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs 9 4 1 Sending FINS Commands CS1 Series Ladder Symbols D Destination information C Control code ot S 18t source word S Sie Sia A a A a A Master Unit CPU Unit Interpretation nterpretation 1st response word Response monitoring time No of command bytes Command Response Response Execution Execution 1 For commands addressed to Master Unit 2 For commands addressed to CPU Unit Description IOWR transfers data from the words beginning at S to the specified Special I O Unit The control code C specified parameters for the instruction as shown in the following illustration Destination unit address see following table Destination node address 00 to 3E indicate nodes 0 to 63 Response Setting ON No response OFF Response returned Destination Unit Address CPU Unit 00 Communications Unit FE Special I O Unit 10 to 1F Unit No 10 132 Message Communications for CS1 series and C200HX HG HE PCs Section 9 4 The source words starting with S provide execution parameter and the com mand data as shown in the following table Word Contents First response word variable area specification see Section 11 Response monitoring time hex 0000 2s 1000 to 028F 0 1 to 65 5 s units of 0 1 s Above 028F 65 5s
394. ution condition 00000 10112 Message Commu nications Enabled Flag DM 0000 DM 1000 0009 00001 25506 Equals Flag IOWR write not completed 25506 Equals Flag IOWR write completed Compares contents of DM 2001 to 0000 after IOWR execution and response reception have been completed the previous cycle Places the contents of DM 2001 into DM 0006 if the comparison results is not equals error Shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit right to turn ON IR 00001 Shifts the contents of IR 000 one bit right to turn ON reset IR 00000 Shifts the contents of IR 0000 one bit to the left to turn ON IR 00001 Transfers the 9 words of command data starting from DM 1000 at the CPU Unit to the Master Unit unit number 0 If the write for IOWR has been completed IR 000 is shifted one bit to the right to turn ON reset IR 00000 If the write for IOWR has not been completed IR 000 is shifted one bit to the left to turn ON IR 00002 149 SECTION 10 FINS Commands to CVM1 and CV series CPU Units This section provides information on the FINS commands that can be addressed to the CPU Units of CVM1 and CV series PCs LOE Command List saririsa anaur alls Gebel pk BBG SOE Ie BNE ON ER NAR Bat L8 155 10 2 Memory Area Designations 0 e eee eet eee 156 10 2 1 Word Bit Addresses 0 0 ccc cc een eee nee en nes 158 10 2 2 Data Configurations s d cees ai e cece eee 158 10 3 Volume Labels and File Names
395. vided in this manual may result in personal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given xi This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller PC Systems and related devices PRECAUTIONS The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of PC Systems You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC System LIntended Atdience 4 24 SIA a ae a a aN 2 General Precautions s 2 20 02 fant puns Poh weep wees aes SOA Redes SABER e he 3 Safety Precautions disco cineca a Ba ee Pas A Sey Pee Aes eee es See 4 Operating Environment Precautions 0 0 eee eee 5 Application Precautions sioen toneate eee e eee nets 6 EC Directives xiv xiv xiv xiv XV xvi xiii Operating Environment Precautions 4 1 2 3 4 xiv Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowl edge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions N WARNING
396. won t be possible to start up the DeviceNet network if the same node address is used for the Master and another node node address duplication error Always turn OFF the PC before changing the DIP switch settings Front panel DIP Switch The DIP switch on the front of the Master Unit is used to set the baud rate and whether communications will be continued or stopped when a communications error occurs on S ac BO Baud rate w W Continue stop communications for communications error W Reserved Always OFF The settings of the DIP switch pins are shown in the following table All pins are set to OFF at the factory Function Setting Baud rate See the next table OFF ON Continue stop remote I O Continue communications communications for communication errors Reserved Stop communications Leave this pin set to OFF Baud rate 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps Not allowed This setting causes an incorrect switch setting error Set the same baud rate on all of the nodes Master and Slaves in the Network Any Slaves with baud rates different from the Master s rate won t be able to par ticipate in communications Pin 3 is used to set the whether or not communications will stop after a commu nications error Pins ooo yS OFF Continue communications ON Stop communications If pin 3 is ON remote I O communications will be stopped if a transfer error
397. y at End of Network current consumption for individual nodes is as follows Terminating resistor Trunk line 5 wire cable Terminating resistor Communications power supply 200 m ees Trunk line lt Power supply cable Total power supply length 200 m Total current consumption 0 1 0 15 0 05 0 25 0 1 0 65 A Maximum current for thick cable for 200 m see previous table 1 53 A Because the total current consumption 0 65 A is less than the maximum cur rent 1 53 A the power supply can be placed at the end of the network and sup ply current to all nodes Example 2 The following example shows a Network that requires power to be supplied for Communications Power 240 m on thick cable The power supply is located in the center of the network supp yn Center of Because the power supply is in the center the maximum current will flow both to the left and to the right enabling the supply of at least twice the maximum current as when the power supply is placed on the end of the network The current con sumption for individual nodes is as follows Terminating resistor Trunk line Trunk line Terminating resistor 5 wire cable 5 wire cable Communications power supply 120m 120m e Trunk line lt Power supply cable Total power supply length on left Total power supply length on right 120 m Total current consumption on left 0 1 0 25 0 2 0 55 A Total curre
398. y cables V VB Voltage drop at the power supply cables V In the DeviceNet network Va and Vg is taken as 5 V or less The voltage drop at the communications cables is specified at 5 V for a single power supply line V or V Of the permissible maximum voltage drop within the system 5 V the permissible voltage drops in the trunk lines and drop lines are 4 65 V and 0 35 V respectively Note Note that when the communications power supply for each node and the internal circuit power supply must be shared the permissible ambient voltage of the in ternal circuit is lower than the permissible maximum ambient voltage of the com munications power supply Also the maximum voltage drop for a single power supply line V or V must be taken as 1 V Of the permissible maximum voltage drop for a single power supply line 1 V the permissible voltage drop in the trunk lines and drop lines are 0 65 V and 0 35 V respectively 63 Step 2 Calculating the Best Location of the Actual Nodes Section 6 5 6 5 1 Formulas Supplying Power Independently for Communications and Internal Circuit Supplying Shared Power for Communications and Internal Circuit 64 Note Calculate the distance between the power supply and each node and the cur rent consumption of each node s communications Refer to the current con sumption overview in Appendix F Connectible Devices Try to calculate the best location for each node using the form
399. y using the second formula Nodes Located at Both Sides of the Power Supply Trunk Line Thick cable Drop Lines Thin cables System 1 Communications power supply System 2 Thick truck line 20 m gt lt 30 m gt Terminating resistor Terminating resistor Thin drop line Master 16 Input points 2 Analog inputs 16 Output points 16 Input points 10 units 5 units T ory 16 Output points units 4 Analog inputs 16 Input points 2 Analog inputs we J Ne e See Group Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Communications power supply 45 MA 30 mA x 7 255 mA 30 mA x 10 300 mA 30 mA x 5 150 mA 30 mA x 5 150 mA Internal circuit power supply 90 mA x 7 630 mA 80 mA x 10 800 mA 70 mA x 5 350 mA 140 mA x 5 700 mA e Calculate the voltage drop of each group in each system when the network is supplied by the communications power supply only System 1 Group 1 20 x 0 015 2 x 0 005 x 0 255 0 0791 V Group 2 10 x 0 015 1 x 0 005 x 0 3 0 0465 V Total voltage drop for System 1 0 0791 0 0465 0 1256 V 4 65 V Thus the best location for the nodes can be determined by using the first formula System 2 Group 3 10 x 0 015 1 x 0 005 x 0 15 0 0233 V Group 4 30 x 0 015 2 x 0 00
400. ycle time First word 1 Master status area 2 1 word 1 word First word 1 Current communications cycle time 1 word Master Status Area 1 This word contains flags that show the operating status of the network the re sults of software switch operations and current error data Registered Slaves Data When the Master is operating with the scan list enabled these flags indicate the Slaves that are registered in the scan list When the Master is operating with the 215 Status Area Section 13 3 scan list disabled these flags indicate the Slaves that have participated in com munications even one time Each bit is allocated to one Slave When the Enable Scan List software switch is turn ON to create the scan list the Slave for which bits are ON in the Registered Slave Data will be registered in the scan list Normal Slaves Data These flags indicate which Slaves are communicating normally Each bit is allo cated to one Slave Master Status Area 2 This word contains status data on the error history and Configurator scan lists Current Communications Cycle Time This word contains the current communications cycle time 13 3 1 Master Status Area 1 CVM1 and CV series PCs CIO 1501 25 x unit No CS1 series PCs CIO 2001 10 x unit No C200HX HG HE HS PCs The following diagram shows the structure of Master Status Area 1 Unit No 0 to 9 IR 101 10 x unit No Sot ep Unit No
401. ystem responsiveness fast enough Yes No Maximum Is the maximum network length within the specified Yes No network length range for the baud rate Does the maximum network length meet the Yes No required cable specifications for thick cable and thin cable Drop line length Are all drop lines 6 m or shorter Yes No Total drop line Is the total length of all the drop lines within the Yes No length specified range for the baud rate Permissible Thick cable Is the current 8 A or less Yes No cable current Thick cable Is the current 3 A or less Does the current capacity of the drop line satisfy Yes No the formula I 4 57 L Communications Location Does the location of the power supply meet the Yes No power supply required permissible voltage of all the nodes device Multiple power Are special Power Supply Taps being used Yes No supplies 68 SECTION 7 Installation This section describes the methods used to mount and wire the components of a DeviceNet CompoBus D network 7 1 General Precautions si picamere tet lad ada eon pe etd ed 70 7 2 MOUNN 3 esas Sse Rae S Shaw RASS Ba A he ae hae thes Rae ead ee 70 7 2 1 Mounting Master Units 00 0 ec ee eee 70 7 2 2 Mounting T branch Taps and Terminating Resistors 00005 72 7 3 Connecting Communications Cables 0 00 eee eee eee 72 7 4 Connecting Communications Cables to T branch Taps
402. ytes Command Disk no File name code Response Block 22 09 Command Response code code Parameters Disk no command Set to 0000 for the file device memory cards File name command The file to be checked refer to 10 3 Volume Labels and File Names for the configuration of the file name File Data Check The configuration of a file stored in the file device is as follows 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Byte position from beginning of file Checksum Data Checksum The first two bytes of a file are called the checksum which is the rightmost two bytes resulting from adding all data words two bytes each If the num ber of all bytes is odd a byte of 00 is added to it so that the number of the number of bytes is even Example e Data 13 3A E4 F3 CC 0B 3C 5F A2 e Words 133A E4F3 CCOB 3C5F A200 e Total 133A E4F3 CCOB 3C5F A200 2A297 e Checksum A2 97 191 MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFER Section 10 45 Data File data refers to the data in a file that a file device stores A file data check is done with the checksum To complete a file data check the data words starting from the third byte are added and the result is compared with the checksum If these values are the same the file is assumed to contain no errors if the values differ a parity sum check error will result A file with a capacity of two bytes has a checksum of 0000 10 45 MEMORY AREA FILE TRANSFE

OPERATION MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents